Acts of Apostles

1 Τὸν The μὲν indeed πρῶτον first λόγον word ἐποιησάμην I made περὶ about πάντων, all (things), ὦ O Θεόφιλε, Theophilus, ὧν of which ἤρξατο started Ἰησοῦς Jesus ποιεῖν to be doing τε and καὶ also διδάσκειν to be teaching 2 ἄχρι until ἧς which ἡμέρας day ἐντειλάμενος having given commandment τοῖς to the ἀποστόλοις apostles διὰ through πνεύματος spirit ἁγίου holy οὓς whom ἐξελέξατο he chose ἀνελήμφθη· he was received up; 3 οἷς to whom καὶ also παρέστησεν he made stand beside ἑαυτὸν himself ζῶντα living μετὰ after τὸ the παθεῖν to suffer αὐτὸν him ἐν in πολλοῖς many τεκμηρίοις, tokens, δι’ through ἡμερῶν days τεσσεράκοντα forty ὀπτανόμενος being seen αὐτοῖς to them καὶ and λέγων saying τὰ the (things) περὶ about τῆς the βασιλείας kingdom τοῦ of the θεοῦ. God. 4 καὶ And συναλιζόμενος being met together παρήγγειλεν he gave orders αὐτοῖς to them ἀπὸ from Ἰεροσολύμων Jerusalem μὴ not χωρίζεσθαι, to withdraw, ἀλλὰ but περιμένειν to be remaining around for τὴν the ἐπαγγελίαν promise τοῦ of the πατρὸς Father ἣν which ἠκούσατέ YOU heard μου· of me; 5 ὅτι because Ἰωάνης John μὲν indeed ἐβάπτισεν baptized ὕδατι, to water, ὑμεῖς YOU δὲ but ἐν in πνεύματι spirit βαπτισθήσεσθε will be baptized ἁγίῳ to holy οὐ not μετὰ after πολλὰς many ταύτας these ἡμέρας. days.

6 Οἱ The (ones) μὲν indeed οὖν therefore συνελθόντες having come together ἠρώτων they were questioning αὐτὸν him λέγοντες saying Κύριε, Lord, εἰ if ἐν in τῷ the χρόνῳ time τούτῳ this ἀποκαθιστάνεις are you restoring τὴν the βασιλείαν kingdom τῷ to the Ἰσραήλ; Israel? 7 εἶπεν He said πρὸς toward αὐτούς them Οὐχ Not ὑμῶν of YOU ἐστὶν it is γνῶναι to know χρόνους times ἢ or καιροὺς appointed times οὓς which ὁ the πατὴρ Father ἔθετο put ἐν in τῇ the ἰδίᾳ own ἐξουσίᾳ, authority, 8 ἀλλὰ but λήμψεσθε YOU will receive δύναμιν power ἐπελθόντος having come upon τοῦ of the ἁγίου holy πνεύματος spirit ἐφ’ upon ὑμᾶς, YOU, καὶ and ἔσεσθέ YOU will be μου of me μάρτυρες witnesses ἔν in τε and Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem καὶ and ἐν in πάσῃ all τῇ the Ἰουδαίᾳ Judea καὶ and Σαμαρίᾳ Samaria καὶ and ἕως until ἐσχάτου extremity τῆς of the γῆς. earth. 9 καὶ And ταῦτα these (things) εἰπὼν having said βλεπόντων looking αὐτῶν of them ἐπήρθη, he was lifted up, καὶ and νεφέλη cloud ὑπέλαβεν took from underneath αὐτὸν him ἀπὸ from τῶν the ὀφθαλμῶν eyes αὐτῶν. of them. 10 καὶ And ὡς as ἀτενίζοντες gazing ἦσαν they were εἰς into τὸν the οὐρανὸν heaven πορευομένου going his way αὐτοῦ, of him, καὶ and ἰδοὺ look! ἄνδρες male persons δύο two παριστήκεισαν had stood alongside αὐτοῖς to them ἐν in ἐσθήσεσι garments λευκαῖς, white, 11 οἳ who καὶ also εἶπαν said Ἄνδρες Male persons Γαλιλαῖοι, Galileans, τί why ἑστήκατε have YOU stood βλέποντες looking εἰς into τὸν the οὐρανόν; heaven? οὗτος This ὁ the Ἰησοῦς Jesus ὁ the (one) ἀναλημφθεὶς having been received up ἀφ’ from ὑμῶν YOU εἰς into τὸν the οὐρανὸν heaven οὕτως thus ἐλεύσεται will come ὃν which τρόπον manner ἐθεάσασθε YOU viewed αὐτὸν him πορευόμενον going his way εἰς into τὸν the οὐρανόν. heaven.

12 Τότε Then ὑπέστρεψαν they returned εἰς into Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem ἀπὸ from ὄρους mountain τοῦ the (one) καλουμένου being called ᾿Ελαιῶνος, of Olive grove, ὅ which ἐστιν is ἐγγὺς near Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem σαββάτου of sabbath ἔχον having ὁδόν. way. 13 Καὶ And ὅτε when εἰσῆλθον, they entered, εἰς into τὸ the ὑπερῷον upper chamber ἀνέβησαν they went up οὗ where ἦσαν they were καταμένοντες, remaining down, ὅ the τε and Πέτρος Peter καὶ and Ἰωάνης John καὶ and Ἰάκωβος James καὶ and ᾿Ανδρέας, Andrew, Φίλιππος Philip καὶ and Θωμᾶς, Thomas, Βαρθολομαῖος Bartholomew καὶ and Μαθθαῖος, Matthew, Ἰάκωβος James Ἁλφαίου of Alphaeus καὶ and Σίμων Simon ὁ the ζηλωτὴς zealot καὶ and Ἰούδας Judas Ἰακώβου. of James. 14 οὗτοι These πάντες all ἦσαν were προσκαρτεροῦντες persevering ὁμοθυμαδὸν like-mindedly τῇ to the προσευχῇ prayer σὺν together with γυναιξὶν women καὶ and Μαριὰμ Mary τῇ to the μητρὶ mother τοῦ of the Ἰησοῦ Jesus καὶ and σὺν together with τοῖς the ἀδελφοῖς brothers αὐτοῦ. of him.

15 Καὶ And ἐν in ταῖς the ἡμέραις days ταύταις these ἀναστὰς having stood up Πέτρος Peter ἐν in μέσῳ midst τῶν of the ἀδελφῶν brothers εἶπεν said ἦν was τε and ὄχλος crowd ὀνομάτων of names ἐπὶ upon τὸ the αὐτὸ very (thing) ὡς as ἑκατὸν hundred εἴκοσι twenty 16 Ἄνδρες Male persons ἀδελφοί, brothers, ἔδει it was necessary πληρωθῆναι to be fulfilled τὴν the γραφὴν scripture ἣν which προεῖπε foretold τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit τὸ the ἅγιον holy διὰ through στόματος mouth Δαυεὶδ of David περὶ about Ἰούδα Judas τοῦ of the (one) γενομένου having become ὁδηγοῦ guide τοῖς to the (ones) συλλαβοῦσιν having taken with Ἰησοῦν, Jesus, 17 ὅτι because κατηριθμημένος having been numbered down ἦν he was ἐν in ἡμῖν us καὶ and ἔλαχεν obtained τὸν the κλῆρον lot τῆς of the διακονίας service ταύτης.— this.— 18 Οὗτος This (one) μὲν indeed οὖν therefore ἐκτήσατο acquired χωρίον piece of ground ἐκ out of μισθοῦ wages τῆς of the ἀδικίας, unrighteousness, καὶ and πρηνὴς headlong γενόμενος having become ἐλάκησεν he burst with crash μέσος, middle, καὶ and ἐξεχύθη was poured out πάντα all τὰ the σπλάγχνα intestines αὐτοῦ. of him. 19 καὶ And γνωστὸν known ἐγένετο it became πᾶσι to all τοῖς the (ones) κατοικοῦσιν inhabiting Ἰερουσαλήμ, Jerusalem, ὥστε as-and κληθῆναι to be called τὸ the χωρίον piece of ground ἐκεῖνο that τῇ to the διαλέκτῳ language αὐτῶν of them Ἁκελδαμάχ, Akeldama, τοῦτ’ this ἔστιν is Χωρίον Piece of ground Αἵματος.— of Blood.— 20 Γέγραπται It has been written γὰρ for ἐν in Βίβλῳ Book Ψαλμῶν of Psalms Γενηθήτω Let become ἡ the ἔπαυλις lodging place αὐτοῦ of him ἔρημος desolate καὶ and μὴ not ἔστω let be ὁ the (one) κατοικῶν inhabiting ἐν in αὐτῇ, it, καί and Τὴν The ἐπισκοπὴν overseership αὐτοῦ of him λαβέτω let take ἕτερος. different (one). 21 δεῖ It is necessary οὖν therefore τῶν of the (ones) συνελθόντων having come together ἡμῖν to us ἀνδρῶν of male persons ἐν in παντὶ all χρόνῳ time ᾧ to which εἰσῆλθεν went in καὶ and ἐξῆλθεν went out ἐφ’ upon ἡμᾶς us ὁ the κύριος Lord Ἰησοῦς, Jesus, 22 ἀρξάμενος having started ἀπὸ from τοῦ the βαπτίσματος baptism Ἰωάνου of John ἕως until τῆς the ἡμέρας day ἧς of which ἀνελήμφθη he was received up ἀφ’ from ἡμῶν, us, μάρτυρα witness τῆς of the ἀναστάσεως resurrection αὐτοῦ of him σὺν together with ἡμῖν us γενέσθαι to become ἕνα one τούτων. of these.

23 καὶ And ἔστησαν they made to stand δύο, two, Ἰωσὴφ Joseph τὸν the (one) καλούμενον being called Βαρσαββᾶν, Barsabbas, ὃς who ἐπεκλήθη was surnamed Ἰοῦστος, Justus, καὶ and Μαθθίαν. Matthias. 24 καὶ And προσευξάμενοι having prayed εἶπαν they said Σὺ You κύριε Lord καρδιογνῶστα knower of hearts πάντων, of all, ἀνάδειξον show up ὃν whom ἐξελέξω, you chose, ἐκ out of τούτων these τῶν the δύο two ἕνα, one, 25 λαβεῖν to receive τὸν the τόπον place τῆς of the διακονίας service ταύτης this καὶ and ἀποστολῆς, apostleship, ἀφ’ from ἧς which παρέβη went aside Ἰούδας Judas πορευθῆναι to go εἰς into τὸν the τόπον place τὸν the ἴδιον. own. 26 καὶ And ἔδωκαν they gave κλήρους lots αὐτοῖς, to them, καὶ and ἔπεσεν fell ὁ the κλῆρος lot ἐπὶ upon Μαθθίαν, Matthias, καὶ and συνκατεψηφίσθη he was reckoned along μετὰ with τῶν the ἕνδεκα eleven ἀποστόλων. apostles.

2 Καὶ And ἐν in τῷ the συμπληροῦσθαι to be being completed τὴν the ἡμέραν day τῆς of the πεντηκοστῆς Pentecost ἦσαν they were πάντες all ὁμοῦ together ἐπὶ upon τὸ the αὐτό, very (thing), 2 καὶ and ἐγένετο occurred ἄφνω suddenly ἐκ out of τοῦ the οὐρανοῦ heaven ἦχος noise ὥσπερ as-even φερομένης being borne πνοῆς of blowing βιαίας violent καὶ and ἐπλήρωσεν it filled ὅλον whole τὸν the οἶκον house οὗ where ἦσαν they were καθήμενοι, sitting, 3 καὶ and ὤφθησαν they were seen αὐτοῖς to them διαμεριζόμεναι being distributed γλῶσσαι tongues ὡσεὶ as if πυρός, of fire, καὶ and ἐκάθισεν it sat down ἐφ’ upon ἕνα one ἕκαστον each αὐτῶν, of them, 4 καὶ and ἐπλήσθησαν they became filled πάντες all πνεύματος of spirit ἁγίου, holy, καὶ and ἤρξαντο they started λαλεῖν to be speaking ἑτέραις to different γλώσσαις tongues καθὼς according as τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit ἐδίδου was giving ἀποφθέγγεσθαι to be uttering αὐτοῖς. to them.

5 ῏Ησαν Were δὲ but ἐν in Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem κατοικοῦντες inhabiting Ἰουδαῖοι, Jews, ἄνδρες male persons εὐλαβεῖς holding well ἀπὸ from παντὸς every ἔθνους nation τῶν of the (ones) ὑπὸ under τὸν the οὐρανόν· heaven; 6 γενομένης having occurred δὲ but τῆς of the φωνῆς sound ταύτης this συνῆλθε came together τὸ the πλῆθος multitude καὶ and συνεχύθη, was confused, ὅτι because ἤκουσεν heard εἷς one ἕκαστος each τῇ to the ἰδίᾳ own διαλέκτῳ language λαλούντων speaking αὐτῶν· of them; 7 ἐξίσταντο they were stood out of selves δὲ but καὶ and ἐθαύμαζον they were wondering λέγοντες saying Οὐχὶ Not ἰδοὺ look πάντες all οὗτοί these εἰσιν are οἱ the (ones) λαλοῦντες speaking Γαλιλαῖοι; Galileans? 8 καὶ And πῶς how ἡμεῖς we ἀκούομεν are hearing ἕκαστος each τῇ to the ἰδίᾳ own διαλέκτῳ language ἡμῶν of us ἐν in ᾗ which ἐγεννήθημεν; we were generated? 9 Πάρθοι Parthians καὶ and Μῆδοι Medes καὶ and ᾿Ελαμεῖται, Elamites, καὶ and οἱ the (ones) κατοικοῦντες inhabiting τὴν the Μεσοποταμίαν, Mesopotamia, Ἰουδαίαν Judea τε and καὶ also Καππαδοκίαν, Cappadocia, Πόντον Pontus καὶ and τὴν the ᾿Ασίαν, Asia, 10 Φρυγίαν Phrygia τε and καὶ also Παμφυλίαν, Pamphylia, Αἴγυπτον Egypt καὶ and τὰ the μέρη parts τῆς of the Λιβύης Libya τῆς the κατὰ down on Κυρήνην, Cyrene, καὶ and οἱ the (ones) ἐπιδημοῦντες sojourning Ῥωμαῖοι, Romans, Ἰουδαῖοί Jews τε and καὶ also προσήλυτοι, proselytes, 11 Κρῆτες Cretans καὶ and Ἄραβες, Arabians, ἀκούομεν we are hearing λαλούντων speaking αὐτῶν of them ταῖς to the ἡμετέραις our γλώσσαις tongues τὰ the μεγαλεῖα magnificent (things) τοῦ of the θεοῦ. God. 12 ἐξίσταντο They were stood out of selves δὲ but πάντες all καὶ and διηποροῦντο, were perplexed, ἄλλος other πρὸς toward ἄλλον other λέγοντες saying Τί What θέλει is willing τοῦτο this εἶναι; to be? 13 ἕτεροι Different (ones) δὲ but διαχλευάζοντες thoroughly joking ἔλεγον were saying ὅτι that Γλεύκους Sweet wine μεμεστωμένοι having been filled εἰσίν. they are.

14 Σταθεὶς Having stood δὲ but ὁ the Πέτρος Peter σὺν together with τοῖς the ἕνδεκα eleven ἐπῆρεν lifted up τὴν the φωνὴν voice αὐτοῦ of him καὶ and ἀπεφθέγξατο uttered αὐτοῖς to them Ἄνδρες Male persons Ἰουδαῖοι Jews καὶ and οἱ the (ones) κατοικοῦντες inhabiting Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem πάντες, all, τοῦτο this ὑμῖν to YOU γνωστὸν known ἔστω let be καὶ and ἐνωτίσασθε give ear to τὰ the ῥήματά sayings μου. of me. 15 οὐ Not γὰρ for ὡς as ὑμεῖς YOU ὑπολαμβάνετε are supposing οὗτοι these μεθύουσιν, are being drunk, ἔστιν it is γὰρ for ὥρα hour τρίτη third τῆς of the ἡμέρας, day, 16 ἀλλὰ but τοῦτό this ἐστιν is τὸ the (thing) εἰρημένον having been said διὰ through τοῦ the προφήτου prophet Ἰωήλ Joel 17 Καὶ And ἔσται it will be ἐν in ταῖς the ἐσχάταις last ἡμέραις, days, λέγει is saying ὁ the θεός, God, ἐκχεῶ I shall pour out ἀπὸ from τοῦ the πνεύματός spirit μου of me ἐπὶ upon πᾶσαν all σάρκα, flesh, καὶ and προφητεύσουσιν will prophesy οἱ the υἱοὶ sons ὑμῶν of YOU καὶ and αἱ the θυγατέρες daughters ὑμῶν, of YOU, καὶ and οἱ the νεανίσκοι young men ὑμῶν of YOU ὁράσεις visions ὄψονται, will see, καὶ and οἱ the πρεσβύτεροι older men ὑμῶν of YOU ἐνυπνίοις dreams ἐνυπνιασθήσονται· will dream; 18 καί and γε if fact ἐπὶ upon τοὺς the δούλους slaves μου of me καὶ and ἐπὶ upon τὰς the δούλας female slaves μου of me ἐν in ταῖς the ἡμέραις days ἐκείναις those ἐκχεῶ I will pour out ἀπὸ from τοῦ the πνεύματός spirit μου, of me, καὶ and προφητεύσουσιν. they will prophesy. 19 Καὶ And δώσω I shall give τέρατα portents ἐν in τῷ the οὐρανῷ heaven ἄνω above καὶ and σημεῖα signs ἐπὶ upon τῆς the γῆς earth κάτω, below, αἷμα blood καὶ and πῦρ fire καὶ and ἀτμίδα mist καπνοῦ· of smoke; 20 ὁ the ἥλιος sun μεταστραφήσεται will be turned across εἰς into σκότος darkness καὶ and ἡ the σελήνη moon εἰς into αἷμα blood πρὶν before ἐλθεῖν to come ἡμέραν day Κυρίου of Lord τὴν the μεγάλην great καὶ and ἐπιφανῆ. illustrious. 21 Καὶ And ἔσται it will be πᾶς everyone ὃς who ἐὰν if ever ἐπικαλέσηται should call upon τὸ the ὄνομα name Κυρίου of Lord σωθήσεται. he will be saved.

22 Ἄνδρες Male persons Ἰσραηλεῖται, Israelites, ἀκούσατε hear YOU τοὺς the λόγους words τούτους. these. Ἰησοῦν Jesus τὸν the Ναζωραῖον, Nazarene, ἄνδρα male person ἀποδεδειγμένον having been shown forth ἀπὸ from τοῦ the θεοῦ God εἰς into ὑμᾶς YOU δυνάμεσι to powers καὶ and τέρασι to portents καὶ and σημείοις to signs οἷς to which ἐποίησεν did δι’ through αὐτοῦ him ὁ the θεὸς God ἐν in μέσῳ midst ὑμῶν, of YOU, καθὼς according as αὐτοὶ very ones οἴδατε, YOU have known, 23 τοῦτον this (one) τῇ to the ὡρισμένῃ having been determined βουλῇ counsel καὶ and προγνώσει foreknowledge τοῦ of the θεοῦ God ἔκδοτον given out διὰ through χειρὸς hand ἀνόμων of lawless (ones) προσπήξαντες having fastened ἀνείλατε, YOU took up, 24 ὃν whom ὁ the θεὸς God ἀνέστησεν resurrected λύσας having loosened τὰς the ὠδῖνας pangs τοῦ of the θανάτου, death, καθότι according to which οὐκ not ἦν it was δυνατὸν possible κρατεῖσθαι to be held fast αὐτὸν him ὑπ’ by αὐτοῦ· it; 25 Δαυεὶδ David γὰρ for λέγει is saying εἰς into αὐτόν him Προορώμην I was seeing before myself τὸν the κύριον Lord ἐνώπιόν in sight μου of me διὰ through παντός, all, ὅτι because ἐκ out of δεξιῶν right [parts] μού of me ἐστιν he is ἵνα in order that μὴ not σαλευθῶ. I should be shaken. 26 διὰ Through τοῦτο this ηὐφράνθη was cheered up μου of me ἡ the καρδία heart καὶ and ἠγαλλιάσατο exulted ἡ the γλῶσσά tongue μου, of me, ἔτι yet δὲ but καὶ also ἡ the σάρξ flesh μου of me κατασκηνώσει will tent down ἐπ’ upon ἐλπίδι· hope; 27 ὅτι because οὐκ not ἐνκαταλείψεις you will forsake τὴν the ψυχήν soul μου of me εἰς into ᾅδην, hades, οὐδὲ neither δώσεις you will give τὸν the ὅσιόν loyal one σου of you ἰδεῖν to see διαφθοράν. corruption. 28 ἐγνώρισάς You made known μοι to me ὁδοὺς ways ζωῆς, of life, πληρώσεις you will fill με me εὐφροσύνης of good cheer μετὰ with τοῦ the προσώπου face σου. of you.

29 Ἄνδρες Male persons ἀδελφοί, brothers, ἐξὸν allowable εἰπεῖν to say μετὰ with παρρησίας outspokenness πρὸς toward ὑμᾶς YOU περὶ about τοῦ the πατριάρχου patriarch Δαυείδ, David, ὅτι that καὶ and ἐτελεύτησεν he deceased καὶ and ἐτάφη he was buried καὶ and τὸ the μνῆμα tomb αὐτοῦ of him ἔστιν is ἐν in ἡμῖν us ἄχρι until τῆς the ἡμέρας day ταύτης· this; 30 προφήτης prophet οὖν therefore ὑπάρχων, being, καὶ and εἰδὼς having known ὅτι that ὅρκῳ to oath ὤμοσεν swore αὐτῷ to him ὁ the θεὸς God ἐκ out of καρποῦ fruit τῆς of the ὀσφύος loin αὐτοῦ of him καθίσαι to seat ἐπὶ upon τὸν the θρόνον throne αὐτοῦ, of him, 31 προιδὼν having foreseen ἐλάλησεν he spoke περὶ about τῆς the ἀναστάσεως resurrection τοῦ of the χριστοῦ Christ ὅτι that οὔτε neither ἐνκατελείφθη he was forsaken εἰς into ᾅδην hades οὔτε nor ἡ the σὰρξ flesh αὐτοῦ of him εἶδεν saw διαφθοράν. corruption. 32 τοῦτον This τὸν the Ἰησοῦν Jesus ἀνέστησεν resurrected ὁ the θεός, God, οὗ of which πάντες all ἡμεῖς we ἐσμὲν are μάρτυρες. witnesses. 33 τῇ To the δεξιᾷ right [hand] οὖν therefore τοῦ of the θεοῦ God ὑψωθεὶς having been put on high τήν the τε and ἐπαγγελίαν promise τοῦ of the πνεύματος spirit τοῦ the ἁγίου holy λαβὼν having received παρὰ beside τοῦ of the πατρὸς Father ἐξέχεεν he poured out τοῦτο this ὃ which ὑμεῖς YOU καὶ and βλέπετε YOU are looking at καὶ and ἀκούετε. YOU are hearing. 34 οὐ Not γὰρ for Δαυεὶδ David ἀνέβη went up εἰς into τοὺς the οὐρανούς, heavens, λέγει he is saying δὲ but αὐτός he Εἶπεν Said Κύριος Lord τῷ to the κυρίῳ Lord μου of me Κάθου Be sitting ἐκ out of δεξιῶν right [parts] μου of me 35 ἕως until ἂν likely θῶ I should put τοὺς the ἐχθρούς enemies σου of you ὑποπόδιον footstool τῶν of the ποδῶν feet σου. of you. 36 ἀσφαλῶς Certainly οὖν therefore γινωσκέτω let be knowing πᾶς all οἶκος house Ἰσραὴλ of Israel ὅτι that καὶ and κύριον Lord αὐτὸν him καὶ and χριστὸν Christ ἐποίησεν made ὁ the θεός, God, τοῦτον this τὸν the Ἰησοῦν Jesus ὃν whom ὑμεῖς YOU ἐσταυρώσατε. put on stake.

37 ᾿Ακούσαντες Having heard δὲ but κατενύγησαν they were pierced down τὴν the καρδίαν, heart, εἶπάν they said τε and πρὸς toward τὸν the Πέτρον Peter καὶ and τοὺς the λοιποὺς leftover (ones) ἀποστόλους apostles Τί What ποιήσωμεν, should we do, ἄνδρες male persons ἀδελφοί; brothers? 38 Πέτρος Peter δὲ but πρὸς toward αὐτούς them Μετανοήσατε, Repent YOU, καὶ and βαπτισθήτω let him be baptized ἕκαστος each ὑμῶν of YOU ἐν in τῷ the ὀνόματι name Ἰησοῦ of Jesus Χριστοῦ Christ εἰς into ἄφεσιν letting go off τῶν of the ἁμαρτιῶν sins ὑμῶν, of YOU, καὶ and λήμψεσθε YOU will receive τὴν the δωρεὰν free gift τοῦ of the ἁγίου holy πνεύματος· spirit; 39 ὑμῖν to YOU γάρ for ἐστιν is ἡ the ἐπαγγελία promise καὶ and τοῖς to the τέκνοις children ὑμῶν of YOU καὶ and πᾶσι to all τοῖς the (ones) εἰς into μακρὰν long [way] ὅσους as many as ἂν likely προσκαλέσηται might call toward self Κύριος Lord ὁ the θεὸς God ἡμῶν. of us. 40 ἑτέροις To different τε and λόγοις words πλείοσιν more διεμαρτύρατο, he was thoroughly bearing witness, καὶ and παρεκάλει he was exhorting αὐτοὺς them λέγων saying Σώθητε Be YOU saved ἀπὸ from τῆς the γενεᾶς generation τῆς of the σκολιᾶς crooked ταύτης. this. 41 Οἱ The (ones) μὲν indeed οὖν therefore ἀποδεξάμενοι having received τὸν the λόγον word αὐτοῦ of him ἐβαπτίσθησαν, they were baptized, καὶ and προσετέθησαν were added ἐν in τῇ the ἡμέρᾳ day ἐκείνῃ that ψυχαὶ souls ὡσεὶ as if τρισχίλιαι. three thousand. 42 ἦσαν They were δὲ but προσκαρτεροῦντες persevering τῇ to the διδαχῇ teaching τῶν of the ἀποστόλων apostles καὶ and τῇ to the κοινωνίᾳ, common participation, τῇ to the κλάσει breaking τοῦ of the ἄρτου bread καὶ and ταῖς to the προσευχαῖς. prayers.

43 ᾿Εγίνετο Was occurring δὲ but πάσῃ to every ψυχῇ soul φόβος, fear, πολλὰ many δὲ but τέρατα portents καὶ and σημεῖα signs διὰ through τῶν the ἀποστόλων apostles ἐγίνετο. was occurring. 44 πάντες All δὲ but οἱ the (ones) πιστεύσαντες having believed ἐπὶ upon τὸ the αὐτὸ very [place] εἶχον were having ἅπαντα all (things) κοινά, common, 45 καὶ and τὰ the κτήματα possessions καὶ and τὰς the ὑπάρξεις properties ἐπίπρασκον they were selling καὶ and διεμέριζον they were distributing αὐτὰ them πᾶσιν to all καθότι according as ἄν likely τις anyone χρείαν need εἶχεν· was having; 46 καθ’ according to ἡμέραν day τε and προσκαρτεροῦντες persevering ὁμοθυμαδὸν like-mindedly ἐν in τῷ the ἱερῷ, temple, κλῶντές breaking τε and κατ’ according to οἶκον house ἄρτον, bread, μετελάμβανον they were partaking τροφῆς of food ἐν in ἀγαλλιάσει exultation καὶ and ἀφελότητι simplicity καρδίας, of heart, 47 αἰνοῦντες praising τὸν the θεὸν God καὶ and ἔχοντες having χάριν favor πρὸς toward ὅλον whole τὸν the λαόν. people. ὁ The δὲ but κύριος Lord προσετίθει was adding τοὺς the (ones) σωζομένους being saved καθ’ according to ἡμέραν day ἐπὶ upon τὸ the αὐτό. very [time].

3 Πέτρος Peter δὲ but καὶ and Ἰωάνης John ἀνέβαινον were going up εἰς into τὸ the ἱερὸν temple ἐπὶ upon τὴν the ὥραν hour τῆς of the προσευχῆς prayer τὴν the ἐνάτην, ninth, 2 καί and τις some ἀνὴρ man χωλὸς lame ἐκ out of κοιλίας cavity μητρὸς of mother αὐτοῦ of him ὑπάρχων being ἐβαστάζετο, he was being carried, ὃν whom ἐτίθουν they were putting καθ’ according to ἡμέραν day πρὸς toward τὴν the θύραν door τοῦ of the ἱεροῦ temple τὴν the λεγομένην being said Ὡραίαν Beautiful τοῦ of the αἰτεῖν to be asking ἐλεημοσύνην gift of mercy παρὰ beside τῶν of the (ones) εἰσπορευομένων going their way inside εἰς into τὸ the ἱερόν, temple, 3 ὃς who ἰδὼν having seen Πέτρον Peter καὶ and Ἰωάνην John μέλλοντας being about εἰσιέναι to be going in εἰς into τὸ the ἱερὸν temple ἠρώτα he was requesting ἐλεημοσύνην gift of mercy λαβεῖν. to receive. 4 ἀτενίσας Having gazed δὲ but Πέτρος Peter εἰς into αὐτὸν him σὺν together with τῷ the Ἰωάνῃ John εἶπεν he said Βλέψον Look εἰς into ἡμᾶς. us. 5 ὁ The (one) δὲ but ἐπεῖχεν was having [eyes] upon αὐτοῖς to them προσδοκῶν expecting τι something παρ’ beside αὐτῶν of them λαβεῖν. to receive. 6 εἶπεν Said δὲ but Πέτρος Peter ᾿Αργύριον Silver καὶ and χρυσίον gold οὐχ not ὑπάρχει is existing μοι, to me, ὃ which δὲ but ἔχω I am having τοῦτό this σοι to you δίδωμι· I am giving; ἐν in τῷ the ὀνόματι name Ἰησοῦ of Jesus Χριστοῦ Christ τοῦ the Ναζωραίου Nazarene περιπάτει. be walking. 7 καὶ And πιάσας having taken hold of αὐτὸν him τῆς of the δεξιᾶς right χειρὸς hand ἤγειρεν he raised up αὐτόν· him; παραχρῆμα instantly δὲ but ἐστερεώθησαν were made firm αἱ the βάσεις soles αὐτοῦ of him καὶ and τὰ the σφυδρά, ankle bones, 8 καὶ and ἐξαλλόμενος leaping out ἔστη he stood καὶ and περιεπάτει, he was walking, καὶ and εἰσῆλθεν he entered σὺν together with αὐτοῖς them εἰς into τὸ the ἱερὸν temple περιπατῶν walking καὶ and ἁλλόμενος leaping καὶ and αἰνῶν praising τὸν the θεόν. God. 9 καὶ And εἶδεν saw πᾶς all ὁ the λαὸς people αὐτὸν him περιπατοῦντα walking καὶ and αἰνοῦντα praising τὸν the θεόν, God, 10 ἐπεγίνωσκον they were recognizing δὲ but αὐτὸν him ὅτι that οὗτος this ἦν was ὁ the (one) πρὸς toward τὴν the ἐλεημοσύνην gift of mercy καθήμενος sitting ἐπὶ upon τῇ the Ὡραίᾳ Beautiful Πύλῃ Gate τοῦ of the ἱεροῦ, temple, καὶ and ἐπλήσθησαν they were filled θάμβους of astonishment καὶ and ἐκστάσεως of ecstasy ἐπὶ upon τῷ the (thing) συμβεβηκότι having come together αὐτῷ. to him.

11 Κρατοῦντος Holding fast δὲ but αὐτοῦ of him τὸν the Πέτρον Peter καὶ and τὸν the Ἰωάνην John συνέδραμεν ran together πᾶς all ὁ the λαὸς people πρὸς toward αὐτοὺς them ἐπὶ upon τῇ the στοᾷ colonnade τῇ the καλουμένῃ being called Σολομῶντος of Solomon ἔκθαμβοι. astonished out. 12 ἰδὼν Having seen δὲ but ὁ the Πέτρος Peter ἀπεκρίνατο answered πρὸς toward τὸν the λαόν people Ἄνδρες Male persons Ἰσραηλεῖται, Israelites, τί why θαυμάζετε are YOU wondering ἐπὶ upon τούτῳ, this, ἢ or ἡμῖν to us τί why ἀτενίζετε are YOU gazing ὡς as ἰδίᾳ to own δυνάμει power ἢ or εὐσεβείᾳ to well-reverentialness πεποιηκόσιν to (ones) having made τοῦ of the περιπατεῖν to be walking αὐτόν; him? 13 ὁ The θεὸς God ᾿Αβραὰμ of Abraham καὶ and Ἰσαὰκ of Isaac καὶ and Ἰακώβ, of Jacob, ὁ the θεὸς God τῶν of the πατέρων fathers ἡμῶν, of us, ἐδόξασεν glorified τὸν the παῖδα boy αὐτοῦ of him Ἰησοῦν, Jesus, ὃν whom ὑμεῖς YOU μὲν indeed παρεδώκατε gave beside καὶ and ἠρνήσασθε YOU disowned κατὰ down πρόσωπον face Πειλάτου, of Pilate, κρίναντος having judged ἐκείνου of that (one) ἀπολύειν· to be releasing; 14 ὑμεῖς YOU δὲ but τὸν the ἅγιον holy καὶ and δίκαιον righteous (one) ἠρνήσασθε, YOU disowned, καὶ and ᾐτήσασθε YOU asked for ἄνδρα male person φονέα murderer χαρισθῆναι to be kindly given ὑμῖν, to YOU, 15 τὸν the δὲ but ἀρχηγὸν chief leader τῆς of the ζωῆς life ἀπεκτείνατε, YOU killed, ὃν whom ὁ the θεὸς God ἤγειρεν raised up ἐκ out of νεκρῶν, dead (ones), οὗ of which ἡμεῖς we μάρτυρές witnesses ἐσμεν. we are. 16 καὶ And τῇ to the πίστει faith τοῦ of the ὀνόματος name αὐτοῦ of him τοῦτον this (one) ὃν whom θεωρεῖτε YOU are beholding καὶ and οἴδατε YOU have known ἐστερέωσεν made firm τὸ the ὄνομα name αὐτοῦ, of him, καὶ and ἡ the πίστις faith ἡ the (one) δι’ through αὐτοῦ him ἔδωκεν gave αὐτῷ to him τὴν the ὁλοκληρίαν whole allotment ταύτην this ἀπέναντι from in front πάντων of all ὑμῶν. of YOU. 17 καὶ And νῦν, now, ἀδελφοί, brothers, οἶδα I have known ὅτι that κατὰ down ἄγνοιαν ignorance ἐπράξατε, YOU acted, ὥσπερ as-even καὶ also οἱ the ἄρχοντες rulers ὑμῶν· of YOU; 18 ὁ the δὲ but θεὸς God ἃ which (things) προκατήγγειλεν he published beforehand διὰ through στόματος mouth πάντων of all τῶν the προφητῶν prophets παθεῖν to suffer τὸν the χριστὸν Christ αὐτοῦ of him ἐπλήρωσεν he fulfilled οὕτως. thus.

19 μετανοήσατε Repent YOU οὖν therefore καὶ and ἐπιστρέψατε turn YOU around πρὸς toward τὸ the ἐξαλιφθῆναι to be blotted out ὑμῶν of YOU τὰς the ἁμαρτίας, sins, ὅπως so that ἂν likely ἔλθωσιν should come καιροὶ appointed times ἀναψύξεως of refreshing ἀπὸ from προσώπου face τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord 20 καὶ and ἀποστείλῃ he should send forth τὸν the προκεχειρισμένον having been beforehand appointed ὑμῖν to YOU χριστὸν Christ Ἰησοῦν, Jesus, 21 ὃν whom δεῖ it is necessary οὐρανὸν heaven μὲν indeed δέξασθαι to receive ἄχρι until χρόνων times ἀποκαταστάσεως of restoration πάντων of all (things) ὧν of which (things) ἐλάλησεν spoke ὁ the θεὸς God διὰ through στόματος mouth τῶν of the ἁγίων holy ἀπ’ from αἰῶνος age αὐτοῦ of him προφητῶν. of prophets. 22 Μωυσῆς Moses μὲν indeed εἶπεν said ὅτι that Προφήτην Prophet ὑμῖν to YOU ἀναστήσει will make stand up Κύριος Lord ὁ the θεὸς God ἐκ out of τῶν the ἀδελφῶν brothers ὑμῶν of YOU ὡς as ἐμέ· me; αὐτοῦ of him ἀκούσεσθε YOU will hear κατὰ according to πάντα all (things) ὅσα as many as ἂν likely λαλήσῃ he might speak πρὸς toward ὑμᾶς. YOU. 23 ἔσται It will be δὲ but πᾶσα every ψυχὴ soul ἥτις which ἂν likely μὴ not ἀκούσῃ should hear τοῦ of the προφήτου prophet ἐκείνου that ἐξολεθρευθήσεται will be completely destroyed ἐκ out of τοῦ the λαοῦ. people. 24 καὶ And πάντες all δὲ but οἱ the προφῆται prophets ἀπὸ from Σαμουὴλ Samuel καὶ and τῶν of the (ones) καθεξῆς of succession ὅσοι as many as ἐλάλησαν spoke καὶ and κατήγγειλαν announced down τὰς the ἡμέρας days ταύτας. these. 25 ὑμεῖς YOU ἐστὲ are οἱ the υἱοὶ sons τῶν of the προφητῶν prophets καὶ and τῆς of the διαθήκης covenant ἧς which ὁ the θεὸς God διέθετο covenanted πρὸς toward τοὺς the πατέρας fathers ὑμῶν, of YOU, λέγων saying πρὸς toward ᾿Αβραάμ Abraham Καὶ And ἐν in τῷ the σπέρματί seed σου of you εὐλογηθήσονται will be blessed πᾶσαι all αἱ the πατριαὶ families τῆς of the γῆς. earth. 26 ὑμῖν To YOU πρῶτον first ἀναστήσας having made stand up ὁ the θεὸς God τὸν the παῖδα boy αὐτοῦ of him ἀπέστειλεν he sent forth αὐτὸν him εὐλογοῦντα blessing ὑμᾶς YOU ἐν in τῷ the ἀποστρέφειν to be turning away ἕκαστον each (one) ἀπὸ from τῶν the πονηριῶν wicked deeds ὑμῶν. of YOU.

4 Λαλούντων Speaking δὲ but αὐτῶν of them πρὸς toward τὸν the λαὸν people ἐπέστησαν stood upon αὐτοῖς them οἱ the ἀρχιερεῖς chief priests καὶ and ὁ the στρατηγὸς captain τοῦ of the ἱεροῦ temple καὶ and οἱ the Σαδδουκαῖοι, Sadducees, 2 διαπονούμενοι being annoyed διὰ through τὸ the διδάσκειν to be teaching αὐτοὺς them τὸν the λαὸν people καὶ and καταγγέλλειν to be announcing down ἐν in τῷ the Ἰησοῦ Jesus τὴν the ἀνάστασιν resurrection τὴν the (one) ἐκ out of νεκρῶν, dead (ones), 3 καὶ and ἐπέβαλον they thrust upon αὐτοῖς them τὰς the χεῖρας hands καὶ and ἔθεντο they put εἰς into τήρησιν observation εἰς into τὴν the αὔριον, morrow, ἦν it was γὰρ for ἑσπέρα evening ἤδη. already. 4 πολλοὶ Many δὲ but τῶν of the (ones) ἀκουσάντων having heard τὸν the λόγον word ἐπίστευσαν, they believed, καὶ and ἐγενήθη became ἀριθμὸς number τῶν of the ἀνδρῶν male persons ὡς as χιλιάδες thousands πέντε. five.

5 ᾿Εγένετο It occurred δὲ but ἐπὶ upon τὴν the αὔριον morrow συναχθῆναι to be led together αὐτῶν of them τοὺς the ἄρχοντας rulers καὶ and τοὺς the πρεσβυτέρους older men καὶ and τοὺς the γραμματεῖς scribes ἐν in Ἰερουσαλήμ Jerusalem 6 καὶ and Ἅννας Annas ὁ the ἀρχιερεὺς chief priest καὶ and Καιάφας Caiaphas καὶ and Ἰωάννης John καὶ and ᾿Αλέξανδρος Alexander καὶ and ὅσοι as many as ἦσαν were ἐκ out of γένους race ἀρχιερατικοῦ, chief priestly, 7 καὶ and στήσαντες having made stand αὐτοὺς them ἐν in τῷ the μέσῳ midst ἐπυνθάνοντο they were inquiring ᾿Εν In ποίᾳ what sort of δυνάμει power ἢ or ἐν in ποίῳ what sort of ὀνόματι name ἐποιήσατε did YOU do τοῦτο this ὑμεῖς; YOU? 8 τότε Then Πέτρος Peter πλησθεὶς having been filled πνεύματος of spirit ἁγίου holy εἶπεν said πρὸς toward αὐτούς them

Ἄρχοντες Rulers τοῦ of the λαοῦ people καὶ and πρεσβύτεροι, older men, 9 εἰ if ἡμεῖς we σήμερον today ἀνακρινόμεθα are being examined ἐπὶ upon εὐεργεσίᾳ good deed ἀνθρώπου of man ἀσθενοῦς, infirm, ἐν in τίνι whom οὗτος this (one) σέσωσται, has been saved, 10 γνωστὸν known ἔστω let it be πᾶσιν to all ὑμῖν to YOU καὶ and παντὶ to all τῷ the λαῷ people Ἰσραὴλ of Israel ὅτι that ἐν in τῷ the ὀνόματι name Ἰησοῦ of Jesus Χριστοῦ Christ τοῦ of the Ναζωραίου, Nazarene, ὃν whom ὑμεῖς YOU ἐσταυρώσατε, put on stake, ὃν whom ὁ the θεὸς God ἤγειρεν raised up ἐκ out of νεκρῶν, dead (ones), ἐν in τούτῳ this (one) οὗτος this [man] παρέστηκεν has stood alongside ἐνώπιον in sight ὑμῶν of YOU ὑγιής. sound. 11 οὗτός This ἐστιν is ὁ the λίθος stone ὁ the (one) ἐξουθενηθεὶς having been treated as nothing ὑφ’ by ὑμῶν YOU τῶν the οἰκοδόμων, builders, ὁ the (one) γενόμενος having come to be εἰς into κεφαλὴν head γωνίας. of corner. 12 καὶ And οὐκ not ἔστιν is ἐν in ἄλλῳ other οὐδενὶ no one ἡ the σωτηρία, salvation, οὐδὲ neither γὰρ for ὄνομά name ἐστιν is ἕτερον different ὑπὸ under τὸν the οὐρανὸν heaven τὸ the δεδομένον having been given ἐν in ἀνθρώποις men ἐν in ᾧ which δεῖ it is necessary σωθῆναι to be saved ἡμᾶς. us.

13 Θεωροῦντες Beholding δὲ but τὴν the τοῦ of the Πέτρου Peter παρρησίαν outspokenness καὶ and Ἰωάνου, of John, καὶ and καταλαβόμενοι having perceived ὅτι that ἄνθρωποι men ἀγράμματοί unlettered εἰσιν they are καὶ and ἰδιῶται, ordinary, ἐθαύμαζον, they were wondering, ἐπεγίνωσκόν they were recognizing τε and αὐτοὺς them ὅτι that σὺν together with τῷ the Ἰησοῦ Jesus ἦσαν, they were, 14 τόν the τε and ἄνθρωπον man βλέποντες looking at σὺν together with αὐτοῖς them ἑστῶτα having stood τὸν the (one) τεθεραπευμένον having been cured οὐδὲν nothing εἶχον they were having ἀντειπεῖν. to say against. 15 κελεύσαντες Having commanded δὲ but αὐτοὺς them ἔξω outside τοῦ of the συνεδρίου Sanhedrin [hall] ἀπελθεῖν to go forth συνέβαλλον they were consulting πρὸς toward ἀλλήλους one another 16 λέγοντες saying Τί What ποιήσωμεν should we do τοῖς to the ἀνθρώποις men τούτοις; these? ὅτι Because μὲν indeed γὰρ for γνωστὸν known σημεῖον sign γέγονεν has occurred δι’ through αὐτῶν them πᾶσιν to all τοῖς the (ones) κατοικοῦσιν inhabiting Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem φανερόν, manifest, καὶ and οὐ not δυνάμεθα we are able ἀρνεῖσθαι· to deny; 17 ἀλλ’ but ἵνα in order that μὴ not ἐπὶ upon πλεῖον more διανεμηθῇ it should be dealt out through εἰς into τὸν the λαόν, people, ἀπειλησώμεθα let us threaten αὐτοῖς to them μηκέτι not yet λαλεῖν to be speaking ἐπὶ upon τῷ the ὀνόματι name τούτῳ this μηδενὶ to no one ἀνθρώπων. of men.

18 καὶ And καλέσαντες having called αὐτοὺς them παρήγγειλαν they charged καθόλου down (the) whole μὴ not φθέγγεσθαι to be uttering μηδὲ nor διδάσκειν to be teaching ἐπὶ upon τῷ the ὀνόματι name τοῦ of the Ἰησοῦ. Jesus. 19 ὁ The δὲ but Πέτρος Peter καὶ and Ἰωάνης John ἀποκριθέντες having answered εἶπαν said πρὸς toward αὐτούς them Εἰ If δίκαιόν righteous ἐστιν it is ἐνώπιον in sight τοῦ of the θεοῦ God ὑμῶν of YOU ἀκούειν to be hearing μᾶλλον rather ἢ than τοῦ of the θεοῦ God κρίνατε, judge YOU, 20 οὐ not δυνάμεθα we are able γὰρ for ἡμεῖς we ἃ what (things) εἴδαμεν we saw καὶ and ἠκούσαμεν we heard μὴ not λαλεῖν. to be speaking. 21 οἱ They δὲ but προσαπειλησάμενοι having further threatened ἀπέλυσαν they released αὐτούς, them, μηδὲν nothing εὑρίσκοντες finding τὸ the πῶς how κολάσωνται they might lop off αὐτούς, them, διὰ through τὸν the λαόν, people, ὅτι because πάντες all ἐδόξαζον they were glorifying τὸν the θεὸν God ἐπὶ upon τῷ the (thing) γεγονότι· having occurred; 22 ἐτῶν of years γὰρ for ἦν was πλειόνων of more τεσσεράκοντα forty ὁ the ἄνθρωπος man ἐφ’ upon ὃν whom ἐγεγόνει had occurred τὸ the σημεῖον sign τοῦτο this τῆς of the ἰάσεως. healing.

23 ᾿Απολυθέντες Having been released δὲ but ἦλθον they came πρὸς toward τοὺς the ἰδίους own καὶ and ἀπήγγειλαν they reported back ὅσα as many (things) as πρὸς toward αὐτοὺς them οἱ the ἀρχιερεῖς chief priests καὶ and οἱ the πρεσβύτεροι older men εἶπαν. said. 24 οἱ The (ones) δὲ but ἀκούσαντες having heard ὁμοθυμαδὸν like-mindedly ἦραν they lifted up φωνὴν voice πρὸς toward τὸν the θεὸν God καὶ and εἶπαν they said

Δέσποτα, Sovereign, σὺ you ὁ the (one) ποιήσας having made τὸν the οὐρανὸν heaven καὶ and τὴν the γῆν earth καὶ and τὴν the θάλασσαν sea καὶ and πάντα all τὰ the (things) ἐν in αὐτοῖς, them, 25 ὁ the (one) τοῦ of the πατρὸς father ἡμῶν of us διὰ through πνεύματος spirit ἁγίου holy στόματος of mouth Δαυεὶδ of David παιδός boy σου of you εἰπών having said Ἵνα In order that τί what ἐφρύαξαν made noise ἔθνη nations καὶ and λαοὶ peoples ἐμελέτησαν they meditated upon κενά; empty (things)? 26 παρέστησαν Stood alongside οἱ the βασιλεῖς kings τῆς of the γῆς earth καὶ and οἱ the ἄρχοντες rulers συνήχθησαν were led together ἐπὶ upon τὸ the αὐτὸ very [place] κατὰ down on τοῦ the κυρίου Lord καὶ and κατὰ down on τοῦ the χριστοῦ Christ αὐτοῦ. of him. 27 συνήχθησαν Were led together γὰρ for ἐπ’ upon ἀληθείας truth ἐν in τῇ the πόλει city ταύτῃ this ἐπὶ upon τὸν the ἅγιον holy παῖδά boy σου of you Ἰησοῦν, Jesus, ὃν whom ἔχρισας, you anointed, Ἡρῴδης Herod τε and καὶ and Πόντιος Pontius Πειλᾶτος Pilate σὺν together with ἔθνεσιν nations καὶ and λαοῖς peoples Ἰσραήλ, of Israel, 28 ποιῆσαι to do ὅσα as many (things) as ἡ the χείρ hand σου of you καὶ and ἡ the βουλὴ counsel προώρισεν predetermined γενέσθαι. to occur. 29 καὶ And τὰ the (things) νῦν, now, κύριε, Lord, ἔπιδε see you on ἐπὶ upon τὰς the ἀπειλὰς threats αὐτῶν, of them, καὶ and δὸς give τοῖς to the δούλοις slaves σου of you μετὰ with παρρησίας outspokenness πάσης all λαλεῖν to be speaking τὸν the λόγον word σου, of you, 30 ἐν in τῷ the τὴν the χεῖρα hand ἐκτείνειν to be stretching out σε you εἰς into ἴασιν healing καὶ and σημεῖα signs καὶ and τέρατα portents γίνεσθαι to be occurring διὰ through τοῦ the ὀνόματος name τοῦ of the ἁγίου holy παιδός boy σου of you Ἰησοῦ. of Jesus.

31 καὶ And δεηθέντων having supplicated αὐτῶν of them ἐσαλεύθη was shaken ὁ the τόπος place ἐν in ᾧ which ἦσαν they were συνηγμένοι, having been led together, καὶ and ἐπλήσθησαν they were filled ἅπαντες all τοῦ of the ἁγίου holy πνεύματος, spirit, καὶ and ἐλάλουν they were speaking τὸν the λόγον word τοῦ of the θεοῦ God μετὰ with παρρησίας. outspokenness.

32 Τοῦ Of the δὲ but πλήθους of multitude τῶν of the (ones) πιστευσάντων having believed ἦν was καρδία heart καὶ and ψυχὴ soul μία, one, καὶ and οὐδὲ not-but εἷς one τι anything τῶν of the ὑπαρχόντων things belonging αὐτῷ to him ἔλεγεν he was saying ἴδιον own εἶναι, to be, ἀλλ’ but ἦν was αὐτοῖς to them πάντα all (things) κοινά. common. 33 καὶ And δυνάμει to power μεγάλῃ great ἀπεδίδουν were giving back τὸ the μαρτύριον witness οἱ the ἀπόστολοι apostles τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord Ἰησοῦ Jesus τῆς of the ἀναστάσεως, resurrection, χάρις favor τε and μεγάλη great ἦν was ἐπὶ upon πάντας all αὐτούς. them. 34 οὐδὲ Not-but γὰρ for ἐνδεής needy τις anyone ἦν was ἐν in αὐτοῖς· them; ὅσοι as many as γὰρ for κτήτορες possessors χωρίων of pieces of ground ἢ or οἰκιῶν houses ὑπῆρχον, they were, πωλοῦντες selling ἔφερον they were bearing τὰς the τιμὰς values τῶν of the (things) πιπρασκομένων being sold 35 καὶ and ἐτίθουν they were placing παρὰ beside τοὺς the πόδας feet τῶν of the ἀποστόλων· apostles; διεδίδετο it was being distributed δὲ but ἑκάστῳ to each (one) καθότι according as ἂν likely τις anyone χρείαν need εἶχεν. was having. 36 Ἰωσὴφ Joseph δὲ but ὁ the (one) ἐπικληθεὶς having been surnamed Βαρνάβας Barnabas ἀπὸ from τῶν the ἀποστόλων, apostles, ὅ which ἐστιν is μεθερμηνευόμενον being translated Υἱὸς Son Παρακλήσεως, of Comfort, Λευείτης, Levite, Κύπριος Cyprian τῷ to the γένει, race, 37 ὑπάρχοντος existing αὐτῷ to him ἀγροῦ of field πωλήσας having sold ἤνεγκεν brought τὸ the χρῆμα money καὶ and ἔθηκεν put παρὰ beside τοὺς the πόδας feet τῶν of the ἀποστόλων. apostles.

5 ᾿Ανὴρ Male person δέ but τις some Ἁνανίας Ananias ὀνόματι to name σὺν together with Σαπφείρῃ Sapphira τῇ the γυναικὶ woman αὐτοῦ of him ἐπώλησεν he sold κτῆμα possession 2 καὶ and ἐνοσφίσατο he put apart for self ἀπὸ from τῆς the τιμῆς, value, συνειδυίης having known together καὶ also τῆς of the γυναικός, woman, καὶ and ἐνέγκας having brought μέρος part τι some παρὰ beside τοὺς the πόδας feet τῶν of the ἀποστόλων apostles ἔθηκεν. he put. 3 εἶπεν Said δὲ but ὁ the Πέτρος Peter Ἁνανία, Ananias, διὰ through τί what ἐπλήρωσεν filled ὁ the Σατανᾶς Satan τὴν the καρδίαν heart σου of you ψεύσασθαί to lie to σε you τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit τὸ the ἅγιον holy καὶ and νοσφίσασθαι to put apart for self ἀπὸ from τῆς the τιμῆς value τοῦ of the χωρίου; piece of ground? 4 οὐχὶ Not μένον remaining σοὶ to you ἔμενεν it was remaining καὶ and πραθὲν having been sold ἐν in τῇ the σῇ your ἐξουσίᾳ authority ὑπῆρχεν; it was existing? τί Why ὅτι that ἔθου you put ἐν in τῇ the καρδίᾳ heart σου of you τὸ the πρᾶγμα thing τοῦτο; this? οὐκ Not ἐψεύσω you played false ἀνθρώποις to men ἀλλὰ but τῷ to the θεῷ. God. 5 ἀκούων Hearing δὲ but ὁ the Ἁνανίας Ananias τούς the λόγους words τούτους these πεσὼν having fallen ἐξέψυξεν· he let out soul; καὶ and ἐγένετο occurred φόβος fear μέγας great ἐπὶ upon πάντας all τοὺς the (ones) ἀκούοντας. hearing. 6 ἀναστάντες Having stood up δὲ but οἱ the νεώτεροι younger (ones) συνέστειλαν set together αὐτὸν him καὶ and ἐξενέγκαντες having borne out ἔθαψαν. they buried.

7 ᾿Εγένετο It occurred δὲ but ὡς as ὡρῶν of hours τριῶν three διάστημα interval καὶ and ἡ the γυνὴ woman αὐτοῦ of him μὴ not εἰδυῖα having known τὸ the (thing) γεγονὸς having occurred εἰσῆλθεν. entered. 8 ἀπεκρίθη Answered δὲ but πρὸς toward αὐτὴν her Πέτρος Peter Εἰπέ Say μοι, to me, εἰ if τοσούτου of so much τὸ the χωρίον piece of ground ἀπέδοσθε; YOU gave from yourselves? ἡ The (one) δὲ but εἶπεν said Ναί, Yes, τοσούτου. of so much. 9 ὁ The δὲ but Πέτρος Peter πρὸς toward αὐτήν her Τί Why ὅτι that συνεφωνήθη it was sounded together ὑμῖν to YOU πειράσαι to test τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit Κυρίου; of Lord? ἰδοὺ Look! οἱ The πόδες feet τῶν of the (ones) θαψάντων having buried τὸν the ἄνδρα male person σου of you ἐπὶ upon τῇ the θύρᾳ door καὶ and ἐξοίσουσίν they will bear out σε. you. 10 ἔπεσεν She fell δὲ but παραχρῆμα instantly πρὸς toward τοὺς the πόδας feet αὐτοῦ of him καὶ and ἐξέψυξεν· she let out soul; εἰσελθόντες having entered δὲ but οἱ the νεανίσκοι young men εὗρον found αὐτὴν her νεκράν, dead, καὶ and ἐξενέγκαντες having borne out ἔθαψαν they buried πρὸς toward τὸν the ἄνδρα male person αὐτῆς. of her. 11 Καὶ And ἐγένετο occurred φόβος fear μέγας great ἐφ’ upon ὅλην whole τὴν the ἐκκλησίαν ecclesia καὶ and ἐπὶ upon πάντας all τοὺς the (ones) ἀκούοντας hearing ταῦτα. these (things).

12 Διὰ Through δὲ but τῶν the χειρῶν hands τῶν of the ἀποστόλων apostles ἐγίνετο was occurring σημεῖα signs καὶ and τέρατα portents πολλὰ many ἐν in τῷ the λαῷ· people; καὶ and ἦσαν they were ὁμοθυμαδὸν like-mindedly πάντες all ἐν in τῇ the Στοᾷ Colonnade Σολομῶντος· of Solomon; 13 τῶν of the δὲ but λοιπῶν leftover (ones) οὐδεὶς no one ἐτόλμα was daring κολλᾶσθαι to glue himself αὐτοῖς, to them, ἀλλ’ but ἐμεγάλυνεν was magnifying αὐτοὺς them ὁ the λαός people, 14 μᾶλλον rather δὲ but προσετίθεντο were being added πιστεύοντες believing (ones) τῷ to the κυρίῳ Lord πλήθη multitudes ἀνδρῶν of male persons τε and καὶ and γυναικῶν· women; 15 ὥστε as-and καὶ also εἰς into τὰς the πλατείας broad ways ἐκφέρειν to be bearing out τοὺς the ἀσθενεῖς sick καὶ and τιθέναι to be putting ἐπὶ upon κλιναρίων little beds καὶ and κραβάττων, cots, ἵνα in order that ἐρχομένου coming Πέτρου of Peter κἂν also if ever ἡ the σκιὰ shadow ἐπισκιάσει might overshadow τινὶ to someone αὐτῶν. of them. 16 συνήρχετο Was coming together δὲ but καὶ also τὸ the πλῆθος multitude τῶν of the πέριξ roundabout πόλεων cities Ἰερουσαλήμ, of Jerusalem, φέροντες bearing ἀσθενεῖς sick (ones) καὶ and ὀχλουμένους (ones) disturbed ὑπὸ by πνευμάτων spirits ἀκαθάρτων, unclean, οἵτινες who ἐθεραπεύοντο were being cured ἅπαντες. all.

17 ᾿Αναστὰς Having stood up δὲ but ὁ the ἀρχιερεὺς chief priest καὶ and πάντες all οἱ the (ones) σὺν together with αὐτῷ, him, ἡ the οὖσα being αἵρεσις sect τῶν of the Σαδδουκαίων, Sadducees, ἐπλήσθησαν were filled ζήλου of jealousy 18 καὶ and ἐπέβαλον they thrust upon τὰς the χεῖρας hands ἐπὶ upon τοὺς the ἀποστόλους apostles καὶ and ἔθεντο put αὐτοὺς them ἐν in τηρήσει observation δημοσίᾳ. public. 19 Ἄγγελος Angel δὲ but Κυρίου of Lord διὰ through νυκτὸς night ἤνοιξε opened τὰς the θύρας doors τῆς of the φυλακῆς prison ἐξαγαγών having led out τε and αὐτοὺς them εἶπεν he said 20 Πορεύεσθε Be YOU going καὶ and σταθέντες having stood λαλεῖτε be YOU speaking ἐν in τῷ the ἱερῷ temple τῷ to the λαῷ people πάντα all τὰ the ῥήματα sayings τῆς of the ζωῆς life ταύτης. this. 21 ἀκούσαντες Having heard δὲ but εἰσῆλθον they entered ὑπὸ under τὸν the ὄρθρον daybreak εἰς into τὸ the ἱερὸν temple καὶ and ἐδίδασκον. they were teaching.

Παραγενόμενος Having come to be alongside δὲ but ὁ the ἀρχιερεὺς chief priest καὶ and οἱ the (ones) σὺν together with αὐτῷ him συνεκάλεσαν they called together τὸ the συνέδριον Sanhedrin καὶ and πᾶσαν all τὴν the γερουσίαν assembly of old men τῶν of the υἱῶν sons Ἰσραήλ, of Israel, καὶ and ἀπέστειλαν they sent out εἰς into τὸ the δεσμωτήριον place of bound ones ἀχθῆναι to be led αὐτούς. them. 22 οἱ The δὲ but παραγενόμενοι having come to be alongside ὑπηρέται subordinates οὐχ not εὗρον found αὐτοὺς them ἐν in τῇ the φυλακῇ, prison, ἀναστρέψαντες having returned δὲ but ἀπήγγειλαν they reported back 23 λέγοντες saying ὅτι that Τὸ The δεσμωτήριον place of bound ones εὕρομεν we found κεκλεισμένον having been locked ἐν in πάσῃ all ἀσφαλείᾳ security καὶ and τοὺς the φύλακας guards ἑστῶτας having stood ἐπὶ upon τῶν the θυρῶν, doors, ἀνοίξαντες having opened δὲ but ἔσω inside οὐδένα no one εὕρομεν. we found. 24 ὡς As δὲ but ἤκουσαν they heard τοὺς the λόγους words τούτους these ὅ the τε and στρατηγὸς captain τοῦ of the ἱεροῦ temple καὶ and οἱ the ἀρχιερεῖς, chief priests, διηπόρουν were in a quandary περὶ about αὐτῶν them τί what ἂν likely γένοιτο would become τοῦτο. this. 25 Παραγενόμενος Having come to be alongside δέ but τις someone ἀπήγγειλεν reported back αὐτοῖς to them ὅτι that Ἰδοὺ Look! οἱ The ἄνδρες male persons οὓς whom ἔθεσθε YOU put ἐν in τῇ the φυλακῇ prison εἰσὶν are ἐν in τῷ the ἱερῷ temple ἑστῶτες having stood καὶ and διδάσκοντες teaching τὸν the λαόν. people. 26 τότε Then ἀπελθὼν having gone off ὁ the στρατηγὸς captain σὺν together with τοῖς the ὑπηρέταις subordinates ἦγεν was leading αὐτούς, them, οὐ not μετὰ with βίας, violence, ἐφοβοῦντο they were fearing γὰρ for τὸν the λαόν, people, μὴ not λιθασθῶσιν. they might be stoned.

27 ἀγαγόντες Having led δὲ but αὐτοὺς them ἔστησαν they made stand ἐν in τῷ the συνεδρίῳ. Sanhedrin. καὶ And ἐπηρώτησεν inquired upon αὐτοὺς them ὁ the ἀρχιερεὺς chief priest 28 λέγων saying Παραγγελίᾳ To charge παρηγγείλαμεν we charged ὑμῖν to YOU μὴ not διδάσκειν to be teaching ἐπὶ upon τῷ the ὀνόματι name τούτῳ, this, καὶ and ἰδοὺ look! πεπληρώκατε YOU have filled τὴν the Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem τῆς of the διδαχῆς teaching ὑμῶν, of YOU, καὶ and βούλεσθε YOU are wishing ἐπαγαγεῖν to lead on ἐφ’ upon ἡμᾶς us τὸ the αἷμα blood τοῦ of the ἀνθρώπου man τούτου. this. 29 ἀποκριθεὶς Having answered δὲ but Πέτρος Peter καὶ and οἱ the ἀπόστολοι apostles εἶπαν said Πειθαρχεῖν To be obeying as ruler δεῖ it is necessary θεῷ to God μᾶλλον rather ἢ than ἀνθρώποις. to men. 30 ὁ The θεὸς God τῶν of the πατέρων fathers ἡμῶν of us ἤγειρεν raised up Ἰησοῦν, Jesus, ὃν whom ὑμεῖς YOU διεχειρίσασθε manhandled κρεμάσαντες having hanged ἐπὶ upon ξύλου· wood; 31 τοῦτον this (one) ὁ the θεὸς God ἀρχηγὸν Chief Leader καὶ and σωτῆρα Savior ὕψωσεν he put high up τῇ to the δεξιᾷ right [hand] αὐτοῦ, of him, τοῦ of the δοῦναι to give μετάνοιαν repentance τῷ to the Ἰσραὴλ Israel καὶ and ἄφεσιν letting go off ἁμαρτιῶν· of sins; 32 καὶ and ἡμεῖς we ἐσμὲν are μάρτυρες witnesses τῶν of the ῥημάτων sayings τούτων, these, καὶ and τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit τὸ the ἅγιον holy ὃ which ἔδωκεν gave ὁ the θεὸς God τοῖς to the (ones) πειθαρχοῦσιν obeying as ruler αὐτῷ. to him.

33 οἱ The (ones) δὲ but ἀκούσαντες having heard διεπρίοντο were being sawn through καὶ and ἐβούλοντο they were wishing ἀνελεῖν to take up αὐτούς. them. 34 ᾿Αναστὰς Having stood up δέ but τις someone ἐν in τῷ the συνεδρίῳ Sanhedrin Φαρισαῖος Pharisee ὀνόματι to name Γαμαλιήλ, Gamaliel, νομοδιδάσκαλος law teacher τίμιος honorable παντὶ to all τῷ the λαῷ, people, ἐκέλευσεν he commanded ἔξω outside βραχὺ short [while] τοὺς the ἀνθρώπους men ποιῆσαι, to make, 35 εἶπέν he said τε and πρὸς toward αὐτούς them Ἄνδρες Male persons Ἰσραηλεῖται, Israelites, προσέχετε be YOU paying attention ἑαυτοῖς to selves ἐπὶ upon τοῖς the ἀνθρώποις men τούτοις these τί what μέλλετε YOU are about πράσσειν. to be performing. 36 πρὸ Before γὰρ for τούτων these τῶν the ἡμερῶν days ἀνέστη stood up Θευδᾶς, Theudas, λέγων saying εἶναί to be τινα someone ἑαυτόν, himself, ᾧ to whom προσεκλίθη was made to incline toward ἀνδρῶν of male persons ἀριθμὸς number ὡς as τετρακοσίων· of four hundred; ὃς who ἀνῃρέθη, was taken up, καὶ and πάντες all ὅσοι as many as ἐπείθοντο were obeying αὐτῷ to him διελύθησαν were dispersed καὶ and ἐγένοντο they came to be εἰς into οὐδέν. nothing. 37 μετὰ After τοῦτον this (one) ἀνέστη stood up Ἰούδας Judas ὁ the Γαλιλαῖος Galilean ἐν in ταῖς the ἡμέραις days τῆς of the ἀπογραφῆς registration καὶ and ἀπέστησε made stand off λαὸν people ὀπίσω behind αὐτοῦ· him; κἀκεῖνος also that (one) ἀπώλετο, destroyed himself, καὶ and πάντες all ὅσοι as many as ἐπείθοντο were obeying αὐτῷ to him διεσκορπίσθησαν. were scattered abroad. 38 καὶ And τὰ the (things) νῦν now λέγω I am saying ὑμῖν, to YOU, ἀπόστητε Stand YOU away ἀπὸ from τῶν the ἀνθρώπων men τούτων these καὶ and ἄφετε let go off YOU αὐτούς· them; ὅτι because ἐὰν if ever ᾖ it may be ἐξ out of ἀνθρώπων men ἡ the βουλὴ counsel αὕτη this ἢ or τὸ the ἔργον work τοῦτο, this, καταλυθήσεται· it will be loosed down; 39 εἰ if δὲ but ἐκ out of θεοῦ God ἐστίν, it is, οὐ not δυνήσεσθε YOU will be able καταλῦσαι to loose down αὐτούς· them; μή not ποτε sometime καὶ also θεομάχοι fighters against God εὑρεθῆτε. YOU might be found. 40 ἐπείσθησαν They were persuaded δὲ but αὐτῷ, to him, καὶ and προσκαλεσάμενοι having called toward themselves τοὺς the ἀποστόλους apostles δείραντες having flayed παρήγγειλαν they charged μὴ not λαλεῖν to be speaking ἐπὶ upon τῷ the ὀνόματι name τοῦ of the Ἰησοῦ Jesus καὶ and ἀπέλυσαν. they released.

41 Οἱ The (ones) μὲν indeed οὖν therefore ἐπορεύοντο were going χαίροντες rejoicing ἀπὸ from προσώπου face τοῦ of the συνεδρίου Sanhedrin ὅτι because κατηξιώθησαν they were counted worthy ὑπὲρ over τοῦ the ὀνόματος name ἀτιμασθῆναι· to be dishonored; 42 πᾶσάν all τε and ἡμέραν day ἐν in τῷ the ἱερῷ temple καὶ and κατ’ according to οἶκον house οὐκ not ἐπαύοντο they were ceasing διδάσκοντες teaching καὶ and εὐαγγελιζόμενοι declaring good news about τὸν the χριστὸν Christ Ἰησοῦν. Jesus.

6 ᾿Εν In δὲ but ταῖς the ἡμέραις days ταύταις these πληθυνόντων multiplying τῶν of the μαθητῶν disciples ἐγένετο occurred γογγυσμὸς murmuring τῶν of the Ἑλληνιστῶν Hellenists πρὸς toward τοὺς the ᾿Εβραίους Hebrews ὅτι because παρεθεωροῦντο they were being overlooked ἐν in τῇ the διακονίᾳ service τῇ the καθημερινῇ daily αἱ the χῆραι widows αὐτῶν. of them. 2 προσκαλεσάμενοι Having called toward themselves δὲ but οἱ the δώδεκα twelve τὸ the πλῆθος multitude τῶν of the μαθητῶν disciples εἶπαν said Οὐκ Not ἀρεστόν pleasing ἐστιν it is ἡμᾶς us καταλείψαντας having abandoned τὸν the λόγον word τοῦ of the θεοῦ God διακονεῖν to be serving τραπέζαις· to tables; 3 ἐπισκέψασθε look YOU upon δέ, but, ἀδελφοί, brothers, ἄνδρας male persons ἐξ out of ὑμῶν YOU μαρτυρουμένους being witnessed to ἑπτὰ seven πλήρεις full πνεύματος of spirit καὶ and σοφίας, of wisdom, οὓς whom καταστήσομεν we will appoint ἐπὶ upon τῆς the χρείας need ταύτης· this; 4 ἡμεῖς we δὲ but τῇ to the προσευχῇ prayer καὶ and τῇ to the διακονίᾳ service τοῦ of the λόγου word προσκαρτερήσομεν. we shall persevere. 5 καὶ And ἤρεσεν pleased ὁ the λόγος word ἐνώπιον in sight παντὸς of all τοῦ the πλήθους, multitude, καὶ and ἐξελέξαντο they selected Στέφανον, Stephen, ἄνδρα male person πλήρη full πίστεως of faith καὶ and πνεύματος of spirit ἁγίου, holy, καὶ and Φίλιππον Philip καὶ and Πρόχορον Prochorus καὶ and Νικάνορα Nicanor καὶ and Τίμωνα Timon καὶ and Παρμενᾶν Parmenas καὶ and Νικόλαον Nicolaus προσήλυτον proselyte ᾿Αντιοχέα, Antiochian, 6 οὓς whom ἔστησαν they made stand ἐνώπιον in sight τῶν of the ἀποστόλων, apostles, καὶ and προσευξάμενοι having prayed ἐπέθηκαν they put upon αὐτοῖς them τὰς the χεῖρας. hands.

7 Καὶ And ὁ the λόγος word τοῦ of the θεοῦ God ηὔξανεν, was growing, καὶ and ἐπληθύνετο was multiplying ὁ the ἀριθμὸς number τῶν of the μαθητῶν disciples ἐν in Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem σφόδρα, very much, πολύς much τε and ὄχλος crowd τῶν of the ἱερέων priests ὑπήκουον were hearing submissively τῇ to the πίστει. faith.

8 Στέφανος Stephen δὲ but πλήρης full χάριτος of graciousness καὶ and δυνάμεως power ἐποίει was doing τέρατα portents καὶ and σημεῖα signs μεγάλα great ἐν in τῷ the λαῷ. people. 9 ᾿Ανέστησαν Stood up δέ but τινες some ones τῶν of the (ones) ἐκ out of τῆς the συναγωγῆς synagogue τῆς the (one) λεγομένης being said Λιβερτίνων of Libertines καὶ and Κυρηναίων of Cyrenians καὶ and ᾿Αλεξανδρέων of Alexandrians καὶ and τῶν of the (ones) ἀπὸ from Κιλικίας Cilicia καὶ and ᾿Ασίας of Asia συνζητοῦντες seeking together with τῷ the Στεφάνῳ, Stephen, 10 καὶ and οὐκ not ἴσχυον they were strong enough ἀντιστῆναι to withstand τῇ to the σοφίᾳ wisdom καὶ and τῷ to the πνεύματι spirit ᾧ to which ἐλάλει. he was speaking. 11 τότε Then ὑπέβαλον they thrust under ἄνδρας male persons λέγοντας saying ὅτι that ᾿Ακηκόαμεν We have heard αὐτοῦ of him λαλοῦντος speaking ῥήματα sayings βλάσφημα blasphemous εἰς into Μωυσῆν Moses καὶ and τὸν the θεόν· God; 12 συνεκίνησάν They stirred up τε and τὸν the λαὸν people καὶ and τοὺς the πρεσβυτέρους older men καὶ and τοὺς the γραμματεῖς, scribes, καὶ and ἐπιστάντες having stood upon συνήρπασαν they jointly snatched αὐτὸν him καὶ and ἤγαγον they led εἰς into τὸ the συνέδριον, Sanhedrin, 13 ἔστησάν they made stand τε and μάρτυρας witnesses ψευδεῖς false λέγοντας saying Ὁ The ἄνθρωπος man οὗτος this οὐ not παύεται is ceasing λαλῶν speaking ῥήματα sayings κατὰ down on τοῦ the τόπου place τοῦ the ἁγίου holy τούτου this καὶ and τοῦ of the νόμου, Law, 14 ἀκηκόαμεν we have heard γὰρ for αὐτοῦ of him λέγοντος saying ὅτι that Ἰησοῦς Jesus ὁ the Ναζωραῖος Nazarene οὗτος this καταλύσει will loose down τὸν the τόπον place τοῦτον this καὶ and ἀλλάξει he will change τὰ the ἔθη customs ἃ which παρέδωκεν gave beside ἡμῖν to us Μωυσῆς. Moses.

15 Καὶ And ἀτενίσαντες having gazed εἰς into αὐτὸν him πάντες all οἱ the (ones) καθεζόμενοι sitting ἐν in τῷ the συνεδρίῳ Sanhedrin εἶδαν they saw τὸ the πρόσωπον face αὐτοῦ of him ὡσεὶ as if πρόσωπον face ἀγγέλου. of angel.

7 Εἶπεν Said δὲ but ὁ the ἀρχιερεύς chief priest Εἰ If ταῦτα these (things) οὕτως thus ἔχει; is having? 2 ὁ The (one) δὲ but ἔφη said Ἄνδρες Male persons ἀδελφοὶ brothers καὶ and πατέρες, fathers, ἀκούσατε. hear YOU. Ὁ The θεὸς God τῆς of the δόξης glory ὤφθη became seen τῷ to the πατρὶ father ἡμῶν of us ᾿Αβραὰμ Abraham ὄντι being ἐν in τῇ the Μεσοποταμίᾳ Mesopotamia πρὶν before ἢ than κατοικῆσαι to reside αὐτὸν him ἐν in Χαρράν, Haran, 3 καὶ and εἶπεν he said πρὸς toward αὐτόν him Ἔξελθε Go you forth ἐκ out of τῆς the γῆς earth σου of you καὶ and τῆς of the συγγενείας relationship σου, of you, καὶ and δεῦρο hither εἰς into τὴν the γῆν earth ἣν which ἄν likely σοι to you δείξω· I should show; 4 τότε then ἐξελθὼν having gone forth ἐκ out of γῆς earth Χαλδαίων of Chaldeans κατῴκησεν he resided ἐν in Χαρράν. Haran. κἀκεῖθεν And from there μετὰ after τὸ the ἀποθανεῖν to die τὸν the πατέρα father αὐτοῦ of him μετῴκισεν he caused to change residence αὐτὸν him εἰς into τὴν the γῆν earth ταύτην this εἰς into ἣν which ὑμεῖς YOU νῦν now κατοικεῖτε, are residing, 5 καὶ and οὐκ not ἔδωκεν gave αὐτῷ to him κληρονομίαν inheritance ἐν in αὐτῇ it οὐδὲ not-but βῆμα stepping ποδός, of foot, καὶ and ἐπηγγείλατο he promised δοῦναι to give αὐτῷ to him εἰς into κατάσχεσιν having down αὐτὴν it καὶ and τῷ to the σπέρματι seed αὐτοῦ of him μετ’ after αὐτόν, him, οὐκ not ὄντος being αὐτῷ to him τέκνου. of child. 6 ἐλάλησεν Spoke δὲ but οὕτως thus ὁ the θεὸς God ὅτι that ἔσται will be τὸ the σπέρμα seed αὐτοῦ of him πάροικον dweller beside ἐν in γῇ earth ἀλλοτρίᾳ, foreign, καὶ and δουλώσουσιν they will enslave αὐτὸ it καὶ and κακώσουσιν they will treat badly ἔτη years τετρακόσια· four hundred; 7 καὶ and τὸ the ἔθνος nation ᾧ to which ἂν likely δουλεύσουσιν they will be slaves κρινῶ I will judge ἐγώ, I, ὁ the θεὸς God εἶπεν, said, καὶ and μετὰ after ταῦτα these (things) ἐξελεύσονται they will come out καὶ and λατρεύσουσίν they will render sacred service μοι to me ἐν in τῷ the τόπῳ place τούτῳ. this.

8 καὶ And ἔδωκεν he gave αὐτῷ to him διαθήκην covenant περιτομῆς· of circumcision; καὶ and οὕτως thus ἐγέννησεν he generated τὸν the Ἰσαὰκ Isaac καὶ and περιέτεμεν he circumcised αὐτὸν him τῇ to the ἡμέρᾳ day τῇ the ὀγδόῃ, eighth, καὶ and Ἰσαὰκ Isaac τὸν the Ἰακώβ, Jacob, καὶ and Ἰακὼβ Jacob τοὺς the δώδεκα twelve πατριάρχας. patriarchs. 9 Καὶ And οἱ the πατριάρχαι patriarchs ζηλώσαντες having become jealous of τὸν the Ἰωσὴφ Joseph ἀπέδοντο they gave off εἰς into Αἴγυπτον· Egypt; καὶ and ἦν was ὁ the θεὸς God μετ’ with αὐτοῦ, him, 10 καὶ and ἐξείλατο he took up out αὐτὸν him ἐκ out of πασῶν all τῶν the θλίψεων tribulations αὐτοῦ, of him, καὶ and ἔδωκεν he gave αὐτῷ to him χάριν graciousness καὶ and σοφίαν wisdom ἐναντίον in front Φαραὼ of Pharaoh βασιλέως of king Αἰγύπτου, of Egypt, καὶ and κατέστησεν he appointed αὐτὸν him ἡγούμενον governing (one) ἐπ’ upon Αἴγυπτον Egypt καὶ and ὅλον whole τὸν the οἶκον house αὐτοῦ. of him. 11 ῏Ηλθεν Came δὲ but λιμὸς famine ἐφ’ upon ὅλην whole τὴν the Αἴγυπτον Egypt καὶ and Χαναὰν Canaan καὶ and θλίψις tribulation μεγάλη, great, καὶ and οὐχ not ηὕρισκον were finding χορτάσματα foodstuffs οἱ the πατέρες fathers ἡμῶν· of us; 12 ἀκούσας having heard δὲ but Ἰακὼβ Jacob ὄντα being σιτία grains εἰς into Αἴγυπτον Egypt ἐξαπέστειλεν he sent forth out τοὺς the πατέρας fathers ἡμῶν of us πρῶτον· first [time]; 13 καὶ and ἐν in τῷ the δευτέρῳ second [time] ἐγνωρίσθη was made known Ἰωσὴφ Joseph τοῖς to the ἀδελφοῖς brothers αὐτοῦ, of him, καὶ and φανερὸν manifest ἐγένετο became τῷ to the Φαραὼ Pharaoh τὸ the γένος race Ἰωσήφ. of Joseph. 14 ἀποστείλας Having sent forth δὲ but Ἰωσὴφ Joseph μετεκαλέσατο thence called for Ἰακὼβ Jacob τὸν the πατέρα father αὐτοῦ of him καὶ and πᾶσαν all τὴν the συγγένειαν relationship ἐν in ψυχαῖς souls ἑβδομήκοντα seventy- πέντε, five, 15 κατέβη went down δὲ but Ἰακὼβ Jacob εἰς into Αἴγυπτον. Egypt. καὶ And ἐτελεύτησεν he deceased αὐτὸς he καὶ and οἱ the πατέρες fathers ἡμῶν, of us, 16 καὶ and μετετέθησαν they were transferred εἰς into Συχὲμ Shechem καὶ and ἐτέθησαν they were put ἐν in τῷ the μνήματι tomb ᾧ to which ὠνήσατο bought ᾿Αβραὰμ Abraham τιμῆς of price ἀργυρίου of silver παρὰ beside τῶν of the υἱῶν sons Ἑμμὼρ of Hamor ἐν in Συχέμ. Shechem.

17 Καθὼς According as δὲ but ἤγγιζεν was nearing ὁ the χρόνος time τῆς of the ἐπαγγελίας promise ἧς of which ὡμολόγησεν confessed ὁ the θεὸς God τῷ to the ᾿Αβραάμ, Abraham, ηὔξησεν grew ὁ the λαὸς people καὶ and ἐπληθύνθη it was multiplied ἐν in Αἰγύπτῳ, Egypt, 18 ἄχρι until οὗ which [time] ἀνέστη stood up βασιλεὺς king ἕτερος different ἐπ’ upon Αἴγυπτον, Egypt, ὃς who οὐκ not ᾔδει had known τὸν the Ἰωσήφ. Joseph. 19 οὗτος This (one) κατασοφισάμενος having used craft against τὸ the γένος race ἡμῶν of us ἐκάκωσεν treated badly τοὺς the πατέρας fathers τοῦ of the ποιεῖν to be making τὰ the βρέφη infants ἔκθετα exposed αὐτῶν of them εἰς into τὸ the μὴ not ζωογονεῖσθαι. to be generated alive. 20 ἐν In ᾧ which καιρῷ appointed time ἐγεννήθη was generated Μωυσῆς, Moses, καὶ and ἦν he was ἀστεῖος beautiful τῷ to the θεῷ· God; ὃς who ἀνετράφη was nursed μῆνας months τρεῖς three ἐν in τῷ the οἴκῳ house τοῦ of the πατρός· father; 21 ἐκτεθέντος having been exposed δὲ but αὐτοῦ of him ἀνείλατο took up αὐτὸν him ἡ the θυγάτηρ daughter Φαραὼ of Pharaoh καὶ and ἀνεθρέψατο she reared αὐτὸν him ἑαυτῇ to herself εἰς into υἱόν. son. 22 καὶ And ἐπαιδεύθη was instructed Μωυσῆς Moses πάσῃ to all σοφίᾳ wisdom Αἰγυπτίων, of Egyptians, ἦν he was δὲ but δυνατὸς powerful ἐν in λόγοις words καὶ and ἔργοις to works αὐτοῦ. of him.

23 Ὡς As δὲ but ἐπληροῦτο was being fulfilled αὐτῷ to him τεσσερακονταετὴς of forty years’ χρόνος, time, ἀνέβη it came up ἐπὶ upon τὴν the καρδίαν heart αὐτοῦ of him ἐπισκέψασθαι to look upon τοὺς the ἀδελφοὺς brothers αὐτοῦ of him τοὺς the υἱοὺς sons Ἰσραήλ. of Israel. 24 καὶ And ἰδών having seen τινα someone ἀδικούμενον being unjustly treated ἠμύνατο he defended καὶ and ἐποίησεν did ἐκδίκησιν vengeance τῷ to the (one) καταπονουμένῳ being abused πατάξας having smitten τὸν the Αἰγύπτιον. Egyptian. 25 ἐνόμιζεν He was of the opinion δὲ but συνιέναι to comprehend τοὺς the ἀδελφοὺς brothers ὅτι that ὁ the θεὸς God διὰ through χειρὸς hand αὐτοῦ of him δίδωσιν is giving σωτηρίαν salvation αὐτοῖς, to them, οἱ the (ones) δὲ but οὐ not συνῆκαν. comprehended. 26 τῇ To the τε and ἐπιούσῃ being upon ἡμέρᾳ day ὤφθη he became seen αὐτοῖς to them μαχομένοις fighting καὶ and συνήλλασσεν he was reconciling αὐτοὺς them εἰς into εἰρήνην peace εἰπών having said Ἄνδρες, Male persons, ἀδελφοί brothers ἐστε· YOU are; ἵνα in order that τί what ἀδικεῖτε are YOU treating unjustly ἀλλήλους; one another? 27 ὁ The (one) δὲ but ἀδικῶν treating unjustly τὸν the πλησίον neighbor ἀπώσατο pushed away αὐτὸν him εἰπών having said Τίς Who σὲ you κατέστησεν appointed ἄρχοντα ruler καὶ and δικαστὴν judge ἐφ’ upon ἡμῶν; us? 28 μὴ Not ἀνελεῖν to take up με me σὺ you θέλεις are willing ὃν what τρόπον manner ἀνεῖλες you took up ἐχθὲς yesterday τὸν the Αἰγύπτιον; Egyptian? 29 ἔφυγεν Fled δὲ but Μωυσῆς Moses ἐν in τῷ the λόγῳ word τούτῳ, this, καὶ and ἐγένετο he became πάροικος dweller beside ἐν in γῇ earth Μαδιάμ, of Midian, οὗ where ἐγέννησεν he generated υἱοὺς sons δύο. two.

30 Καὶ And πληρωθέντων having been fulfilled ἐτῶν of years τεσσεράκοντα forty ὤφθη he became seen αὐτῷ to him ἐν in τῇ the ἐρήμῳ desolate [place] τοῦ of the ὄρους Mount Σινὰ Sinai ἄγγελος angel ἐν in φλογὶ flame πυρὸς of fire βάτου· of thornbush; 31 ὁ the δὲ but Μωυσῆς Moses ἰδὼν having seen ἐθαύμασεν he wondered at τὸ the ὅραμα· sight; προσερχομένου coming toward δὲ but αὐτοῦ of him κατανοῆσαι to mind down ἐγένετο occurred φωνὴ voice Κυρίου of Lord 32 ᾿Εγὼ I ὁ the θεὸς God τῶν of the πατέρων fathers σου, of you, ὁ the θεὸς God ᾿Αβραὰμ of Abraham καὶ and Ἰσαὰκ of Isaac καὶ and Ἰακώβ. of Jacob. ἔντρομος Atremble δὲ but γενόμενος having become Μωυσῆς Moses οὐκ not ἐτόλμα was daring κατανοῆσαι. to mind down. 33 εἶπεν Said δὲ but αὐτῷ to him ὁ the κύριος Lord Λύσον Loosen τὸ the ὑπόδημα sandal τῶν of the ποδῶν feet σου, of you, ὁ the γὰρ for τόπος place ἐφ’ upon ᾧ which ἕστηκας you have stood γῆ earth ἁγία holy ἐστίν. is. 34 ἰδὼν Having seen εἶδον I saw τὴν the κάκωσιν bad treatment τοῦ of the λαοῦ people μου of me τοῦ of the (one) ἐν in Αἰγύπτῳ, Egypt, καὶ and τοῦ of the στεναγμοῦ groaning αὐτοῦ of it ἤκουσα, I heard, καὶ and κατέβην I came down ἐξελέσθαι to take out αὐτούς· them; καὶ and νῦν now δεῦρο hither ἀποστείλω I shall send off σε you εἰς into Αἴγυπτον. Egypt. 35 Τοῦτον This τὸν the Μωυσῆν, Moses, ὃν whom ἠρνήσαντο they disowned εἰπόντες (ones) having said Τίς Who σὲ you κατέστησεν appointed ἄρχοντα ruler καὶ and δικαστήν, judge, τοῦτον this (one) ὁ the θεὸς God καὶ and ἄρχοντα ruler καὶ and λυτρωτὴν deliverer ἀπέσταλκεν has sent off σὺν together with χειρὶ hand ἀγγέλου of angel τοῦ of the (one) ὀφθέντος having become seen αὐτῷ to him ἐν in τῇ the βάτῳ. thornbush. 36 οὗτος This (one) ἐξήγαγεν led out αὐτοὺς them ποιήσας having done τέρατα portents καὶ and σημεῖα signs ἐν in τῇ the Αἰγύπτῳ Egypt καὶ and ἐν in ᾿Ερυθρᾷ Red Θαλάσσῃ Sea καὶ and ἐν in τῇ the ἐρήμῳ desolate [place] ἔτη years τεσσεράκοντα. forty.

37 οὗτός This ἐστιν is ὁ the Μωυσῆς Moses ὁ the (one) εἴπας having said τοῖς to the υἱοῖς sons Ἰσραήλ of Israel Προφήτην Prophet ὑμῖν to YOU ἀναστήσει will make stand up ὁ the θεὸς God ἐκ out of τῶν the ἀδελφῶν brothers ὑμῶν of YOU ὡς as ἐμέ. me. 38 οὗτός This ἐστιν is ὁ the (one) γενόμενος having come to be ἐν in τῇ the ἐκκλησίᾳ ecclesia ἐν in τῇ the ἐρήμῳ desolate [place] μετὰ with τοῦ the ἀγγέλου angel τοῦ the (one) λαλοῦντος speaking αὐτῷ to him ἐν in τῷ the ὄρει Mount Σινὰ Sinai καὶ and τῶν of the πατέρων fathers ἡμῶν, of us, ὃς which one ἐδέξατο received λόγια little words ζῶντα living δοῦναι to give ὑμῖν, to YOU, 39 ᾧ to which (one) οὐκ not ἠθέλησαν they willed ὑπήκοοι obedient γενέσθαι to become οἱ the πατέρες fathers ἡμῶν of us ἀλλὰ but ἀπώσαντο they pushed away καὶ and ἐστράφησαν they turned back ἐν in ταῖς the καρδίαις hearts αὐτῶν of them εἰς into Αἴγυπτον, Egypt, 40 εἰπόντες having said τῷ to the ᾿Ααρών Aaron Ποίησον Make ἡμῖν to us θεοὺς gods οἳ who προπορεύσονται will go ahead ἡμῶν· of us; ὁ the γὰρ for Μωυσῆς Moses οὗτος, this, ὃς who ἐξήγαγεν led out ἡμᾶς us ἐκ out of γῆς earth Αἰγύπτου, of Egypt, οὐκ not οἴδαμεν we have known τί what ἐγένετο occurred αὐτῷ. to him. 41 καὶ And ἐμοσχοποίησαν they made calf ἐν in ταῖς the ἡμέραις days ἐκείναις those καὶ and ἀνήγαγον they led up θυσίαν sacrifice τῷ to the εἰδώλῳ, idol, καὶ and εὐφραίνοντο they were being well-minded ἐν in τοῖς the ἔργοις works τῶν of the χειρῶν hands αὐτῶν. of them. 42 ἔστρεψεν Turned δὲ but ὁ the θεὸς God καὶ and παρέδωκεν gave beside αὐτοὺς them λατρεύειν to be rendering sacred service τῇ to the στρατιᾷ army τοῦ of the οὐρανοῦ, heaven, καθὼς according as γέγραπται it has been written ἐν in Βίβλῳ Book τῶν of the προφητῶν prophets Μὴ Not σφάγια victims καὶ and θυσίας sacrifices προσηνέγκατέ YOU bore toward μοι to me ἔτη years τεσσεράκοντα forty ἐν in τῇ the ἐρήμῳ, desolate [place], οἶκος house Ἰσραήλ; of Israel? 43 καὶ And ἀνελάβετε YOU took up τὴν the σκηνὴν tent τοῦ of the Μολὸχ Moloch καὶ and τὸ the ἄστρον star τοῦ of the θεοῦ god Ῥομφά, Rompha, τοὺς the τύπους types οὓς which ἐποιήσατε YOU made προσκυνεῖν to be worshiping αὐτοῖς. to them. καὶ And μετοικιῶ I shall deport ὑμᾶς YOU ἐπέκεινα beyond Βαβυλῶνος. Babylon.

44 Ἡ The σκηνὴ tent τοῦ of the μαρτυρίου witness ἦν was τοῖς to the πατράσιν fathers ἡμῶν of us ἐν in τῇ the ἐρήμῳ, desolate [place], καθὼς according as διετάξατο ordered ὁ the (one) λαλῶν speaking τῷ to the Μωυσῇ Moses ποιῆσαι to make αὐτὴν it κατὰ according to τὸν the τύπον type ὃν which ἑωράκει, he had seen, 45 ἣν which καὶ also εἰσήγαγον they led in διαδεξάμενοι having throughout received οἱ the πατέρες fathers ἡμῶν of us μετὰ with Ἰησοῦ Jesus ἐν in τῇ the κατασχέσει having down τῶν of the ἐθνῶν nations ὧν of which (ones) ἐξῶσεν pushed out ὁ the θεὸς God ἀπὸ from προσώπου face τῶν of the πατέρων fathers ἡμῶν of us ἕως until τῶν the ἡμερῶν days Δαυείδ· of David; 46 ὃς who εὗρεν found χάριν favor ἐνώπιον in sight τοῦ of the θεοῦ God καὶ and ᾐτήσατο he asked εὑρεῖν to find σκήνωμα tenting place τῷ to the θεῷ God Ἰακώβ. of Jacob. 47 Σολομῶν Solomon δὲ but οἰκοδόμησεν built αὐτῷ to him οἶκον. house. 48 ἀλλ’ But οὐχ not ὁ the ὕψιστος Most High ἐν in χειροποιήτοις handmade (ones) κατοικεῖ· is inhabiting; καθὼς according as ὁ the προφήτης prophet λέγει is saying 49 Ὁ The οὐρανός heaven μοι to me θρόνος, throne, καὶ and ἡ the γῆ earth ὑποπόδιον footstool τῶν of the ποδῶν feet μου· of me; ποῖον what sort of οἶκον house οἰκοδομήσετέ will YOU build μοι, to me, λέγει is saying Κύριος, Lord, ἢ or τίς what τόπος place τῆς of the καταπαύσεώς resting μου; of me? 50 οὐχὶ Not ἡ the χείρ hand μου of me ἐποίησεν made ταῦτα these (things) πάντα; all? 51 Σκληροτράχηλοι Hard-necked (ones) καὶ and ἀπερίτμητοι uncircumcised (ones) καρδίαις to hearts καὶ and τοῖς to the ὠσίν, ears, ὑμεῖς YOU ἀεὶ always τῷ to the πνεύματι spirit τῷ the ἁγίῳ holy ἀντιπίπτετε, YOU are falling against, ὡς as οἱ the πατέρες fathers ὑμῶν of YOU καὶ also ὑμεῖς. YOU. 52 τίνα Which (one) τῶν of the προφητῶν prophets οὐκ not ἐδίωξαν persecuted οἱ the πατέρες fathers ὑμῶν; of YOU? καὶ And ἀπέκτειναν they killed τοὺς the (one) προκαταγγείλαντας having announced beforehand περὶ about τῆς the ἐλεύσεως coming τοῦ of the δικαίου righteous (ones) οὗ of whom νῦν now ὑμεῖς YOU προδόται betrayers καὶ and φονεῖς murderers ἐγένεσθε, YOU became, 53 οἵτινες who ἐλάβετε YOU received τὸν the νόμον law εἰς into διαταγὰς orders ἀγγέλων, of angels, καὶ and οὐκ not ἐφυλάξατε. YOU guarded.

54 ᾿Ακούοντες Hearing δὲ but ταῦτα these (things) διεπρίοντο they were being sawn through ταῖς to the καρδίαις hearts αὐτῶν of them καὶ and ἔβρυχον they were gnashing τοὺς the ὀδόντας teeth ἐπ’ upon αὐτόν. him. 55 ὑπάρχων Being δὲ but πλήρης full πνεύματος of spirit ἁγίου holy ἀτενίσας having gazed εἰς into τὸν the οὐρανὸν heaven εἶδεν he saw δόξαν glory θεοῦ of God καὶ and Ἰησοῦν Jesus ἑστῶτα having stood ἐκ out of δεξιῶν right [parts] τοῦ of the θεοῦ, God, 56 καὶ and εἶπεν he said Ἰδοὺ Look! θεωρῶ I am beholding τοὺς the οὐρανοὺς heavens διηνοιγμένους having been opened καὶ and τὸν the υἱὸν Son τοῦ of the ἀνθρώπου man ἐκ out of δεξιῶν right [parts] ἑστῶτα having stood τοῦ of the θεοῦ. God. 57 κράξαντες Having cried out δὲ but φωνῇ to voice μεγάλῃ great συνέσχον they held together τὰ the ὦτα ears αὐτῶν, of them, καὶ and ὥρμησαν they rushed ὁμοθυμαδὸν like-mindedly ἐπ’ upon αὐτόν, him, 58 καὶ and ἐκβαλόντες having ejected ἔξω outside τῆς the πόλεως city ἐλιθοβόλουν. they were throwing stones. καὶ And οἱ the μάρτυρες witnesses ἀπέθεντο put off τὰ the ἱμάτια outer garments αὐτῶν of them παρὰ beside τοὺς the πόδας feet νεανίου of young man καλουμένου being called Σαύλου. Saul. 59 καὶ And ἐλιθοβόλουν they were throwing stones at τὸν the Στέφανον Stephen ἐπικαλούμενον calling upon καὶ and λέγοντα saying Κύριε Lord Ἰησοῦ, Jesus, δέξαι receive τὸ the πνεῦμά spirit μου· of me; 60 θεὶς having put δὲ but τὰ the γόνατα knees ἔκραξεν he cried out φωνῇ to voice μεγάλῃ great Κύριε, Lord, μὴ not στήσῃς you should make to stand αὐτοῖς to them ταύτην this τὴν the ἁμαρτίαν· sin; καὶ and τοῦτο this (thing) εἰπὼν having said ἐκοιμήθη. he fell asleep.

8 Σαῦλος Saul δὲ but ἦν was συνευδοκῶν thinking well together τῇ to the ἀναιρέσει lifting up αὐτοῦ. of him. ᾿Εγένετο Occurred δὲ but ἐν in ἐκείνῃ that τῇ the ἡμέρᾳ day διωγμὸς persecution μέγας great ἐπὶ upon τὴν the ἐκκλησίαν ecclesia τὴν the (one) ἐν in Ἰεροσολύμοις· Jerusalem; πάντες all δὲ but διεσπάρησαν were dispersed κατὰ down τὰς the χώρας regions τῆς of the Ἰουδαίας Judea καὶ and Σαμαρίας of Samaria πλὴν besides τῶν the ἀποστόλων. apostles. 2 συνεκόμισαν Carried together δὲ but τὸν the Στέφανον Stephen ἄνδρες male persons εὐλαβεῖς well-holding καὶ and ἐποίησαν they made κοπετὸν lamentation μέγαν great ἐπ’ upon αὐτῷ. him. 3 Σαῦλος Saul δὲ but ἐλυμαίνετο was outraging τὴν the ἐκκλησίαν ecclesia κατὰ down on τοὺς the οἴκους houses εἰσπορευόμενος, going in, σύρων dragging τε and ἄνδρας male persons καὶ and γυναῖκας women παρεδίδου he was giving beside εἰς into φυλακήν. prison.

4 Οἱ The (ones) μὲν indeed οὖν therefore διασπαρέντες having been dispersed διῆλθον went through εὐαγγελιζόμενοι declaring as good news τὸν the λόγον. word. 5 Φίλιππος Philip δὲ but κατελθὼν having gone down εἰς into τὴν the πόλιν city τῆς of the Σαμαρίας Samaria ἐκήρυσσεν he was preaching αὐτοῖς to them τὸν the χριστόν. Christ. 6 προσεῖχον Were attentive δὲ but οἱ the ὄχλοι crowds τοῖς to the (things) λεγομένοις being said ὑπὸ by τοῦ the Φιλίππου Philip ὁμοθυμαδὸν like-mindedly ἐν in τῷ the ἀκούειν to be hearing αὐτοὺς them καὶ and βλέπειν to be looking at τὰ the σημεῖα signs ἃ which ἐποίει· he was doing; 7 πολλοὶ many γὰρ for τῶν of the (ones) ἐχόντων having πνεύματα spirits ἀκάθαρτα unclean βοῶντα crying aloud φωνῇ to voice μεγάλῃ great ἐξήρχοντο, they were coming out, πολλοὶ many δὲ but παραλελυμένοι having been paralyzed καὶ and χωλοὶ lame ἐθεραπεύθησαν· they were cured; 8 ἐγένετο occurred δὲ but πολλὴ much χαρὰ joy ἐν in τῇ the πόλει city ἐκείνῃ. that.

9 ᾿Ανὴρ Male person δέ but τις some ὀνόματι to name Σίμων Simon προυπῆρχεν was before ἐν in τῇ the πόλει city μαγεύων practicing magic καὶ and ἐξιστάνων astonishing τὸ the ἔθνος nation τῆς of the Σαμαρίας, Samaria, λέγων saying εἶναί to be τινα somebody ἑαυτὸν himself μέγαν, great, 10 ᾧ to whom προσεῖχον they were being attentive πάντες all ἀπὸ from μικροῦ small (one) ἕως until μεγάλου great (one) λέγοντες saying Οὗτός This (one) ἐστιν is ἡ the Δύναμις Power τοῦ of the θεοῦ God ἡ the καλουμένη being called Μεγάλη. Great. 11 προσεῖχον They were attentive δὲ but αὐτῷ to him διὰ through τὸ the ἱκανῷ sufficient χρόνῳ time ταῖς to the μαγίαις magical acts ἐξεστακέναι to have amazed αὐτούς. them. 12 ὅτε When δὲ but ἐπίστευσαν they believed τῷ to the Φιλίππῳ Philip εὐαγγελιζομένῳ declaring good news περὶ about τῆς the βασιλείας kingdom τοῦ of the θεοῦ God καὶ and τοῦ of the ὀνόματος name Ἰησοῦ of Jesus Χριστοῦ, Christ, ἐβαπτίζοντο they were being baptized ἄνδρες male persons τε and καὶ and γυναῖκες. women. 13 ὁ The δὲ but Σίμων Simon καὶ also αὐτὸς he ἐπίστευσεν, believed, καὶ and βαπτισθεὶς having been baptized ἦν he was προσκαρτερῶν persevering τῷ to the Φιλίππῳ, Philip, θεωρῶν beholding τε and σημεῖα signs καὶ and δυνάμεις powers μεγάλας great γινομένας occurring ἐξίστατο. he was being astonished.

14 ᾿Ακούσαντες Having heard δὲ but οἱ the ἐν in Ἰεροσολύμοις Jerusalem ἀπόστολοι apostles ὅτι that δέδεκται has accepted ἡ the Σαμαρία Samaria τὸν the λόγον word τοῦ of the θεοῦ God ἀπέστειλαν they sent off πρὸς toward αὐτοὺς them Πέτρον Peter καὶ and Ἰωάνην, John, 15 οἵτινες who καταβάντες having gone down προσηύξαντο prayed περὶ about αὐτῶν them ὅπως so that λάβωσιν they might receive πνεῦμα spirit ἅγιον· holy; 16 οὐδέπω not but yet γὰρ for ἦν it was ἐπ’ upon οὐδενὶ no one αὐτῶν of them ἐπιπεπτωκός, having fallen on, μόνον only δὲ but βεβαπτισμένοι having been baptized ὑπῆρχον they were εἰς into τὸ the ὄνομα name τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord Ἰησοῦ. Jesus. 17 τότε Then ἐπετίθεσαν they were putting τὰς the χεῖρας hands ἐπ’ upon αὐτούς, them, καὶ and ἐλάμβανον they were receiving πνεῦμα spirit ἅγιον. holy.

18 Ἰδὼν Having seen δὲ but ὁ the Σίμων Simon ὅτι that διὰ through τῆς the ἐπιθέσεως putting upon τῶν of the χειρῶν hands τῶν of the ἀποστόλων apostles δίδοται is being given τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit προσήνεγκεν he offered αὐτοῖς to them χρήματα monies 19 λέγων saying Δότε Give YOU κἀμοὶ also to me τὴν the ἐξουσίαν authority ταύτην this ἵνα in order that ᾧ to whom ἐὰν if ever ἐπιθῶ I should place τὰς the χεῖρας hands λαμβάνῃ he may receive πνεῦμα spirit ἅγιον. holy. 20 Πέτρος Peter δὲ but εἶπεν said πρὸς toward αὐτόν him Τὸ The ἀργύριόν silver σου of you σὺν together with σοὶ you εἴη let be εἰς into ἀπώλειαν, destruction, ὅτι because τὴν the δωρεὰν free gift τοῦ of the θεοῦ God ἐνόμισας you opined διὰ through χρημάτων monies κτᾶσθαι. to acquire. 21 οὐκ Not ἔστιν is σοι to you μερὶς part οὐδὲ nor κλῆρος lot ἐν in τῷ the λόγῳ word τούτῳ, this, ἡ the γὰρ for καρδία heart σου of you οὐκ not ἔστιν is εὐθεῖα straight ἔναντι in against τοῦ the θεοῦ. God. 22 μετανόησον Repent οὖν therefore ἀπὸ from τῆς the κακίας badness σου of you ταύτης, of this, καὶ and δεήθητι supplicate τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord εἰ if ἄρα really ἀφεθήσεταί will be let go off σοι to you ἡ the ἐπίνοια device τῆς of the καρδίας heart σου· of you; 23 εἰς into γὰρ for χολὴν bile πικρίας of bitterness καὶ and σύνδεσμον joint-bond ἀδικίας of unrighteousness ὁρῶ I am seeing σε you ὄντα. being. 24 ἀποκριθεὶς Having answered δὲ but ὁ the Σίμων Simon εἶπεν said Δεήθητε Supplicate ὑμεῖς YOU ὑπὲρ over ἐμοῦ me πρὸς toward τὸν the κύριον Lord ὅπως so that μηδὲν nothing ἐπέλθῃ should come on ἐπ’ upon ἐμὲ me ὧν of which (things) εἰρήκατε. YOU have said.

25 Οἱ The (ones) μὲν indeed οὖν therefore διαμαρτυράμενοι having given thorough witness καὶ and λαλήσαντες having spoken τὸν the λόγον word τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord ὑπέστρεφον they were turning back εἰς into Ἰεροσόλυμα, Jerusalem, πολλάς many τε and κώμας villages τῶν of the Σαμαρειτῶν Samaritans εὐηγγελίζοντο. they were addressing with good news.

26 Ἄγγελος Angel δὲ but Κυρίου of Lord ἐλάλησεν spoke πρὸς toward Φίλιππον Philip λέγων saying ᾿Ανάστηθι Stand up καὶ and πορεύου be going κατὰ down μεσημβρίαν south ἐπὶ upon τὴν the ὁδὸν way τὴν the (one) καταβαίνουσαν going down ἀπὸ from Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem εἰς into Γάζαν· Gaza; αὕτη this ἐστὶν is ἔρημος. desolate [place]. 27 καὶ And ἀναστὰς having stood up ἐπορεύθη, he went, καὶ and ἰδοὺ look! ἀνὴρ male person Αἰθίοψ Ethiopian εὐνοῦχος eunuch δυνάστης man of power Κανδάκης of Candace βασιλίσσης queen Αἰθιόπων, of Ethiopians, ὃς who ἦν was ἐπὶ upon πάσης all τῆς the γάζης treasure αὐτῆς, of her, ὃς who ἐληλύθει had come προσκυνήσων going to worship εἰς into Ἰερουσαλήμ, Jerusalem, 28 ἦν he was δὲ but ὑποστρέφων returning καὶ and καθήμενος sitting ἐπὶ upon τοῦ the ἅρματος chariot αὐτοῦ of him καὶ and ἀνεγίνωσκεν he was reading τὸν the προφήτην prophet Ἠσαίαν. Isaiah. 29 εἶπεν Said δὲ but τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit τῷ to the Φιλίππῳ Philip Πρόσελθε Come you toward καὶ and κολλήθητι be glued τῷ to the ἅρματι chariot τούτῳ. this. 30 προσδραμὼν Having run toward δὲ but ὁ the Φίλιππος Philip ἤκουσεν heard αὐτοῦ of him ἀναγινώσκοντος reading Ἠσαίαν Isaiah τὸν the προφήτην, prophet, καὶ and εἶπεν he said ῏Αρά Really γε in fact γινώσκεις are you knowing ἃ what (things) ἀναγινώσκεις; you are reading? 31 ὁ The (one) δὲ but εἶπεν said Πῶς How γὰρ for ἂν likely δυναίμην I would be able ἐὰν if ever μή not τις someone ὁδηγήσει will guide με; me? παρεκάλεσέν He entreated τε and τὸν the Φίλιππον Philip ἀναβάντα having come up καθίσαι to sit down σὺν together with αὐτῷ. him. 32 ἡ The δὲ but περιοχὴ passage τῆς of the γραφῆς scripture ἣν which ἀνεγίνωσκεν he was reading ἦν was αὕτη this Ὡς As πρόβατον sheep ἐπὶ upon σφαγὴν slaughter ἤχθη, he was led, καὶ and ὡς as ἀμνὸς lamb ἐναντίον in against τοῦ the (one) κείροντος shearing αὐτὸν him ἄφωνος, voiceless, οὕτως thus οὐκ not ἀνοίγει he is opening up τὸ the στόμα mouth αὐτοῦ. of him. 33 ᾿Εν In τῇ the ταπεινώσει humiliation ἡ the κρίσις judgment αὐτοῦ of him ἤρθη· was lifted away; τὴν the γενεὰν generation αὐτοῦ of him τίς who διηγήσεται; will thoroughly relate? ὅτι Because αἴρεται is being lifted up ἀπὸ from τῆς the γῆς earth ἡ the ζωὴ life αὐτοῦ. of him.

34 ᾿Αποκριθεὶς Having answered δὲ but ὁ the εὐνοῦχος eunuch τῷ to the Φιλίππῳ Philip εἶπεν said Δέομαί I am supplicating σου, of you, περὶ about τίνος whom ὁ the προφήτης prophet λέγει is saying τοῦτο; this? περὶ About ἑαυτοῦ himself ἢ or περὶ about ἑτέρου different τινός; someone? 35 ἀνοίξας Having opened up δὲ but ὁ the Φίλιππος Philip τὸ the στόμα mouth αὐτοῦ of him καὶ and ἀρξάμενος having started ἀπὸ from τῆς the γραφῆς scripture ταύτης this εὐηγγελίσατο he declared as good news αὐτῷ to him τὸν the Ἰησοῦν. Jesus. 36 ὡς As δὲ but ἐπορεύοντο they were going κατὰ down τὴν the ὁδόν, way, ἦλθον they came ἐπί upon τι some ὕδωρ, water, καί and φησιν says ὁ the εὐνοῦχος eunuch Ἰδοὺ Look! ὕδωρ· Water; τί what κωλύει is preventing με me βαπτισθῆναι; to be baptized? 37 —— —— 38 καὶ And ἐκέλευσεν he commanded στῆναι to stand τὸ the ἅρμα, chariot, καὶ and κατέβησαν they went down ἀμφότεροι both εἰς into τὸ the ὕδωρ water ὅ the τε and Φίλιππος Philip καὶ and ὁ the εὐνοῦχος, eunuch, καὶ and ἐβάπτισεν he baptized αὐτόν. him. 39 ὅτε When δὲ but ἀνέβησαν they came up ἐκ out of τοῦ the ὕδατος, water, πνεῦμα spirit Κυρίου of Lord ἥρπασεν snatched away τὸν the Φίλιππον, Philip, καὶ and οὐκ not εἶδεν he saw αὐτὸν him οὐκέτι not yet ὁ the εὐνοῦχος, eunuch, ἐπορεύετο he was going γὰρ for τὴν the ὁδὸν way αὐτοῦ of him χαίρων. rejoicing. 40 Φίλιππος Philip δὲ but εὑρέθη was found εἰς into Ἄζωτον, Ashdod, καὶ and διερχόμενος going through εὐηγγελίζετο he was declaring good news to τὰς the πόλεις cities πάσας all ἕως until τοῦ the ἐλθεῖν to come αὐτὸν him εἰς into Καισαρίαν. Caesarea.

9 Ὁ The δὲ but Σαῦλος, Saul, ἔτι yet ἐνπνέων breathing in ἀπειλῆς of threat καὶ and φόνου of murder εἰς into τοὺς the μαθητὰς disciples τοῦ of the κυρίου, Lord, προσελθὼν having come toward τῷ to the ἀρχιερεῖ chief priest 2 ᾐτήσατο he asked παρ’ beside αὐτοῦ of him ἐπιστολὰς letters εἰς into Δαμασκὸν Damascus πρὸς toward τὰς the συναγωγάς, synagogues, ὅπως so that ἐάν if ever τινας any εὕρῃ he might find τῆς of the ὁδοῦ way ὄντας, being, ἄνδρας male persons τε and καὶ and γυναῖκας, women, δεδεμένους having been bound ἀγάγῃ he might lead εἰς into Ἰερουσαλήμ. Jerusalem.

3 ᾿Εν In δὲ but τῷ the πορεύεσθαι to be going ἐγένετο it occurred αὐτὸν him ἐγγίζειν to be nearing τῇ to the Δαμασκῷ, Damascus, ἐξέφνης suddenly τε and αὐτὸν him περιήστραψεν flashed around φῶς light ἐκ out of τοῦ the οὐρανοῦ, heaven, 4 καὶ and πεσὼν having fallen ἐπὶ upon τὴν the γῆν earth ἤκουσεν he heard φωνὴν voice λέγουσαν saying αὐτῷ to him Σαούλ Saul Σαούλ, Saul, τί why με me διώκεις; are you persecuting? 5 εἶπεν He said δέ but Τίς Who εἶ, are you, κύριε; Lord? ὁ The (one) δέ but ᾿Εγώ I εἰμι am Ἰησοῦς Jesus ὃν whom σὺ you διώκεις· are persecuting; 6 ἀλλὰ but ἀνάστηθι stand up you καὶ and εἴσελθε enter you εἰς into τὴν the πόλιν, city, καὶ and λαληθήσεταί it will be spoken σοι to you ὅτι what σε you δεῖ it is necessary ποιεῖν. to be doing. 7 οἱ The δὲ but ἄνδρες male persons οἱ the (ones) συνοδεύοντες journeying with αὐτῷ him ἱστήκεισαν had stood ἐνεοί, dumb, ἀκούοντες hearing μὲν indeed τῆς of the φωνῆς voice μηδένα no one δὲ but θεωροῦντες. beholding. 8 ἠγέρθη Got up δὲ but Σαῦλος Saul ἀπὸ from τῆς the γῆς, earth, ἀνεῳγμένων having been opened up δὲ but τῶν of the ὀφθαλμῶν eyes αὐτοῦ of him οὐδὲν nothing ἔβλεπεν· he was seeing; χειραγωγοῦντες leading by the hand δὲ but αὐτὸν him εἰσήγαγον they led in εἰς into Δαμασκόν. Damascus. 9 καὶ And ἦν he was ἡμέρας days τρεῖς three μὴ not βλέπων, seeing, καὶ and οὐκ not ἔφαγεν he ate οὐδὲ neither ἔπιεν. he drank.

10 ῏Ην Was δέ but τις some μαθητὴς disciple ἐν in Δαμασκῷ Damascus ὀνόματι to name Ἁνανίας, Ananias, καὶ and εἶπεν said πρὸς toward αὐτὸν him ἐν in ὁράματι vision ὁ the κύριος Lord Ἁνανία. Anania. ὁ The (one) δὲ but εἶπεν said Ἰδού Look! ἐγώ, I, κύριε. Lord. 11 ὁ The δὲ but κύριος Lord πρὸς toward αὐτόν him ᾿Ανάστα Stand up you πορεύθητι go ἐπὶ upon τὴν the ῥύμην street τὴν the καλουμένην being called Εὐθεῖαν Straight καὶ and ζήτησον seek ἐν in οἰκίᾳ house Ἰούδα of Judas Σαῦλον Saul ὀνόματι to name Ταρσέα, Tarsian, ἰδοὺ look! γὰρ for προσεύχεται, he is praying, 12 καὶ and εἶδεν he saw ἄνδρα male person ἐν in ὁράματι vision Ἁνανίαν Anania ὀνόματι to name εἰσελθόντα having come in καὶ and ἐπιθέντα having put upon αὐτῷ him τὰς the χεῖρας hands ὅπως so that ἀναβλέψῃ. he might look again. 13 ἀπεκρίθη Answered δὲ but Ἁνανίας Ananias Κύριε, Lord, ἤκουσα I heard ἀπὸ from πολλῶν many περὶ about τοῦ the ἀνδρὸς male person τούτου, this, ὅσα as many as κακὰ bad (things) τοῖς to the ἁγίοις holy ones σου of you ἐποίησεν he did ἐν in Ἰερουσαλήμ· Jerusalem; 14 καὶ and ὧδε here ἔχει he is having ἐξουσίαν authority παρὰ beside τῶν of the ἀρχιερέων chief priests δῆσαι to bind πάντας all τοὺς the (ones) ἐπικαλουμένους calling upon τὸ the ὄνομά name σου. of you. 15 εἶπεν Said δὲ but πρὸς toward αὐτὸν him ὁ the κύριος Lord Πορεύου, Be you going, ὅτι because σκεῦος vessel ἐκλογῆς of choice ἐστίν is μοι to me οὗτος this (one) τοῦ of the βαστάσαι to carry τὸ the ὄνομά name μου of me ἐνώπιον in sight τῶν of the ἐθνῶν nations τε and καὶ and βασιλέων of kings υἱῶν of sons τε and Ἰσραήλ, of Israel, 16 ἐγὼ I γὰρ for ὑποδείξω shall show αὐτῷ to him ὅσα as many (things) as δεῖ it is necessary αὐτὸν him ὑπὲρ over τοῦ the ὀνόματός name μου of me παθεῖν. to suffer.

17 ᾿Απῆλθεν Went off δὲ but Ἁνανίας Ananias καὶ and εἰσῆλθεν he entered εἰς into τὴν the οἰκίαν, house, καὶ and ἐπιθεὶς having imposed ἐπ’ upon αὐτὸν him τὰς the χεῖρας hands εἶπεν he said Σαοὺλ Saul ἀδελφέ, brother, ὁ the κύριος Lord ἀπέσταλκέν has sent off με, me, Ἰησοῦς Jesus ὁ the (one) ὀφθείς having become seen σοι to you ἐν in τῇ the ὁδῷ way ᾗ in which ἤρχου, you were coming, ὅπως so that ἀναβλέψῃς you might look again καὶ and πλησθῇς you might be filled πνεύματος of spirit ἁγίου. holy. 18 καὶ And εὐθέως immediately ἀπέπεσαν they fell off αὐτοῦ of him ἀπὸ from τῶν the ὀφθαλμῶν eyes ὡς as λεπίδες, scales, ἀνέβλεψέν he looked again τε, and, καὶ and ἀναστὰς having stood up ἐβαπτίσθη, he was baptized, 19 καὶ and λαβὼν having received τροφὴν food ἐνισχύθη. he was strengthened within.

᾿Εγένετο He came to be δὲ but μετὰ with τῶν the ἐν in Δαμασκῷ Damascus μαθητῶν disciples ἡμέρας days τινάς, some, 20 καὶ and εὐθέως immediately ἐν in ταῖς the συναγωγαῖς synagogues ἐκήρυσσεν he was preaching τὸν the Ἰησοῦν Jesus ὅτι that οὗτός this ἐστιν is ὁ the υἱὸς Son τοῦ of the θεοῦ. God. 21 ἐξίσταντο Were being astonished δὲ but πάντες all οἱ the (ones) ἀκούοντες hearing καὶ and ἔλεγον they were saying Οὐχ Not οὗτός this ἐστιν is ὁ the (one) πορθήσας having laid waste ἐν in Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem τοὺς the (ones) ἐπικαλουμένους calling upon τὸ the ὄνομα name τοῦτο, this, καὶ and ὧδε here εἰς into τοῦτο this ἐληλύθει he had come ἵνα in order that δεδεμένους having been bound αὐτοὺς them ἀγάγῃ he might lead ἐπὶ upon τοὺς the ἀρχιερεῖς; chief priests? 22 Σαῦλος Saul δὲ but μᾶλλον rather ἐνεδυναμοῦτο was being empowered καὶ and συνέχυννεν he was confounding Ἰουδαίους Jews τοὺς the (ones) κατοικοῦντας inhabiting ἐν in Δαμασκῷ, Damascus, συνβιβάζων making go with ὅτι that οὗτός this ἐστιν is ὁ the χριστός. Christ.

23 Ὡς As δὲ but ἐπληροῦντο were being fulfilled ἡμέραι days ἱκαναί, sufficient, συνεβουλεύσαντο consulted together οἱ the Ἰουδαῖοι Jews ἀνελεῖν to take up αὐτόν· him; 24 ἐγνώσθη it became known δὲ but τῷ to the Σαύλῳ Saul ἡ the ἐπιβουλὴ counsel upon αὐτῶν. of them. παρετηροῦντο They were closely observing δὲ but καὶ and τὰς the πύλας gates ἡμέρας of day τε and καὶ and νυκτὸς of night ὅπως so that αὐτὸν him ἀνέλωσιν· they might take up; 25 λαβόντες having taken δὲ but οἱ the μαθηταὶ disciples αὐτοῦ of him νυκτὸς of night διὰ through τοῦ the τείχους wall καθῆκαν they let down αὐτὸν him χαλάσαντες having lowered ἐν in σφυρίδι. basket.

26 Παραγενόμενος Having come to be alongside δὲ but εἰς into Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem ἐπείραζεν he was trying κολλᾶσθαι to glue himself τοῖς to the μαθηταῖς· disciples; καὶ and πάντες all ἐφοβοῦντο they were fearing αὐτόν, him, μὴ not πιστεύοντες believing ὅτι that ἐστὶν he is μαθητής. disciple. 27 Βαρνάβας Barnabas δὲ but ἐπιλαβόμενος having taken hold of αὐτὸν him ἤγαγεν he led πρὸς toward τοὺς the ἀποστόλους, apostles, καὶ and διηγήσατο he thoroughly related αὐτοῖς to them πῶς how ἐν in τῇ the ὁδῷ way εἶδεν he saw τὸν the κύριον Lord καὶ and ὅτι that ἐλάλησεν he spoke αὐτῷ, to him, καὶ and πῶς how ἐν in Δαμασκῷ Damascus ἐπαρρησιάσατο he spoke boldly ἐν in τῷ the ὀνόματι name Ἰησοῦ. of Jesus. 28 καὶ And ἦν he was μετ’ with αὐτῶν them εἰσπορευόμενος going in καὶ and ἐκπορευόμενος going out εἰς into Ἰερουσαλήμ, Jerusalem, παρρησιαζόμενος speaking boldly ἐν in τῷ the ὀνόματι name τοῦ of the κυρίου, Lord, 29 ἐλάλει he was speaking τε and καὶ and συνεζήτει he was seeking together πρὸς toward τοὺς the Ἑλληνιστάς· Hellenists; οἱ the (ones) δὲ but ἐπεχείρουν were taking in hand ἀνελεῖν to take up αὐτόν. him. 30 ἐπιγνόντες Having accurately known δὲ but οἱ the ἀδελφοὶ brothers κατήγαγον led down αὐτὸν him εἰς into Καισαρίαν Caesarea καὶ and ἐξαπέστειλαν they sent off out αὐτὸν him εἰς into Ταρσόν. Tarsus.

31 Ἡ The μὲν indeed οὖν therefore ἐκκλησία ecclesia καθ’ down ὅλης whole τῆς the Ἰουδαίας Judea καὶ and Γαλιλαίας of Galilee καὶ and Σαμαρίας of Samaria εἶχεν was having εἰρήνην peace οἰκοδομουμένη, being built up, καὶ and πορευομένη going τῷ to the φόβῳ fear τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord καὶ and τῇ to the παρακλήσει comfort τοῦ of the ἁγίου holy πνεύματος spirit ἐπληθύνετο. it was being multiplied.

32 ᾿Εγένετο It occurred δὲ but Πέτρον Peter διερχόμενον traversing διὰ through πάντων all [parts] κατελθεῖν to come down καὶ and πρὸς toward τοὺς the ἁγίους holy (ones) τοὺς the (ones) κατοικοῦντας inhabiting Λύδδα. Lydda. 33 εὗρεν He found δὲ but ἐκεῖ there ἄνθρωπόν man τινα some ὀνόματι to name Αἰνέαν Aeneas ἐξ out of ἐτῶν years ὀκτὼ eight κατακείμενον lying down ἐπὶ upon κραβάττου, cot, ὃς who ἦν was παραλελυμένος. having been paralyzed. 34 καὶ And εἶπεν said αὐτῷ to him ὁ the Πέτρος Peter Αἰνέα, Aeneas, ἰᾶταί is healing σε you Ἰησοῦς Jesus Χριστός· Christ; ἀνάστηθι stand up you καὶ and στρῶσον do the spreading σεαυτῷ· to yourself; καὶ and εὐθέως immediately ἀνέστη. he stood up. 35 καὶ And εἶδαν saw αὐτὸν him πάντες all οἱ the (ones) κατοικοῦντες inhabiting Λύδδα Lydda καὶ and τὸν the Σαρῶνα, Sharon, οἵτινες who ἐπέστρεψαν turned ἐπὶ upon τὸν the κύριον. Lord.

36 ᾿Εν In Ἰόππῃ Joppa δέ but τις some ἦν was μαθήτρια female disciple ὀνόματι to name Ταβειθά, Tabitha, ἣ who διερμηνευομένη being translated λέγεται is being said Δορκάς· Dorcas; αὕτη this ἦν was πλήρης full ἔργων of works ἀγαθῶν good καὶ and ἐλεημοσυνῶν gifts of mercy ὧν of which ἐποίει. she was doing. 37 ἐγένετο It occurred δὲ but ἐν in ταῖς the ἡμέραις days ἐκείναις those ἀσθενήσασαν having fallen sick αὐτὴν her ἀποθανεῖν· to die; λούσαντες having washed δὲ but ἔθηκαν they put ἐν in ὑπερῴῳ. upper room. 38 ἐγγὺς Near δὲ but οὔσης being Λύδδας of Lydda τῇ to the Ἰόππῃ Joppa οἱ the μαθηταὶ disciples ἀκούσαντες having heard ὅτι that Πέτρος Peter ἐστὶν is ἐν in αὐτῇ it ἀπέστειλαν they sent off δύο two ἄνδρας male persons πρὸς toward αὐτὸν him παρακαλοῦντες entreating Μὴ Not ὀκνήσῃς you should be motionless διελθεῖν to come through ἕως until ἡμῶν· to us; 39 ἀναστὰς having stood up δὲ but Πέτρος Peter συνῆλθεν went with αὐτοῖς· them; ὃν whom παραγενόμενον having come to be alongside ἀνήγαγον they led up εἰς into τὸ the ὑπερῷον, upper room, καὶ and παρέστησαν they stood alongside αὐτῷ to him πᾶσαι all αἱ the χῆραι widows κλαίουσαι weeping καὶ and ἐπιδεικνύμεναι exhibiting χιτῶνας inner garments καὶ and ἱμάτια outer garments ὅσα as many as ἐποίει she was making μετ’ with αὐτῶν them οὖσα being ἡ the Δορκάς. Dorcas. 40 ἐκβαλὼν Having thrust out δὲ but ἔξω outside πάντας all (them) ὁ the Πέτρος Peter καὶ and θεὶς having placed τὰ the γόνατα knees προσηύξατο, he prayed, καὶ and ἐπιστρέψας having turned πρὸς toward τὸ the σῶμα body εἶπεν he said Ταβειθά, Tabitha, ἀνάστηθι. stand up. ἡ The (one) δὲ but ἤνοιξεν opened up τοὺς the ὀφθαλμοὺς eyes αὐτῆς, of her, καὶ and ἰδοῦσα having seen τὸν the Πέτρον Peter ἀνεκάθισεν. she sat up. 41 δοὺς Having given δὲ but αὐτῇ to her χεῖρα hand ἀνέστησεν he made stand up αὐτήν, her, φωνήσας having sounded for δὲ but τοὺς the ἁγίους holy (ones) καὶ and τὰς the χήρας widows παρέστησεν he presented αὐτὴν her ζῶσαν. living. 42 γνωστὸν Known δὲ but ἐγένετο it became καθ’ down ὅλης whole Ἰόππης, Joppa, καὶ and ἐπίστευσαν believed πολλοὶ many ἐπὶ upon τὸν the κύριον. Lord. 43 ᾿Εγένετο It occurred δὲ but ἡμέρας days ἱκανὰς sufficient μεῖναι to remain ἐν in Ἰόππῃ Joppa παρά beside τινι some Σίμωνι Simon βυρσεῖ. tanner.

10 ᾿Ανὴρ Male person δέ but τις some ἐν in Καισαρίᾳ Caesarea ὀνόματι to name Κορνήλιος, Cornelius, ἑκατοντάρχης centurion ἐκ out of σπείρης band τῆς of the (one) καλουμένης being called Ἰταλικῆς, Italian, 2 εὐσεβὴς well-reverential καὶ and φοβούμενος fearing τὸν the θεὸν God σὺν together with παντὶ all τῷ the οἴκῳ household αὐτοῦ, of him, ποιῶν doing ἐλεημοσύνας gifts of mercy πολλὰς many τῷ to the λαῷ people καὶ and δεόμενος supplicating τοῦ of the θεοῦ God διὰ through παντός, all [time], 3 εἶδεν he saw ἐν in ὁράματι vision φανερῶς manifestly ὡσεὶ as if περὶ about ὥραν hour ἐνάτην ninth τῆς of the ἡμέρας day ἄγγελον angel τοῦ of the θεοῦ God εἰσελθόντα having come in πρὸς toward αὐτὸν him καὶ and εἰπόντα having said αὐτῷ to him Κορνήλιε. Cornelius. 4 ὁ The (one) δὲ but ἀτενίσας having gazed αὐτῷ to him καὶ and ἔμφοβος in fear γενόμενος having become εἶπεν he said Τί What ἐστιν, is it, κύριε; Lord? εἶπεν He said δὲ but αὐτῷ to him Αἱ The προσευχαί prayers σου of you καὶ and αἱ the ἐλεημοσύναι gifts of mercy σου of you ἀνέβησαν went up εἰς into μνημόσυνον remembrance ἔμπροσθεν from-in-toward τοῦ of the θεοῦ· God; 5 καὶ and νῦν now πέμψον send ἄνδρας male persons εἰς into Ἰόππην Joppa καὶ and μετάπεμψαι send across Σίμωνά Simon τινα some ὃς who ἐπικαλεῖται is being surnamed Πέτρος· Peter; 6 οὗτος this (one) ξενίζεται is being treated as stranger παρά beside τινι some Σίμωνι Simon βυρσεῖ, tanner, ᾧ to whom ἐστὶν is οἰκία house παρὰ beside θάλασσαν. sea. 7 ὡς As δὲ but ἀπῆλθεν went away ὁ the ἄγγελος angel ὁ the (one) λαλῶν speaking αὐτῷ, to him, φωνήσας having sounded for δύο two τῶν of the οἰκετῶν house servants καὶ and στρατιώτην soldier εὐσεβῆ well-reverential τῶν of the (ones) προσκαρτερούντων persevering αὐτῷ to him 8 καὶ and ἐξηγησάμενος having explained ἅπαντα all (things) αὐτοῖς to them ἀπέστειλεν he sent away αὐτοὺς them εἰς into τὴν the Ἰόππην. Joppa.

9 Τῇ To the δὲ but ἐπαύριον morrow ὁδοιπορούντων journeying ἐκείνων of those (ones) καὶ and τῇ to the πόλει city ἐγγιζόντων nearing ἀνέβη went up Πέτρος Peter ἐπὶ upon τὸ the δῶμα housetop προσεύξασθαι to pray περὶ about ὥραν hour ἕκτην. sixth. 10 ἐγένετο He became δὲ but πρόσπεινος very hungry καὶ and ἤθελεν he was willing γεύσασθαι· to taste; παρασκευαζόντων preparing δὲ but αὐτῶν of them ἐγένετο occurred ἐπ’ upon αὐτὸν him ἔκστασις, ecstasy, 11 καὶ and θεωρεῖ he is beholding τὸν the οὐρανὸν heaven ἀνεῳγμένον having been opened up καὶ and καταβαῖνον coming down σκεῦός vessel τι some ὡς as ὀθόνην linen piece μεγάλην great τέσσαρσιν to four ἀρχαῖς starts καθιέμενον being let down ἐπὶ upon τῆς the γῆς, earth, 12 ἐν in ᾧ which ὑπῆρχεν was πάντα all τὰ the τετράποδα four-footed (things) καὶ and ἑρπετὰ creeping (things) τῆς of the γῆς earth καὶ and πετεινὰ birds τοῦ of the οὐρανοῦ. heaven. 13 καὶ And ἐγένετο occurred φωνὴ voice πρὸς toward αὐτόν him ᾿Αναστάς, Having stood up, Πέτρε, Peter, θῦσον sacrifice καὶ and φάγε. eat. 14 ὁ The δὲ but Πέτρος Peter εἶπεν said Μηδαμῶς, By no means, κύριε, Lord, ὅτι because οὐδέποτε never ἔφαγον I ate πᾶν everything κοινὸν common καὶ and ἀκάθαρτον. unclean. 15 καὶ And φωνὴ voice πάλιν again ἐκ out of δευτέρου second [time] πρὸς toward αὐτὸν him Ἃ What (things) ὁ the θεὸς God ἐκαθάρισεν cleansed σὺ you μὴ not κοίνου. be you making common. 16 τοῦτο This δὲ but ἐγένετο occurred ἐπὶ upon τρίς, three times, καὶ and εὐθὺς immediately ἀνελήμφθη was taken up τὸ the σκεῦος vessel εἰς into τὸν the οὐρανόν. heaven.

17 Ὡς As δὲ but ἐν in ἑαυτῷ himself διηπόρει was being thoroughly perplexed ὁ the Πέτρος Peter τί what ἂν likely εἴη would be τὸ the ὅραμα vision ὃ which εἶδεν, he saw, ἰδοὺ look! οἱ the ἄνδρες male persons οἱ the (ones) ἀπεσταλμένοι having been sent off ὑπὸ by τοῦ the Κορνηλίου Cornelius διερωτήσαντες having thoroughly questioned about τὴν the οἰκίαν house τοῦ of the Σίμωνος Simon ἐπέστησαν stood ἐπὶ upon τὸν the πυλῶνα, gate, 18 καὶ and φωνήσαντες having sounded ἐπύθοντο they inquired εἰ if Σίμων Simon ὁ the (one) ἐπικαλούμενος being surnamed Πέτρος Peter ἐνθάδε there ξενίζεται. is being treated as stranger. 19 Τοῦ Of the δὲ but Πέτρου Peter διενθυμουμένου going through in mind περὶ about τοῦ the ὁράματος vision εἶπεν said τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit Ἰδοὺ Look! ἄνδρες Male persons δύο two ζητοῦντές seeking σε· you; 20 ἀλλὰ but ἀναστὰς having stood up κατάβηθι step you down καὶ and πορεύου be going σὺν together with αὐτοῖς them μηδὲν nothing διακρινόμενος, doubting, ὅτι because ἐγὼ I ἀπέσταλκα have sent off αὐτούς. them. 21 καταβὰς Having stepped down δὲ but Πέτρος Peter πρὸς toward τοὺς the ἄνδρας male persons εἶπεν said Ἰδοὺ Look! ἐγώ I εἰμι am ὃν whom ζητεῖτε· YOU are seeking; τίς what ἡ the αἰτία cause δι’ through ἣν which πάρεστε; YOU are alongside? 22 οἱ The (ones) δὲ but εἶπαν said Κορνήλιος Cornelius ἑκατοντάρχης, centurion, ἀνὴρ male person δίκαιος righteous καὶ and φοβούμενος fearing τὸν the θεὸν God μαρτυρούμενός being witnessed about τε and ὑπὸ by ὅλου whole τοῦ the ἔθνους nation τῶν of the Ἰουδαίων, Jews, ἐχρηματίσθη was divinely instructed ὑπὸ by ἀγγέλου angel ἁγίου holy μεταπέμψασθαί to send across σε you εἰς into τὸν the οἶκον house αὐτοῦ of him καὶ and ἀκοῦσαι to hear ῥήματα sayings παρὰ beside σοῦ. of you. 23 εἰσκαλεσάμενος Having called in οὖν therefore αὐτοὺς them ἐξένισεν. he treated as strangers.

Τῇ To the δὲ but ἐπαύριον morrow ἀναστὰς having stood up ἐξῆλθεν he went out σὺν together with αὐτοῖς, them, καί and τινες some τῶν of the ἀδελφῶν brothers τῶν of the (ones) ἀπὸ from Ἰόππης Joppa συνῆλθαν went with αὐτῷ. him. 24 τῇ To the δὲ but ἐπαύριον morrow εἰσῆλθεν he entered εἰς into τὴν the Καισαρίαν· Caesarea; ὁ the δὲ but Κορνήλιος Cornelius ἦν was προσδοκῶν expecting αὐτοὺς them συνκαλεσάμενος having called together τοὺς the συγγενεῖς relatives αὐτοῦ of him καὶ and τοὺς the ἀναγκαίους necessary φίλους. friends. 25 Ὡς As δὲ but ἐγένετο occurred τοῦ of the εἰσελθεῖν to enter τὸν the Πέτρον, Peter, συναντήσας having met αὐτῷ to him ὁ the Κορνήλιος Cornelius πεσὼν having fallen ἐπὶ upon τοὺς the πόδας feet προσεκύνησεν. did obeisance. 26 ὁ The δὲ but Πέτρος Peter ἤγειρεν raised up αὐτὸν him λέγων saying ᾿Ανάστηθι· Stand up; καὶ and ἐγὼ I αὐτὸς very (one) ἄνθρωπός man εἰμι. I am. 27 καὶ And συνομιλῶν conversing with αὐτῷ him εἰσῆλθεν, he entered, καὶ and εὑρίσκει he is finding συνεληλυθότας having come together πολλούς, many, 28 ἔφη said τε and πρὸς toward αὐτούς them Ὑμεῖς YOU ἐπίστασθε are well knowing ὡς as ἀθέμιτόν unlawful ἐστιν it is ἀνδρὶ to male person Ἰουδαίῳ Jew κολλᾶσθαι to glue himself ἢ or προσέρχεσθαι to be coming toward ἀλλοφύλῳ· one of another tribe; κἀμοὶ and to me ὁ the θεὸς God ἔδειξεν showed μηδένα no one κοινὸν common ἢ or ἀκάθαρτον unclean λέγειν to be saying ἄνθρωπον· man; 29 διὸ wherefore καὶ and ἀναντιρήτως without contradiction ἦλθον I came μεταπεμφθείς. having been sent across. πυνθάνομαι I am inquiring οὖν therefore τίνι to what λόγῳ word μετεπέμψασθέ YOU sent across με. me.

30 Καὶ And ὁ the Κορνήλιος Cornelius ἔφη said ᾿Απὸ From τετάρτης fourth ἡμέρας day μέχρι until ταύτης this τῆς the ὥρας hour ἤμην I was τὴν the ἐνάτην ninth [hour] προσευχόμενος praying ἐν in τῷ the οἴκῳ house μου, of me, καὶ and ἰδοὺ look! ἀνὴρ male person ἔστη stood ἐνώπιόν in sight μου of me ἐν in ἐσθῆτι raiment λαμπρᾷ bright 31 καί and φησι he is saying Κορνήλιε, Cornelius, εἰσηκούσθη was heard within σου of you ἡ the προσευχὴ prayer καὶ and αἱ the ἐλεημοσύναι gifts of mercy σου of you ἐμνήσθησαν were remembered ἐνώπιον in sight τοῦ of the θεοῦ· God; 32 πέμψον send οὖν therefore εἰς into Ἰόππην Joppa καὶ and μετακάλεσαι call across Σίμωνα Simon ὃς who ἐπικαλεῖται is being surnamed Πέτρος· Peter; οὗτος this (one) ξενίζεται is treated as stranger ἐν in οἰκίᾳ house Σίμωνος of Simon βυρσέως tanner παρὰ beside θάλασσαν. sea. 33 ἐξαυτῆς At once οὖν therefore ἔπεμψα I sent πρὸς toward σέ, you, σύ you τε and καλῶς finely ἐποίησας did παραγενόμενος. having come to be alongside. νῦν Now οὖν therefore πάντες all ἡμεῖς we ἐνώπιον in sight τοῦ of the θεοῦ God πάρεσμεν are alongside ἀκοῦσαι to hear πάντα all τὰ the (things) προστεταγμένα having been commanded σοι to you ὑπὸ by τοῦ the κυρίου. Lord.

34 ἀνοίξας Having opened up δὲ but Πέτρος Peter τὸ the στόμα mouth εἶπεν said ᾿Επ’ Upon ἀληθείας truth καταλαμβάνομαι I am receiving down ὅτι that οὐκ not ἔστιν is προσωπολήμπτης taker of faces ὁ the θεός, God, 35 ἀλλ’ but ἐν in παντὶ every ἔθνει nation ὁ the (one) φοβούμενος fearing αὐτὸν him καὶ and ἐργαζόμενος working δικαιοσύνην righteousness δεκτὸς acceptable αὐτῷ to him ἐστίν. is. 36 τὸν The λόγον word ἀπέστειλεν he sent forth τοῖς to the υἱοῖς sons Ἰσραὴλ of Israel εὐαγγελιζόμενος declaring as good news εἰρήνην peace διὰ through Ἰησοῦ Jesus Χριστοῦ· Christ; οὗτός this ἐστιν is πάντων of all (them) κύριος. Lord. 37 ὑμεῖς YOU οἴδατε have known τὸ the γενόμενον having occurred ῥῆμα saying καθ’ down ὅλης whole τῆς the Ἰουδαίας, Judea, ἀρξάμενος (he) having started ἀπὸ from τῆς the Γαλιλαίας Galilee μετὰ after τὸ the βάπτισμα baptism ὃ which ἐκήρυξεν preached Ἰωάνης, John, 38 Ἰησοῦν Jesus τὸν the (one) ἀπὸ from Ναζαρέθ, Nazareth, ὡς as ἔχρισεν anointed αὐτὸν him ὁ the θεὸς God πνεύματι to spirit ἁγίῳ holy καὶ and δυνάμει, to power, ὃς who διῆλθεν went through εὐεργετῶν working well καὶ and ἰώμενος healing πάντας all τοὺς the (ones) καταδυναστευομένους being ruled down ὑπὸ by τοῦ the διαβόλου, Devil, ὅτι because ὁ the θεὸς God ἦν was μετ’ with αὐτοῦ. him. 39 καὶ And ἡμεῖς we μάρτυρες witnesses πάντων of all (things) ὧν of which ἐποίησεν he did ἔν in τε and τῇ the χώρᾳ country τῶν of the Ἰουδαίων Jews καὶ and Ἰερουσαλήμ· Jerusalem; ὃν whom καὶ also ἀνεῖλαν they took up κρεμάσαντες having hung ἐπὶ upon ξύλου. wood. 40 τοῦτον This (one) ὁ the θεὸς God ἤγειρεν raised up τῇ to the τρίτῃ third ἡμέρᾳ day καὶ and ἔδωκεν he gave αὐτὸν him ἐμφανῆ manifest γενέσθαι, to become, 41 οὐ not παντὶ to all τῷ the λαῷ people ἀλλὰ but μάρτυσι to witnesses τοῖς the (ones) προκεχειροτονημένοις having been previously appointed [by extended hand] ὑπὸ by τοῦ the θεοῦ, God, ἡμῖν, to us, οἵτινες who συνεφάγομεν ate together καὶ and συνεπίομεν we drank with αὐτῷ him μετὰ after τὸ the ἀναστῆναι to stand up αὐτὸν him ἐκ out of νεκρῶν· dead (ones); 42 καὶ and παρήγγειλεν he ordered ἡμῖν to us κηρύξαι to preach τῷ to the λαῷ people καὶ and διαμαρτύρασθαι to bear thorough witness ὅτι that οὗτός this ἐστιν is ὁ the (one) ὡρισμένος having been defined ὑπὸ by τοῦ the θεοῦ God κριτὴς judge ζώντων of living (ones) καὶ and νεκρῶν. dead (ones). 43 τούτῳ To this one πάντες all οἱ the προφῆται prophets μαρτυροῦσιν, are bearing witness, ἄφεσιν letting go off ἁμαρτιῶν of sins λαβεῖν to receive διὰ through τοῦ the ὀνόματος name αὐτοῦ of him πάντα everyone τὸν the πιστεύοντα believing εἰς into αὐτόν. him.

44 Ἔτι Yet λαλοῦντος speaking τοῦ of the Πέτρου Peter τὰ the ῥήματα sayings ταῦτα these ἐπέπεσε fell upon τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit τὸ the ἅγιον holy ἐπὶ upon πάντας all τοὺς the (ones) ἀκούοντας hearing τὸν the λόγον. word. 45 καὶ And ἐξέστησαν were amazed οἱ the (ones) ἐκ out of περιτομῆς circumcision πιστοὶ faithful οἳ who συνῆλθαν came with τῷ the Πέτρῳ, Peter, ὅτι because καὶ also ἐπὶ upon τὰ the ἔθνη nations ἡ the δωρεὰ free gift τοῦ of the πνεύματος spirit τοῦ the ἁγίου holy ἐκκέχυται· has been poured out; 46 ἤκουον they were hearing γὰρ for αὐτῶν of them λαλούντων speaking γλώσσαις to tongues καὶ and μεγαλυνόντων magnifying τὸν the θεόν. God. τότε Then ἀπεκρίθη answered Πέτρος Peter 47 Μήτι Not what τὸ the ὕδωρ water δύναται is able κωλῦσαί to forbid τις anyone τοῦ of the μὴ not βαπτισθῆναι to be baptized τούτους these οἵτινες who τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit τὸ the ἅγιον holy ἔλαβον received ὡς as καὶ also ἡμεῖς; we? 48 προσέταξεν He commanded δὲ but αὐτοὺς them ἐν in τῷ the ὀνόματι name Ἰησοῦ of Jesus Χριστοῦ Christ βαπτισθῆναι. to be baptized. τότε Then ἠρώτησαν they requested αὐτὸν him ἐπιμεῖναι to remain upon ἡμέρας days τινάς. some.

11 Ἤκουσαν Heard δὲ but οἱ the ἀπόστολοι apostles καὶ and οἱ the ἀδελφοὶ brothers οἱ the (ones) ὄντες being κατὰ down τὴν the Ἰουδαίαν Judea ὅτι that καὶ also τὰ the ἔθνη nations ἐδέξαντο accepted τὸν the λόγον word τοῦ of the θεοῦ. God. 2 Ὅτε When δὲ but ἀνέβη went up Πέτρος Peter εἰς into Ἰερουσαλήμ, Jerusalem, διεκρίνοντο were contending πρὸς toward αὐτὸν him οἱ the (ones) ἐκ out of περιτομῆς circumcision 3 λέγοντες saying ὅτι that εἰσῆλθεν he went in πρὸς toward ἄνδρας male persons ἀκροβυστίαν uncircumcision ἔχοντας having καὶ and συνέφαγεν he ate with αὐτοῖς. them. 4 ἀρξάμενος Having started δὲ but Πέτρος Peter ἐξετίθετο was setting out αὐτοῖς to them καθεξῆς according to order λέγων saying

5 ᾿Εγὼ I ἤμην was ἐν in πόλει city Ἰόππῃ Joppa προσευχόμενος praying καὶ and εἶδον I saw ἐν in ἐκστάσει ecstasy ὅραμα, vision, καταβαῖνον coming down σκεῦός vessel τι some ὡς as ὀθόνην linen piece μεγάλην great τέσσαρσιν to four ἀρχαῖς starts καθιεμένην being let down ἐκ out of τοῦ the οὐρανοῦ, heaven, καὶ and ἦλθεν came ἄχρι until ἐμοῦ· me; 6 εἰς into ἣν which ἀτενίσας having gazed κατενόουν I was minding down καὶ and εἶδον I saw τὰ the τετράποδα four-footed (things) τῆς of the γῆς earth καὶ and τὰ the θηρία wild beasts καὶ and τὰ the ἑρπετὰ creeping things καὶ and τὰ the πετεινὰ birds τοῦ of the οὐρανοῦ· heaven; 7 ἤκουσα I heard δὲ but καὶ also φωνῆς of voice λεγούσης saying μοι to me ᾿Αναστάς, Having stood up, Πέτρε, Peter, θῦσον sacrifice καὶ and φάγε. eat. 8 εἶπον I said δέ but Μηδαμῶς, By no means, κύριε, Lord, ὅτι because κοινὸν common ἢ or ἀκάθαρτον unclean οὐδέποτε never εἰσῆλθεν entered εἰς into τὸ the στόμα mouth μου. of me. 9 ἀπεκρίθη Answered δὲ but ἐκ out of δευτέρου second [time] φωνὴ voice ἐκ out of τοῦ the οὐρανοῦ heaven Ἃ What (things) ὁ the θεὸς God ἐκαθάρισεν cleansed σὺ you μὴ not κοίνου. be you making common. 10 τοῦτο This δὲ but ἐγένετο occurred ἐπὶ upon τρίς, three times, καὶ and ἀνεσπάσθη was drawn up πάλιν again ἅπαντα all (things) εἰς into τὸν the οὐρανόν. heaven. 11 καὶ And ἰδοὺ look! ἐξαυτῆς out of that [hour] τρεῖς three ἄνδρες male persons ἐπέστησαν stood ἐπὶ upon τὴν the οἰκίαν house ἐν in ᾗ which ἦμεν, we were, ἀπεσταλμένοι having been sent forth ἀπὸ from Καισαρίας Caesarea πρός toward με. me. 12 εἶπεν Said δὲ but τὸ the πνεῦμά spirit μοι to me συνελθεῖν to go with αὐτοῖς them μηδὲν nothing διακρίναντα. having doubted. ἦλθον Came δὲ but σὺν together with ἐμοὶ me καὶ also οἱ the ἕξ six ἀδελφοὶ brothers οὗτοι, these, καὶ and εἰσήλθομεν we entered εἰς into τὸν the οἶκον house τοῦ of the ἀνδρός. male person.

13 ᾿Απήγγειλεν He reported back δὲ but ἡμῖν to us πῶς how εἶδεν he saw τὸν the ἄγγελον angel ἐν in τῷ the οἴκῳ house αὐτοῦ of him σταθέντα having stood καὶ and εἰπόντα having said ᾿Απόστειλον Send you forth εἰς into Ἰόππην Joppa καὶ and μετάπεμψαι send across Σίμωνα Simon τὸν the (one) ἐπικαλούμενον being surnamed Πέτρον, Peter, 14 ὃς who λαλήσει will speak ῥήματα sayings πρὸς toward σὲ you ἐν in οἷς which σωθήσῃ will be saved σὺ you καὶ and πᾶς all ὁ the οἶκός house σου. of you. 15 ἐν In δὲ but τῷ to the ἄρξασθαί to start με me λαλεῖν to be speaking ἐπέπεσεν fell upon τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit τὸ the ἅγιον holy ἐπ’ upon αὐτοὺς them ὥσπερ as-even καὶ also ἐφ’ upon ἡμᾶς us ἐν in ἀρχῇ. beginning. 16 ἐμνήσθην I remembered δὲ but τοῦ of the ῥήματος saying τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord ὡς as ἔλεγεν he was saying Ἰωάνης John μὲν indeed ἐβάπτισεν baptized ὕδατι to water ὑμεῖς YOU δὲ but βαπτισθήσεσθε will be baptized ἐν in πνεύματι spirit ἁγίῳ. holy. 17 εἰ If οὖν therefore τὴν the ἴσην equal δωρεὰν free gift ἔδωκεν gave αὐτοῖς to them ὁ the θεὸς God ὡς as καὶ also ἡμῖν to us πιστεύσασιν having believed ἐπὶ upon τὸν the κύριον Lord Ἰησοῦν Jesus Χριστόν, Christ, ἐγὼ I τίς who ἤμην was I δυνατὸς powerful κωλῦσαι to hinder τὸν the θεόν; God?

18 ᾿Ακούσαντες Having heard δὲ but ταῦτα these (things) ἡσύχασαν they got quiet καὶ and ἐδόξασαν they glorified τὸν the θεὸν God λέγοντες saying Ἄρα Really καὶ also τοῖς to the ἔθνεσιν nations ὁ the θεὸς God τὴν the μετάνοιαν repentance εἰς into ζωὴν life ἔδωκεν. gave.

19 Οἱ The (ones) μὲν indeed οὖν therefore διασπαρέντες having been dispersed ἀπὸ from τῆς the θλίψεως tribulation τῆς the (one) γενομένης having occurred ἐπὶ upon Στεφάνῳ Stephen διῆλθον they went through ἕως until Φοινίκης Phoenicia καὶ and Κύπρου of Cyprus καὶ and ᾿Αντιοχείας, of Antioch, μηδενὶ to no one λαλοῦντες speaking τὸν the λόγον word εἰ if μὴ not μόνον only Ἰουδαίοις. to Jews. 20 ῏Ησαν Were δέ but τινες some ἐξ out of αὐτῶν them ἄνδρες male persons Κύπριοι Cyprians καὶ and Κυρηναῖοι, Cyrenians, οἵτινες who ἐλθόντες having come εἰς into ᾿Αντιόχειαν Antioch ἐλάλουν were speaking καὶ also πρὸς toward τοὺς the Ἑλληνιστάς, Hellenists, εὐαγγελιζόμενοι declaring as good news τὸν the κύριον Lord Ἰησοῦν. Jesus. 21 καὶ And ἦν was χεὶρ hand Κυρίου of Lord μετ’ with αὐτῶν, them, πολύς much τε and ἀριθμὸς number ὁ the πιστεύσας having believed ἐπέστρεψεν turned ἐπὶ upon τὸν the κύριον. Lord.

22 Ἠκούσθη Was heard δὲ but ὁ the λόγος word εἰς into τὰ the ὦτα ears τῆς of the ἐκκλησίας ecclesia τῆς the (one) οὔσης being ἐν in Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem περὶ about αὐτῶν, them, καὶ and ἐξαπέστειλαν they sent off out Βαρνάβαν Barnabas ἕως until ᾿Αντιοχείας· Antioch; 23 ὃς who παραγενόμενος having come to be alongside καὶ and ἰδὼν having seen τὴν the χάριν undeserved kindness τὴν the (one) τοῦ of the θεοῦ God ἐχάρη he rejoiced καὶ and παρεκάλει he was encouraging πάντας all (them) τῇ to the προθέσει purpose τῆς of the καρδίας heart προσμένειν to be remaining toward ἐν in τῷ the κυρίῳ, Lord, 24 ὅτι because ἦν he was ἀνὴρ male person ἀγαθὸς good καὶ and πλήρης full πνεύματος of spirit ἁγίου holy καὶ and πίστεως. of faith. καὶ And προσετέθη was added ὄχλος crowd ἱκανὸς sufficient τῷ to the κυρίῳ. Lord. 25 ἐξῆλθεν He went out δὲ but εἰς into Ταρσὸν Tarsus ἀναζητῆσαι to seek up Σαῦλον, Saul, 26 καὶ and εὑρὼν having found ἤγαγεν he led εἰς into ᾿Αντιόχειαν. Antioch. ἐγένετο It occurred δὲ but αὐτοῖς to them καὶ and ἐνιαυτὸν year ὅλον whole συναχθῆναι to be led together ἐν in τῇ the ἐκκλησίᾳ ecclesia καὶ and διδάξαι to teach ὄχλον crowd ἱκανόν, sufficient, χρηματίσαι to style divinely τε and πρώτως firstly ἐν in ᾿Αντιοχείᾳ Antioch τοὺς the μαθητὰς disciples Χριστιανούς. Christians.

27 ᾿Εν In ταύταις these δὲ but ταῖς the ἡμέραις days κατῆλθον they came down ἀπὸ from Ἰεροσολύμων Jerusalem προφῆται prophets εἰς into ᾿Αντιόχειαν· Antioch; 28 ἀναστὰς having stood up δὲ but εἷς one ἐξ out of αὐτῶν them ὀνόματι to name Ἄγαβος Agabus ἐσήμαινεν was signifying διὰ through τοῦ the πνεύματος spirit λιμὸν famine μεγάλην great μέλλειν to be about ἔσεσθαι to go to be ἐφ’ upon ὅλην whole τὴν the οἰκουμένην· being inhabited [earth]; ἥτις which ἐγένετο occurred ἐπὶ upon Κλαυδίου. Claudius. 29 τῶν Of the δὲ but μαθητῶν disciples καθὼς according as εὐπορεῖτό was getting through well τις anyone ὥρισαν they determined ἕκαστος each αὐτῶν of them εἰς into διακονίαν service πέμψαι to send τοῖς to the (ones) κατοικοῦσιν inhabiting ἐν in τῇ the Ἰουδαίᾳ Judea ἀδελφοῖς· to brothers; 30 ὃ which καὶ also ἐποίησαν they did ἀποστείλαντες having sent off πρὸς toward τοὺς the πρεσβυτέρους older men διὰ through χειρὸς hand Βαρνάβα of Barnabas καὶ and Σαύλου. Saul.

12 Κατ’ Down ἐκεῖνον that δὲ but τὸν the καιρὸν appointed time ἐπέβαλεν thrust upon Ἡρῴδης Herod ὁ the βασιλεὺς king τὰς the χεῖρας hands κακῶσαί to treat badly τινας some τῶν of the ἀπὸ from τῆς the ἐκκλησίας. ecclesia. 2 ἀνεῖλεν He took up δὲ but Ἰάκωβον James τὸν the ἀδελφὸν brother Ἰωάνου of John μαχαίρῃ. to sword. 3 ἰδὼν Having seen δὲ but ὅτι that ἀρεστόν pleasing ἐστιν it is τοῖς to the Ἰουδαίοις Jews προσέθετο he added συλλαβεῖν to take with καὶ also Πέτρον, Peter, ἦσαν were δὲ but ἡμέραι days τῶν of the ἀζύμων, unleavened (cakes), 4 ὃν whom καὶ also πιάσας having laid hold of ἔθετο he put εἰς into φυλακήν, prison, παραδοὺς having given beside τέσσαρσιν to four τετραδίοις sets of four στρατιωτῶν of soldiers φυλάσσειν to be guarding αὐτόν, him, βουλόμενος wishing μετὰ after τὸ the πάσχα passover ἀναγαγεῖν to lead up αὐτὸν him τῷ to the λαῷ. people. 5 ὁ The μὲν indeed οὖν therefore Πέτρος Peter ἐτηρεῖτο was being observed ἐν in τῇ the φυλακῇ· prison; προσευχὴ prayer δὲ but ἦν was ἐκτενῶς intensely γινομένη occurring ὑπὸ by τῆς the ἐκκλησίας ecclesia πρὸς toward τὸν the θεὸν God περὶ about αὐτοῦ. him.

6 Ὅτε When δὲ but ἤμελλεν he was being about προσαγαγεῖν to lead forth αὐτὸν him ὁ the Ἡρῴδης, Herod, τῇ to the νυκτὶ night ἐκείνῃ that ἦν was ὁ the Πέτρος Peter κοιμώμενος sleeping μεταξὺ between δύο two στρατιωτῶν soldiers δεδεμένος having been bound ἁλύσεσιν to chains δυσίν, two, φύλακές guards τε and πρὸ before τῆς the θύρας door ἐτήρουν were observing τὴν the φυλακήν. prison. 7 καὶ And ἰδοὺ look! ἄγγελος angel Κυρίου of Lord ἐπέστη, stood upon, καὶ and φῶς light ἔλαμψεν shone ἐν in τῷ the οἰκήματι· dwelling; πατάξας having smitten δὲ but τὴν the πλευρὰν side τοῦ of the Πέτρου Peter ἤγειρεν he raised up αὐτὸν him λέγων saying ᾿Ανάστα Stand up ἐν in τάχει· haste; καὶ and ἐξέπεσαν fell out αὐτοῦ of him αἱ the ἁλύσεις chains ἐκ out of τῶν the χειρῶν. hands. 8 εἶπεν Said δὲ but ὁ the ἄγγελος angel πρὸς toward αὐτόν him Ζῶσαι Gird καὶ and ὑπόδησαι bind under τὰ the σανδάλιά sandals σου· of you; ἐποίησεν he did δὲ but οὕτως. thus. καὶ And λέγει is saying αὐτῷ to him Περιβαλοῦ Throw around τὸ the ἱμάτιόν outer garment σου of you καὶ and ἀκολούθει be following, μοι· to me; 9 καὶ and ἐξελθὼν having gone out ἠκολούθει, he was following, καὶ and οὐκ not ᾔδει he had known ὅτι that ἀληθές true ἐστιν is τὸ the (thing) γινόμενον occurring διὰ through τοῦ the ἀγγέλου, angel, ἐδόκει he was thinking δὲ but ὅραμα vision βλέπειν. to be seeing. 10 διελθόντες Having gone through δὲ but πρώτην first φυλακὴν guard καὶ and δευτέραν second ἦλθαν they came ἐπὶ upon τὴν the πύλην gate τὴν the σιδηρᾶν iron τὴν the φέρουσαν bearing εἰς into τὴν the πόλιν, city, ἥτις which αὐτομάτη self-acting ἠνοίγη was opened up αὐτοῖς, to them, καὶ and ἐξελθόντες having gone out προῆλθον they went forth ῥύμην street μίαν, one, καὶ and εὐθέως immediately ἀπέστη stood off from ὁ the ἄγγελος angel ἀπ’ from αὐτοῦ. him. 11 καὶ And ὁ the Πέτρος Peter ἐν in ἑαυτῷ himself γενόμενος having come to be εἶπεν he said Νῦν Now οἶδα I have known ἀληθῶς truly ὅτι that ἐξαπέστειλεν sent off out ὁ the κύριος Lord τὸν the ἄγγελον angel αὐτοῦ of him καὶ and ἐξείλατό took out με me ἐκ out of χειρὸς hand Ἡρῴδου of Herod καὶ and πάσης of all τῆς the προσδοκίας expectation τοῦ of the λαοῦ people τῶν of the Ἰουδαίων. Jews.

12 Συνιδών Having seen together τε and ἦλθεν he came ἐπὶ upon τὴν the οἰκίαν house τῆς of the Μαρίας Mary τῆς the μητρὸς mother Ἰωάνου of John τοῦ the (one) ἐπικαλουμένου being surnamed Μάρκου, Mark, οὗ where ἦσαν were ἱκανοὶ sufficient συνηθροισμένοι having been crowded together καὶ and προσευχόμενοι. praying. 13 κρούσαντος Having knocked δὲ but αὐτοῦ of him τὴν the θύραν door τοῦ of the πυλῶνος gateway προσῆλθε came toward παιδίσκη servant girl ὑπακοῦσαι to obey ὀνόματι to name Ῥόδη, Rhoda, 14 καὶ and ἐπιγνοῦσα having recognized τὴν the φωνὴν voice τοῦ of the Πέτρου Peter ἀπὸ from τῆς the χαρᾶς joy οὐκ not ἤνοιξεν she opened up τὸν the πυλῶνα, gateway, εἰσδραμοῦσα having run in δὲ but ἀπήγγειλεν she reported back ἑστάναι to stand τὸν the Πέτρον Peter πρὸ before τοῦ the πυλῶνος. gateway. 15 οἱ The (ones) δὲ but πρὸς toward αὐτὴν her εἶπαν said Μαίνῃ. YOU are mad. ἡ The (one) δὲ but διισχυρίζετο was strongly asserting οὕτως thus ἔχειν. to be having. οἱ The (ones) δὲ but ἔλεγον were saying Ὁ The ἄγγελός angel ἐστιν is αὐτοῦ. of him. 16 ὁ The δὲ but Πέτρος Peter ἐπέμενεν was remaining upon κρούων· knocking; ἀνοίξαντες having opened up δὲ but εἶδαν they saw αὐτὸν him καὶ and ἐξέστησαν. were astonished. 17 κατασείσας Having moved downward δὲ but αὐτοῖς to them τῇ to the χειρὶ hand σιγᾷν to be silent διηγήσατο he thoroughly related αὐτοῖς to them πῶς how ὁ the κύριος Lord αὐτὸν him ἐξήγαγεν led forth ἐκ out of τῆς the φυλακῆς, prison, εἶπέν he said τε and ᾿Απαγγείλατε Report YOU back Ἰακώβῳ to James καὶ and τοῖς to the ἀδελφοῖς brothers ταῦτα. these (things). καὶ And ἐξελθὼν having gone out ἐπορεύθη he went εἰς into ἕτερον different τόπον. place.

18 Γενομένης Having come to be δὲ but ἡμέρας of day ἦν was τάραχος stir οὐκ not ὀλίγος little ἐν in τοῖς the στρατιώταις, soldiers, τί what ἄρα really ὁ the Πέτρος Peter ἐγένετο. came to be. 19 Ἡρῴδης Herod δὲ but ἐπιζητήσας having sought upon αὐτὸν him καὶ and μὴ not εὑρὼν having found ἀνακρίνας having examined τοὺς the φύλακας guards ἐκέλευσεν he commanded ἀπαχθῆναι, to be led off, καὶ and κατελθὼν having come down ἀπὸ from τῆς the Ἰουδαίας Judea εἰς into Καισαρίαν Caesarea διέτριβεν. he was spending [time] through.

20 ῏Ην He was δὲ but θυμομαχῶν mentally fighting Τυρίοις to Tyrians καὶ and Σιδωνίοις· to Sidonians; ὁμοθυμαδὸν like-mindedly δὲ but παρῆσαν they were alongside πρὸς toward αὐτόν, him, καὶ and πείσαντες having persuaded Βλάστον Blastus τὸν the (one) ἐπὶ upon τοῦ the κοιτῶνος bedchamber τοῦ of the βασιλέως king ᾐτοῦντο they were asking εἰρήνην peace διὰ through τὸ the τρέφεσθαι to be getting fed αὐτῶν of them τὴν the χώραν country ἀπὸ from τῆς the βασιλικῆς. kingly [country]. 21 τακτῇ To ordered δὲ but ἡμέρᾳ day ὁ the Ἡρῴδης Herod ἐνδυσάμενος having clothed himself ἐσθῆτα raiment βασιλικὴν kingly καθίσας having sat down ἐπὶ upon τοῦ the βήματος step ἐδημηγόρει he was publicly orating πρὸς toward αὐτούς· them; 22 ὁ the δὲ but δῆμος public ἐπεφώνει was sounding upon Θεοῦ Of God φωνὴ voice καὶ and οὐκ not ἀνθρώπου. of man. 23 παραχρῆμα Instantly δὲ but ἐπάταξεν smote αὐτὸν him ἄγγελος angel Κυρίου of Lord ἀνθ’ instead of ὧν which (things) οὐκ not ἔδωκεν he gave τὴν the δόξαν glory τῷ to the θεῷ, God, καὶ and γενόμενος having become σκωληκόβρωτος eaten up by worms ἐξέψυξεν. he let out soul.

24 Ὁ The δὲ but λόγος word τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord ηὔξανεν was growing καὶ and ἐπληθύνετο. was being multiplied.

25 Βαρνάβας Barnabas δὲ but καὶ and Σαῦλος Saul ὑπέστρεψαν returned εἰς into Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem πληρώσαντες having fulfilled τὴν the διακονίαν, service, συνπαραλαβόντες having taken along together Ἰωάνην John τὸν the (one) ἐπικληθέντα having been surnamed Μάρκον. Mark.

13 ῏Ησαν Were δὲ but ἐν in ᾿Αντιοχείᾳ Antioch κατὰ down τὴν the οὖσαν being ἐκκλησίαν ecclesia προφῆται prophets καὶ and διδάσκαλοι teachers ὅ the τε and Βαρνάβας Barnabas καὶ and Συμεὼν Symeon ὁ the (one) καλούμενος being called Νίγερ, Niger, καὶ and Λούκιος Lucius ὁ the Κυρηναῖος, Cyrenian, Μαναήν Manaen τε and Ἡρῴδου of Herod τοῦ the τετραάρχου tetrarch σύντροφος one nurtured together καὶ and Σαῦλος. Saul. 2 Λειτουργούντων Doing public work δὲ but αὐτῶν of them τῷ to the κυρίῳ Lord καὶ and νηστευόντων fasting εἶπεν said τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit τὸ the ἅγιον holy ᾿Αφορίσατε Limit off YOU δή actually μοι to me τὸν the Βαρνάβαν Barnabas καὶ and Σαῦλον Saul εἰς into τὸ the ἔργον work ὃ which προσκέκλημαι I have called toward αὐτούς. them. 3 τότε Then νηστεύσαντες having fasted καὶ and προσευξάμενοι having prayed καὶ and ἐπιθέντες having put upon τὰς the χεῖρας hands αὐτοῖς to them ἀπέλυσαν. they released.

4 Αὐτοὶ They μὲν indeed οὖν therefore ἐκπεμφθέντες having been sent out ὑπὸ by τοῦ the ἁγίου holy πνεύματος spirit κατῆλθον they went down εἰς into Σελευκίαν, Seleucia, ἐκεῖθέν from there τε and ἀπέπλευσαν they sailed away εἰς into Κύπρον, Cyprus, 5 καὶ and γενόμενοι having come to be ἐν in Σαλαμῖνι Salamis κατήγγελλον they were publishing τὸν the λόγον word τοῦ of the θεοῦ God ἐν in ταῖς the συναγωγαῖς synagogues τῶν of the Ἰουδαίων· Jews; εἶχον they were having δὲ but καὶ also Ἰωάννην John ὑπηρέτην. subordinate.

6 Διελθόντες Having gone through δὲ but ὅλην whole τὴν the νῆσον island ἄχρι until Πάφου Paphos εὗρον they found ἄνδρα male person τινὰ some μάγον magian ψευδοπροφήτην false prophet Ἰουδαῖον Jew ᾧ to whom ὄνομα name Βαριησοῦς, Bar-Jesus, 7 ὃς who ἦν was σὺν together with τῷ the ἀνθυπάτῳ proconsul Σεργίῳ Sergius Παύλῳ Paulus ἀνδρὶ male person συνετῷ. intelligent. οὗτος This (one) προσκαλεσάμενος having called toward himself Βαρνάβαν Barnabas καὶ and Σαῦλον Saul ἐπεζήτησεν he sought upon ἀκοῦσαι to hear τὸν the λόγον word τοῦ of the θεοῦ· God; 8 ἀνθίστατο was opposing δὲ but αὐτοῖς to them ᾿Ελύμας Elymas ὁ the μάγος, magian, οὕτως thus γὰρ for μεθερμηνεύεται is being translated τὸ the ὄνομα name αὐτοῦ, of him, ζητῶν seeking διαστρέψαι to turn through τὸν the ἀνθύπατον proconsul ἀπὸ from τῆς the πίστεως. faith. 9 Σαῦλος Saul δέ, but, ὁ the καὶ also Παῦλος, Paul, πλησθεὶς having been filled πνεύματος of spirit ἁγίου holy ἀτενίσας having gazed εἰς into αὐτὸν him 10 εἶπεν he said ῏Ω O πλήρης full παντὸς of all δόλου fraud καὶ and πάσης of every ῥᾳδιουργίας, readily done act, υἱὲ son διαβόλου, of devil, ἐχθρὲ enemy πάσης of all δικαιοσύνης, righteousness, οὐ not παύσῃ you will cease διαστρέφων turning through τὰς the ὁδοὺς ways τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord τὰς the εὐθείας; straight? 11 καὶ And νῦν now ἰδοὺ look! χεὶρ hand Κυρίου of Lord ἐπὶ upon σέ, you, καὶ and ἔσῃ you will be τυφλὸς blind μὴ not βλέπων looking at τὸν the ἥλιον sun ἄχρι until καιροῦ. appointed time. παραχρῆμα Instantly δὲ but ἔπεσεν fell ἐπ’ upon αὐτὸν him ἀχλὺς thick mist καὶ and σκότος, darkness, καὶ and περιάγων going around ἐζήτει he was seeking χειραγωγούς. hand leaders. 12 τότε Then ἰδὼν having seen ὁ the ἀνθύπατος proconsul τὸ the (thing) γεγονὸς having occurred ἐπίστευσεν he believed ἐκπληττόμενος being struck out (of his wits) ἐπὶ upon τῇ the διδαχῇ teaching τοῦ of the κυρίου. Lord.

13 ᾿Αναχθέντες Having been led up δὲ but ἀπὸ from τῆς the Πάφου Paphos οἱ the (ones) περὶ about Παῦλον Paul ἦλθον came εἰς into Πέργην Perga τῆς of the Παμφυλίας· Pamphylia; Ἰωάνης John δὲ but ἀποχωρήσας having withdrawn ἀπ’ from αὐτῶν them ὑπέστρεψεν returned εἰς into Ἰεροσόλυμα. Jerusalem. 14 Αὐτοὶ They δὲ but διελθόντες having gone through ἀπὸ from τῆς the Πέργης Perga παρεγένοντο they came to be alongside εἰς into ᾿Αντιόχειαν Antioch τὴν the Πισιδίαν, Pisidian, καὶ and ἐλθόντες having come εἰς into τὴν the συναγωγὴν synagogue τῇ to the ἡμέρᾳ day τῶν of the σαββάτων sabbaths ἐκάθισαν. they sat down. 15 μετὰ After δὲ but τὴν the ἀνάγνωσιν reading τοῦ of the νόμου Law καὶ and τῶν of the προφητῶν Prophets ἀπέστειλαν sent forth οἱ the ἀρχισυνάγωγοι synagogue rulers πρὸς toward αὐτοὺς them λέγοντες saying Ἄνδρες Male persons ἀδελφοί, brothers, εἴ if τις any ἔστιν is ἐν in ὑμῖν YOU λόγος word παρακλήσεως of encouragement πρὸς toward τὸν the λαόν, people, λέγετε. be YOU saying. 16 ἀναστὰς Having stood up δὲ but Παῦλος Paul καὶ and κατασείσας having moved downward τῇ to the χειρὶ hand εἶπεν said

Ἄνδρες Male persons Ἰσραηλεῖται Israelites καὶ and οἱ the (ones) φοβούμενοι fearing τὸν the θεόν, God, ἀκούσατε. hear YOU. 17 Ὁ The θεὸς God τοῦ of the λαοῦ people τούτου this Ἰσραὴλ Israel ἐξελέξατο chose τοὺς the πατέρας fathers ἡμῶν, of us, καὶ and τὸν the λαὸν people ὕψωσεν put high up ἐν in τῇ the παροικίᾳ alien residence ἐν in γῇ earth Αἰγύπτου, of Egypt, καὶ and μετὰ with βραχίονος arm ὑψηλοῦ high ἐξήγαγεν he led out αὐτοὺς them ἐξ out of αὐτῆς, it, 18 καί, and, ὡς as τεσσερακονταετῆ forty years χρόνον time ἐτροποφόρησεν bore manners of αὐτοὺς them ἐν in τῇ the ἐρήμῳ, desolate [place] 19 καθελὼν having taken down ἔθνη nations ἑπτὰ seven ἐν in γῇ earth Χαναὰν of Canaan κατεκληρονόμησεν he assigned as inheritance τὴν the γῆν earth αὐτῶν of them 20 ὡς as ἔτεσι to years τετρακοσίοις four hundred καὶ and πεντήκοντα. fifty.

Καὶ And μετὰ after ταῦτα these (things) ἔδωκεν he gave κριτὰς judges ἕως until Σαμουὴλ Samuel προφήτου. prophet. 21 κἀκεῖθεν And from there ᾐτήσαντο they asked for βασιλέα, king, καὶ and ἔδωκεν he gave αὐτοῖς to them ὁ the θεὸς God τὸν the Σαοὺλ Saul υἱὸν son Κείς, of Kish, ἄνδρα male person ἐκ out of φυλῆς tribe Βενιαμείν, of Benjamin, ἔτη years τεσσεράκοντα· forty; 22 καὶ and μεταστήσας having set across αὐτὸν him ἤγειρεν he raised up τὸν the Δαυεὶδ David αὐτοῖς to them εἰς into βασιλέα, king, ᾧ to whom καὶ also εἶπεν he said μαρτυρήσας having borne witness Εὗρον I found Δαυεὶδ David τὸν the [son] τοῦ of the Ἰεσσαί, Jesse, ἄνδρα male person κατὰ according to τὴν the καρδίαν heart μου, of me, ὃς who ποιήσει will do πάντα all τὰ the θελήματά things willed μου. of me. 23 τούτου Of this (one) ὁ the θεὸς God ἀπὸ from τοῦ the σπέρματος seed κατ’ according to ἐπαγγελίαν promise ἤγαγεν he led τῷ to the Ἰσραὴλ Israel σωτῆρα savior Ἰησοῦν, Jesus, 24 προκηρύξαντος having preached before Ἰωάνου of John πρὸ before προσώπου face τῆς of the εἰσόδου entry αὐτοῦ of him βάπτισμα baptism μετανοίας of repentance παντὶ to all τῷ the λαῷ people Ἰσραήλ. Israel. 25 ὡς As δὲ but ἐπλήρου was fulfilling Ἰωάνης John τὸν the δρόμον, course, ἔλεγεν he was saying Τί What ἐμὲ me ὑπονοεῖτε are YOU supposing εἶναι; to be? οὐκ not εἰμὶ am ἐγώ· I; ἀλλ’ but ἰδοὺ look! ἔρχεται one is coming μετ’ after ἐμὲ me οὗ of whom οὐκ not εἰμὶ I am ἄξιος worthy τὸ the ὑπόδημα bound under τῶν of the ποδῶν feet λῦσαι. to loosen.

26 Ἄνδρες Male persons ἀδελφοί, brothers, υἱοὶ sons γένους of race ᾿Αβραὰμ of Abraham καὶ and οἱ the (ones) ἐν in ὑμῖν YOU φοβούμενοι fearing τὸν the θεόν, God, ἡμῖν to us ὁ the λόγος word τῆς of the σωτηρίας salvation ταύτης this ἐξαπεστάλη. was sent off out. 27 οἱ The (ones) γὰρ for κατοικοῦντες inhabiting ἐν in Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem καὶ and οἱ the ἄρχοντες rulers αὐτῶν of them τοῦτον this (one) ἀγνοήσαντες having not known καὶ and τὰς the φωνὰς voices τῶν of the προφητῶν prophets τὰς the (ones) κατὰ down πᾶν every σάββατον sabbath ἀναγινωσκομένας being read κρίναντες having judged ἐπλήρωσαν, they fulfilled, 28 καὶ and μηδεμίαν not one αἰτίαν cause θανάτου of death εὑρόντες having found ᾐτήσαντο they asked Πειλᾶτον Pilate ἀναιρεθῆναι to be taken up αὐτόν· him; 29 ὡς as δὲ but ἐτέλεσαν they ended πάντα all τὰ the (things) περὶ about αὐτοῦ him γεγραμμένα, having been written, καθελόντες having taken down ἀπὸ from τοῦ the ξύλου wood ἔθηκαν they put εἰς into μνημεῖον. memorial tomb. 30 ὁ The δὲ but θεὸς God ἤγειρεν raised up αὐτὸν him ἐκ out of νεκρῶν· dead (ones); 31 ὃς who ὤφθη got to be seen ἐπὶ upon ἡμέρας days πλείους more τοῖς to the (ones) συναναβᾶσιν having gone up with αὐτῷ him ἀπὸ from τῆς the Γαλιλαίας Galilee εἰς into Ἰερουσαλήμ, Jerusalem, οἵτινες who νῦν now εἰσὶ are μάρτυρες witnesses αὐτοῦ of him πρὸς toward τὸν the λαόν. people.

32 Καὶ And ἡμεῖς we ὑμᾶς [to] YOU εὐαγγελιζόμεθα we are declaring as good news τὴν the πρὸς toward τοὺς the πατέρας fathers ἐπαγγελίαν promise γενομένην having come to be 33 ὅτι that ταύτην this ὁ the θεὸς God ἐκπεπλήρωκεν has fulfilled out τοῖς to the τέκνοις children ἡμῶν of us ἀναστήσας having made stand up Ἰησοῦν, Jesus, ὡς as καὶ also ἐν in τῷ the ψαλμῷ psalm γέγραπται it has been written τῷ to the δευτέρῳ second Υἱός Son μου of me εἶ are σύ, you, ἐγὼ I σήμερον today γεγέννηκά have generated σε. you. 34 ὅτι That δὲ but ἀνέστησεν he made stand up αὐτὸν him ἐκ out of νεκρῶν dead (ones) μηκέτι not yet μέλλοντα being about ὑποστρέφειν to be returning εἰς into διαφθοράν, corruption, οὕτως thus εἴρηκεν he has said ὅτι that Δώσω I shall give ὑμῖν to YOU τὰ the (things) ὅσια lovingly kind Δαυεὶδ of David τὰ the (things) πιστά. faithful. 35 διότι Through which καὶ also ἐν in ἑτέρῳ different (one) λέγει he is saying Οὐ Not δώσεις you will give τὸν the (one) ὅσιόν loyal σου of you ἰδεῖν to see διαφθοράν· corruption; 36 Δαυεὶδ David μὲν indeed γὰρ for ἰδίᾳ to own γενεᾷ generation ὑπηρετήσας having acted subordinate τῇ to the τοῦ of the θεοῦ God βουλῇ counsel ἐκοιμήθη fell asleep καὶ and προσετέθη was added πρὸς toward τοὺς the πατέρας fathers αὐτοῦ of him καὶ and εἶδεν he saw διαφθοράν, corruption, 37 ὃν whom δὲ but ὁ the θεὸς God ἤγειρεν raised up οὐκ not εἶδεν he saw διαφθοράν. corruption.

38 Γνωστὸν Known οὖν therefore ἔστω let it be ὑμῖν, to YOU, ἄνδρες male persons ἀδελφοί, brothers, ὅτι that διὰ through τούτου this (one) ὑμῖν to YOU ἄφεσις letting go off ἁμαρτιῶν of sins καταγγέλλεται, is being announced down, 39 καὶ and ἀπὸ from πάντων all (things) ὧν of which οὐκ not ἠδυνήθητε YOU were able ἐν in νόμῳ law Μωυσέως of Moses δικαιωθῆναι to be justified ἐν in τούτῳ this (One) πᾶς everyone ὁ the πιστεύων believing δικαιοῦται. is being justified. 40 βλέπετε Be YOU looking οὖν therefore μὴ not ἐπέλθῃ should come upon τὸ the (thing) εἰρημένον having been said ἐν in τοῖς the προφήταις Prophets 41 Ἴδετε, See YOU, οἱ the καταφρονηταί, scorners, καὶ and θαυμάσατε wonder YOU καὶ and ἀφανίσθητε, vanish YOU away, ὅτι because ἔργον work ἐργάζομαι am working ἐγὼ I ἐν in ταῖς the ἡμέραις days ὑμῶν, of YOU, ἔργον work ὃ which οὐ not μὴ not πιστεύσητε YOU would believe ἐάν if ever τις anyone ἐκδιηγῆται may relate out through ὑμῖν. to YOU.

42 ᾿Εξιόντων Going out δὲ but αὐτῶν of them παρεκάλουν they were entreating εἰς into τὸ the μεταξὺ between σάββατον sabbath λαληθῆναι to be spoken αὐτοῖς to them τὰ the ῥήματα sayings ταῦτα. these. 43 λυθείσης Having been dissolved δὲ but τῆς of the συναγωγῆς synagogue ἠκολούθησαν followed πολλοὶ many τῶν of the Ἰουδαίων Jews καὶ and τῶν of the σεβομένων venerating προσηλύτων proselytes τῷ to the Παύλῳ Paul καὶ and τῷ to the Βαρνάβᾳ, Barnabas, οἵτινες who προσλαλοῦντες speaking toward αὐτοῖς them ἔπειθον they were persuading αὐτοὺς them προσμένειν to be remaining toward τῇ the χάριτι undeserved kindness τοῦ of the θεοῦ. God.

44 Τῷ To the δὲ but ἐρχομένῳ coming σαββάτῳ sabbath σχεδὸν almost πᾶσα all ἡ the πόλις city συνήχθη was led together ἀκοῦσαι to hear τὸν the λόγον word τοῦ of the θεοῦ. God. 45 ἰδόντες Having seen δὲ but οἱ the Ἰουδαῖοι Jews τοὺς the ὄχλους crowds ἐπλήσθησαν they got filled ζήλου of jealousy καὶ and ἀντέλεγον they were contradicting τοῖς the (things) ὑπὸ by Παύλου Paul λαλουμένοις to (things) being spoken βλασφημοῦντες. blaspheming. 46 παρρησιασάμενοί Having spoken boldly τε and ὁ the Παῦλος Paul καὶ and ὁ the Βαρνάβας Barnabas εἶπαν they said Ὑμῖν To YOU ἦν it was ἀναγκαῖον necessary πρῶτον first λαληθῆναι to be spoken τὸν the λόγον word τοῦ of the θεοῦ· God; ἐπειδὴ since ἀπωθεῖσθε YOU push away αὐτὸν it καὶ and οὐκ not ἀξίους worthy κρίνετε YOU are judging ἑαυτοὺς selves τῆς of the αἰωνίου everlasting ζωῆς, life, ἰδοὺ look! στρεφόμεθα we are turning εἰς into τὰ the ἔθνη· nations; 47 οὕτω thus γὰρ for ἐντέταλται has enjoined ἡμῖν to us ὁ the κύριος Lord Τέθεικά I have put σε you εἰς into φῶς light ἐθνῶν of nations τοῦ of the εἶναί to be σε you εἰς into σωτηρίαν salvation ἕως until ἐσχάτου last [part] τῆς of the γῆς. earth.

48 ᾿Ακούοντα Hearing δὲ but τὰ the ἔθνη nations ἔχαιρον were rejoicing καὶ and ἐδόξαζον they were glorifying τὸν the λόγον word τοῦ of the θεοῦ, God, καὶ and ἐπίστευσαν believed ὅσοι as many as ἦσαν were τεταγμένοι having been disposed εἰς into ζωὴν life αἰώνιον· everlasting; 49 διεφέρετο was being borne through δὲ but ὁ the λόγος word τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord δι’ throughout ὅλης whole τῆς the χώρας. country. 50 οἱ The δὲ but Ἰουδαῖοι Jews παρώτρυναν urged on τὰς the σεβομένας venerating γυναῖκας women τὰς the εὐσχήμονας reputable καὶ and τοὺς the πρώτους first [men] τῆς of the πόλεως city καὶ and ἐπήγειραν they raised up upon διωγμὸν persecution ἐπὶ upon τὸν the Παῦλον Paul καὶ and Βαρνάβαν, Barnabas, καὶ and ἐξέβαλον they threw out αὐτοὺς them ἀπὸ from τῶν the ὁρίων boundaries αὐτῶν. of them. 51 οἱ The δὲ but ἐκτιναξάμενοι having shaken out τὸν the κονιορτὸν dust τῶν of the ποδῶν feet ἐπ’ upon αὐτοὺς them ἦλθον they came εἰς into Ἰκόνιον, Iconium, 52 οἵ the τε and μαθηταὶ disciples ἐπληροῦντο were being filled χαρᾶς of joy καὶ and πνεύματος of spirit ἁγίου. holy.

14 ᾿Εγένετο It occurred δὲ but ἐν in Ἰκονίῳ Iconium κατὰ down τὸ the αὐτὸ very (thing) εἰσελθεῖν to enter αὐτοὺς them εἰς into τὴν the συναγωγὴν synagogue τῶν of the Ἰουδαίων Jews καὶ and λαλῆσαι to speak οὕτως thus ὥστε as-and πιστεῦσαι to believe Ἰουδαίων of Jews τε and καὶ and Ἑλλήνων of Greeks πολὺ much πλῆθος. multitude. 2 οἱ The δὲ but ἀπειθήσαντες having disobeyed Ἰουδαῖοι Jews ἐπήγειραν roused up καὶ and ἐκάκωσαν they badly affected τὰς the ψυχὰς souls τῶν of the ἐθνῶν nations κατὰ down on τῶν the ἀδελφῶν. brothers. 3 ἱκανὸν Sufficient μὲν indeed οὖν therefore χρόνον time διέτριψαν they spent παρρησιαζόμενοι speaking boldly ἐπὶ upon τῷ the κυρίῳ Lord τῷ the (one) μαρτυροῦντι bearing witness τῷ to the λόγῳ word τῆς of the χάριτος undeserved kindness αὐτοῦ, of him, διδόντι giving σημεῖα signs καὶ and τέρατα portents γίνεσθαι to be occurring διὰ through τῶν the χειρῶν hands αὐτῶν. of them. 4 ἐσχίσθη Was split δὲ but τὸ the πλῆθος multitude τῆς of the πόλεως, city, καὶ and οἱ the (ones) μὲν indeed ἦσαν were σὺν together with τοῖς the Ἰουδαίοις Jews οἱ the (ones) δὲ but σὺν together with τοῖς the ἀποστόλοις. apostles. 5 ὡς As δὲ but ἐγένετο occurred ὁρμὴ rushing τῶν of the ἐθνῶν nations τε and καὶ and Ἰουδαίων Jews σὺν together with τοῖς the ἄρχουσιν rulers αὐτῶν of them ὑβρίσαι to outrage καὶ and λιθοβολῆσαι to throw stones at αὐτούς, them, 6 συνιδόντες having seen with κατέφυγον they fled down εἰς into τὰς the πόλεις cities τῆς of the Λυκαονίας Lycaonia Λύστραν Lystra καὶ and Δέρβην Derbe καὶ and τὴν the περίχωρον, roundabout country, 7 κἀκεῖ and there εὐαγγελιζόμενοι declaring good news ἦσαν. they were.

8 Καί And τις some ἀνὴρ male person ἀδύνατος impotent ἐν in Λύστροις Lystra τοῖς to the ποσὶν feet ἐκάθητο, he was sitting, χωλὸς lame ἐκ out of κοιλίας cavity μητρὸς of mother αὐτοῦ, of him, ὃς who οὐδέποτε never περιεπάτησεν. walked about. 9 οὗτος This (one) ἤκουεν was hearing τοῦ of the Παύλου Paul λαλοῦντος· speaking; ὃς who ἀτενίσας having looked intently αὐτῷ to him καὶ and ἰδὼν having seen ὅτι that ἔχει he is having πίστιν faith τοῦ of the σωθῆναι to be saved 10 εἶπεν he said μεγάλῃ to great φωνῇ voice ᾿Ανάστηθι Stand up ἐπὶ upon τοὺς the πόδας feet σου of you ὀρθός· erect; καὶ and ἥλατο he sprang up καὶ and περιεπάτει. he was walking about. 11 οἵ The τε and ὄχλοι crowds ἰδόντες having seen ὃ which ἐποίησεν did Παῦλος Paul ἐπῆραν lifted up τὴν the φωνὴν voice αὐτῶν of them Λυκαονιστὶ in Lycaonian tongue λέγοντες saying Οἱ The θεοὶ gods ὁμοιωθέντες having been likened ἀνθρώποις to men κατέβησαν came down πρὸς toward ἡμᾶς, us, 12 ἐκάλουν they were calling τε and τὸν the Βαρνάβαν Barnabas Δία, Zeus, τὸν the δὲ but Παῦλον Paul Ἑρμῆν Hermes ἐπειδὴ since αὐτὸς he ἦν was ὁ the ἡγούμενος leading one τοῦ of the λόγου. word. 13 ὅ The τε and ἱερεὺς priest τοῦ of the Διὸς Zeus τοῦ the (one) ὄντος being πρὸ before τῆς the πόλεως city ταύρους bulls καὶ and στέμματα garlands ἐπὶ upon τοὺς the πυλῶνας gates ἐνέγκας having brought σὺν together with τοῖς the ὄχλοις crowds ἤθελεν was desiring θύειν. to be sacrificing.

14 ᾿Ακούσαντες Having heard δὲ but οἱ the ἀπόστολοι apostles Βαρνάβας Barnabas καὶ and Παῦλος, Paul, διαρρήξαντες having ripped τὰ the ἱμάτια outer garments ἑαυτῶν of themselves ἐξεπήδησαν they leaped out εἰς into τὸν the ὄχλον, crowd, κράζοντες crying out 15 καὶ and λέγοντες saying Ἄνδρες, Male persons, τί why ταῦτα these (things) ποιεῖτε; are YOU doing? καὶ Also ἡμεῖς we ὁμοιοπαθεῖς of like sufferings ἐσμὲν we are ὑμῖν to YOU ἄνθρωποι, men, εὐαγγελιζόμενοι declaring good news to ὑμᾶς YOU ἀπὸ from τούτων these τῶν the ματαίων vain (things) ἐπιστρέφειν to be turning ἐπὶ upon θεὸν God ζῶντα living ὃς who ἐποίησεν made τὸν the οὐρανὸν heaven καὶ and τὴν the γῆν earth καὶ and τὴν the θάλασσαν sea καὶ and πάντα all τὰ the (things) ἐν in αὐτοῖς· them; 16 ὃς who ἐν in ταῖς the παρῳχημέναις having gone by γενεαῖς generations εἴασεν he permitted πάντα all τὰ the ἔθνη nations πορεύεσθαι to be going ταῖς to the ὁδοῖς ways αὐτῶν· of them; 17 καίτοι although οὐκ not ἀμάρτυρον without witness αὑτὸν himself ἀφῆκεν he let go off ἀγαθουργῶν, working good, οὐρανόθεν from heaven ὑμῖν to YOU ὑετοὺς rains διδοὺς giving καὶ and καιροὺς appointed times καρποφόρους, fruit-bearing, ἐμπιπλῶν filling τροφῆς of food καὶ and εὐφροσύνης of well-mindedness τὰς the καρδίας hearts ὑμῶν. of YOU. 18 καὶ And ταῦτα these (things) λέγοντες saying μόλις scarcely κατέπαυσαν they restrained τοὺς the ὄχλους crowds τοῦ of the μὴ not θύειν to be sacrificing αὐτοῖς. to them.

19 ᾿Επῆλθαν They came upon δὲ but ἀπὸ from ᾿Αντιοχείας Antioch καὶ and Ἰκονίου Iconium Ἰουδαῖοι, Jews, καὶ and πείσαντες having persuaded τοὺς the ὄχλους crowds καὶ and λιθάσαντες having stoned τὸν the Παῦλον Paul ἔσυρον they were dragging ἔξω outside τῆς of the πόλεως, city, νομίζοντες opining αὐτὸν him τεθνηκέναι. to have died. 20 κυκλωσάντων Having encircled δὲ but τῶν of the μαθητῶν disciples αὐτὸν him ἀναστὰς having stood up εἰσῆλθεν he entered εἰς into τὴν the πόλιν. city. καὶ And τῇ to the ἐπαύριον morrow ἐξῆλθεν he went out σὺν together with τῷ the Βαρνάβᾳ Barnabas εἰς into Δέρβην. Derbe. 21 εὐαγγελισάμενοί Having declared good news to τε and τὴν the πόλιν city ἐκείνην that καὶ and μαθητεύσαντες having made disciples ἱκανοὺς sufficient (ones) ὑπέστρεψαν they returned εἰς into τὴν the Λύστραν Lystra καὶ and εἰς into Ἰκόνιον Iconium καὶ and εἰς into ᾿Αντιόχειαν, Antioch, 22 ἐπιστηρίζοντες firmly fixing τὰς the ψυχὰς souls τῶν of the μαθητῶν, disciples, παρακαλοῦντες encouraging ἐμμένειν to be remaining in τῇ the πίστει faith καὶ and ὅτι that διὰ through πολλῶν many θλίψεων tribulations δεῖ it is necessary ἡμᾶς us εἰσελθεῖν to enter εἰς into τὴν the βασιλείαν kingdom τοῦ of the θεοῦ. God. 23 χειροτονήσαντες Having appointed [by extended hand] δὲ but αὐτοῖς to them κατ’ according to ἐκκλησίαν ecclesia πρεσβυτέρους older men προσευξάμενοι having prayed μετὰ with νηστειῶν fastings παρέθεντο they put beside αὐτοὺς them τῷ to the κυρίῳ Lord εἰς into ὃν whom πεπιστεύκεισαν. they had believed.

24 Καὶ And διελθόντες going through τὴν the Πισιδίαν Pisidia ἦλθαν they came εἰς into τὴν the Παμφυλίαν, Pamphylia, 25 καὶ and λαλήσαντες having spoken ἐν in Πέργῃ Perga τὸν the λόγον word κατέβησαν they stepped down εἰς into ᾿Ατταλίαν, Attalia, 26 κἀκεῖθεν and from there ἀπέπλευσαν they sailed off εἰς into ᾿Αντιόχειαν, Antioch, ὅθεν from where ἦσαν they were παραδεδομένοι having been given beside τῇ to the χάριτι undeserved kindness τοῦ of the θεοῦ God εἰς into τὸ the ἔργον work ὃ which ἐπλήρωσαν. they fulfilled.

27 Παραγενόμενοι Having come to be alongside δὲ but καὶ and συναγαγόντες having led together τὴν the ἐκκλησίαν ecclesia ἀνήγγελλον they were recounting ὅσα as many (things) as ἐποίησεν did ὁ the θεὸς God μετ’ with αὐτῶν them καὶ and ὅτι that ἤνοιξεν he opened up τοῖς to the ἔθνεσιν nations θύραν door πίστεως. of faith. 28 διέτριβον They were spending δὲ but χρόνον time οὐκ not ὀλίγον little σὺν together with τοῖς the μαθηταῖς. disciples.

15 Καί And τινες some κατελθόντες having come down ἀπὸ from τῆς the Ἰουδαίας Judea ἐδίδασκον were teaching τοὺς the ἀδελφοὺς brothers ὅτι that ᾿Εὰν If ever μὴ not περιτμηθῆτε YOU should be circumcised τῷ to the ἔθει custom τῷ to the (one) Μωυσέως, of Moses, οὐ not δύνασθε YOU are able σωθῆναι. to be saved. 2 γενομένης Having occurred δὲ but στάσεως of standing καὶ and ζητήσεως of seeking οὐκ not ὀλίγης little τῷ to the Παύλῳ Paul καὶ and τῷ to the Βαρνάβᾳ Barnabas πρὸς toward αὐτοὺς them ἔταξαν they arranged ἀναβαίνειν to be going up Παῦλον Paul καὶ and Βαρνάβαν Barnabas καί and τινας some ἄλλους others ἐξ out of αὐτῶν them πρὸς toward τοὺς the ἀποστόλους apostles καὶ and πρεσβυτέρους older men εἰς into Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem περὶ about τοῦ the ζητήματος thing sought τούτου. this.

3 Οἱ The (ones) μὲν indeed οὖν therefore προπεμφθέντες having been sent before ὑπὸ by τῆς the ἐκκλησίας ecclesia διήρχοντο they were going through τήν the τε and Φοινίκην Phoenicia καὶ and Σαμαρίαν Samaria ἐκδιηγούμενοι relating throughout τὴν the ἐπιστροφὴν turning upon τῶν of the ἐθνῶν, nations, καὶ and ἐποίουν they were making χαρὰν joy μεγάλην great πᾶσι to all τοῖς the ἀδελφοῖς. brothers. 4 παραγενόμενοι Having come to be alongside δὲ but εἰς into Ἰεροσόλυμα Jerusalem παρεδέχθησαν they were received alongside ἀπὸ from τῆς the ἐκκλησίας ecclesia καὶ and τῶν of the ἀποστόλων apostles καὶ and τῶν of the πρεσβυτέρων, older men, ἀνήγγειλάν they recounted τε and ὅσα as many (things) as ὁ the θεὸς God ἐποίησεν did μετ’ with αὐτῶν. them. 5 ᾿Εξανέστησαν Stood up out δέ but τινες some τῶν of the (ones) ἀπὸ from τῆς the αἱρέσεως sect τῶν of the Φαρισαίων Pharisees πεπιστευκότες, having believed, λέγοντες saying ὅτι that δεῖ it is necessary περιτέμνειν to be circumcising αὐτοὺς them παραγγέλλειν to be charging τε and τηρεῖν to be observing τὸν the νόμον law Μωυσέως. of Moses.

6 Συνήχθησάν Were led together τε and οἱ the ἀπόστολοι apostles καὶ and οἱ the πρεσβύτεροι older men ἰδεῖν to see περὶ about τοῦ the λόγου word τούτου. this. 7 Πολλῆς Of much δὲ but ζητήσεως of seeking γενομένης having occurred ἀναστὰς having stood up Πέτρος Peter εἶπεν said πρὸς toward αὐτούς them Ἄνδρες Male persons ἀδελφοί, brothers, ὑμεῖς YOU ἐπίστασθε are well knowing ὅτι that ἀφ’ from ἡμερῶν days ἀρχαίων original ἐν in ὑμῖν YOU ἐξελέξατο chose ὁ the θεὸς God διὰ through τοῦ the στόματός mouth μου of me ἀκοῦσαι to hear τὰ the ἔθνη nations τὸν the λόγον word τοῦ of the εὐαγγελίου good news καὶ and πιστεῦσαι, to believe, 8 καὶ and ὁ the καρδιογνώστης heart-knowing θεὸς God ἐμαρτύρησεν bore witness αὐτοῖς to them δοὺς having given τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit τὸ the ἅγιον holy καθὼς according as καὶ also ἡμῖν, to us, 9 καὶ and οὐθὲν nothing διέκρινεν he distinguished μεταξὺ between ἡμῶν us τε and καὶ and αὐτῶν, them, τῇ to the πίστει faith καθαρίσας having purified τὰς the καρδίας hearts αὐτῶν. of them. 10 νῦν Now οὖν therefore τί why πειράζετε are YOU testing τὸν the θεόν, God, ἐπιθεῖναι to put upon ζυγὸν yoke ἐπὶ upon τὸν the τράχηλον neck τῶν of the μαθητῶν disciples ὃν which οὔτε neither οἱ the πατέρες fathers ἡμῶν of us οὔτε nor ἡμεῖς we ἰσχύσαμεν were strong enough βαστάσαι; to carry? 11 ἀλλὰ But διὰ through τῆς the χάριτος undeserved kindness τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord Ἰησοῦ Jesus πιστεύομεν we are believing σωθῆναι to be saved καθ’ down ὃν which τρόπον manner κἀκεῖνοι. also those.

12 ᾿Εσίγησεν Became silent δὲ but πᾶν all τὸ the πλῆθος, multitude, καὶ and ἤκουον were hearing Βαρνάβα of Barnabas καὶ and Παύλου of Paul ἐξηγουμένων relating out ὅσα as many (things) as ἐποίησεν did ὁ the θεὸς God σημεῖα signs καὶ and τέρατα portents ἐν in τοῖς the ἔθνεσιν nations δι’ through αὐτῶν. them. 13 Μετὰ After δὲ but τὸ the σιγῆσαι to become silent αὐτοὺς them ἀπεκρίθη answered Ἰάκωβος James λέγων saying Ἄνδρες Male persons ἀδελφοί, brothers, ἀκούσατέ hear YOU μου. of me. 14 Συμεὼν Symeon ἐξηγήσατο related out καθὼς according as πρῶτον firstly ὁ the θεὸς God ἐπεσκέψατο looked upon λαβεῖν to take ἐξ out of ἐθνῶν nations λαὸν people τῷ to the ὀνόματι name αὐτοῦ. of him. 15 καὶ And τούτῳ to this συμφωνοῦσιν are sounding together οἱ the λόγοι words τῶν of the προφητῶν, prophets, καθὼς according as γέγραπται it has been written 16 Μετὰ After ταῦτα these (things) ἀναστρέψω I shall turn up καὶ and ἀνοικοδομήσω I shall rebuild τὴν the σκηνὴν tent Δαυεὶδ of David τὴν the (one) πεπτωκυῖαν having fallen καὶ and τὰ the (things) κατεστραμμένα having been turned down αὐτῆς of it ἀνοικοδομήσω I shall rebuild καὶ and ἀνορθώσω I shall erect again αὐτήν, it, 17 ὅπως so that ἂν likely ἐκζητήσωσιν should seek out οἱ the κατάλοιποι leftover ones τῶν of the ἀνθρώπων men τὸν the κύριον, Lord, καὶ and πάντα all τὰ the ἔθνη nations ἐφ’ upon οὓς whom ἐπικέκληται has been called upon τὸ the ὄνομά name μου of me ἐπ’ upon αὐτούς, them, λέγει is saying Κύριος Lord ποιῶν doing ταῦτα these (things) 18 γνωστὰ known ἀπ’ from αἰῶνος. age. 19 διὸ Through which ἐγὼ I κρίνω am judging μὴ not παρενοχλεῖν to be troubling τοῖς to the (ones) ἀπὸ from τῶν the ἐθνῶν nations ἐπιστρέφουσιν turning ἐπὶ upon τὸν the θεόν, God, 20 ἀλλὰ but ἐπιστεῖλαι to dispatch word αὐτοῖς to them τοῦ of the ἀπέχεσθαι to be abstaining τῶν of the ἀλισγημάτων pollutions τῶν of the εἰδώλων idols καὶ and τῆς of the πορνείας fornication καὶ and πνικτοῦ of thing strangled καὶ and τοῦ of the αἵματος· blood; 21 Μωυσῆς Moses γὰρ for ἐκ out of γενεῶν generations ἀρχαίων original κατὰ according to πόλιν city τοὺς the (ones) κηρύσσοντας preaching αὐτὸν him ἔχει he is having ἐν in ταῖς the συναγωγαῖς synagogues κατὰ down πᾶν every σάββατον sabbath ἀναγινωσκόμενος. being read.

22 Τότε Then ἔδοξε it seemed τοῖς to the ἀποστόλοις apostles καὶ and τοῖς the πρεσβυτέροις older men σὺν together with ὅλῃ whole τῇ the ἐκκλησίᾳ ecclesia ἐκλεξαμένους having chosen ἄνδρας male persons ἐξ out of αὐτῶν them πέμψαι to send εἰς into ᾿Αντιόχειαν Antioch σὺν together with τῷ the Παύλῳ Paul καὶ and Βαρνάβᾳ, to Barnabas, Ἰούδαν Judas τὸν the (one) καλούμενον being called Βαρσαββᾶν Barsabbas καὶ and Σίλαν, Silas, ἄνδρας male persons ἡγουμένους leading ἐν in τοῖς the ἀδελφοῖς, brothers, 23 γράψαντες having written διὰ through χειρὸς hand αὐτῶν of them

Οἱ The ἀπόστολοι apostles καὶ and οἱ the πρεσβύτεροι older men ἀδελφοὶ brothers τοῖς to the κατὰ down τὴν the ᾿Αντιόχειαν Antioch καὶ and Συρίαν Syria καὶ and Κιλικίαν Cilicia ἀδελφοῖς to brothers τοῖς to the (ones) ἐξ out of ἐθνῶν nations χαίρειν. to be rejoicing. 24 ᾿Επειδὴ Since ἠκούσαμεν we heard ὅτι that τινὲς some ἐξ out of ἡμῶν us ἐτάραξαν agitated ὑμᾶς YOU λόγοις to words ἀνασκευάζοντες subverting τὰς the ψυχὰς souls ὑμῶν, of YOU, οἷς to whom οὐ not διεστειλάμεθα, we gave instructions, 25 ἔδοξεν it seemed ἡμῖν to us γενομένοις having become ὁμοθυμαδὸν like-mindedly ἐκλεξαμένοις having chosen ἄνδρας male persons πέμψαι to send πρὸς toward ὑμᾶς YOU σὺν together with τοῖς the ἀγαπητοῖς loved ἡμῶν of us Βαρνάβᾳ to Barnabas καὶ and Παύλῳ, to Paul, 26 ἀνθρώποις to men παραδεδωκόσι having given beside τὰς the ψυχὰς souls αὐτῶν of them ὑπὲρ over τοῦ the ὀνόματος name τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord ἡμῶν of us Ἰησοῦ Jesus Χριστοῦ. Christ. 27 ἀπεστάλκαμεν We have sent off οὖν therefore Ἰούδαν Judas καὶ and Σίλαν, Silas, καὶ and αὐτοὺς them διὰ through λόγου word ἀπαγγέλλοντας reporting back τὰ the αὐτά. very (things). 28 ἔδοξεν It seemed γὰρ for τῷ to the πνεύματι spirit τῷ the ἁγίῳ holy καὶ and ἡμῖν to us μηδὲν nothing πλέον more ἐπιτίθεσθαι to be put upon ὑμῖν YOU βάρος burden πλὴν besides τούτων these τῶν the (things) ἐπάναγκες, of necessity, 29 ἀπέχεσθαι to be abstaining from εἰδωλοθύτων (things) sacrificed to idols καὶ and αἵματος of blood καὶ and πνικτῶν of (things) strangled καὶ and πορνείας· of fornication; ἐξ out of ὧν which διατηροῦντες thoroughly keeping ἑαυτοὺς selves εὖ well πράξετε. YOU will perform. Ἔρρωσθε. Be YOU in good health.

30 Οἱ The (ones) μὲν indeed οὖν therefore ἀπολυθέντες having been released κατῆλθον went down εἰς into ᾿Αντιόχειαν, Antioch, καὶ and συναγαγόντες having led together τὸ the πλῆθος multitude ἐπέδωκαν they gave upon [hand] τὴν the ἐπιστολήν· letter; 31 ἀναγνόντες having read δὲ but ἐχάρησαν they rejoiced ἐπὶ upon τῇ the παρακλήσει. encouragement. 32 Ἰούδας Judas τε and καὶ and Σίλας, Silas, καὶ also αὐτοὶ they προφῆται prophets ὄντες, being, διὰ through λόγου word πολλοῦ much παρεκάλεσαν encouraged τοὺς the ἀδελφοὺς brothers καὶ and ἐπεστήριξαν· they confirmed; 33 ποιήσαντες having done δὲ but χρόνον time ἀπελύθησαν they were released μετ’ with εἰρήνης peace ἀπὸ from τῶν the ἀδελφῶν brothers πρὸς toward τοὺς the (ones) ἀποστείλαντας having sent off αὐτούς. them. 34 —— —— 35 Παῦλος Paul δὲ but καὶ and Βαρνάβας Barnabas διέτριβον were spending [time] ἐν in ᾿Αντιοχείᾳ Antioch διδάσκοντες teaching καὶ and εὐαγγελιζόμενοι declaring as good news μετὰ with καὶ also ἑτέρων different (ones) πολλῶν many τὸν the λόγον word τοῦ of the κυρίου. Lord.

36 Μετὰ After δέ but τινας some ἡμέρας days εἶπεν said πρὸς toward Βαρνάβαν Barnabas Παῦλος Paul ᾿Επιστρέψαντες Having returned δὴ of all things ἐπισκεψώμεθα let us look upon τοὺς the ἀδελφοὺς brothers κατὰ down πόλιν city πᾶσαν every ἐν in αἷς which (ones) κατηγγείλαμεν we announced down τὸν the λόγον word τοῦ of the κυρίου, Lord, πῶς how ἔχουσιν. they are having. 37 Βαρνάβας Barnabas δὲ but ἐβούλετο was wishing συνπαραλαβεῖν to take along with καὶ also τὸν the Ἰωάνην John τὸν the (one) καλούμενον being called Μάρκον· Mark; 38 Παῦλος Paul δὲ but ἠξίου, was thinking worthy, τὸν the (one) ἀποστάντα having stood off ἀπ’ from αὐτῶν them ἀπὸ from Παμφυλίας Pamphylia καὶ and μὴ not συνελθόντα having gone with αὐτοῖς them εἰς into τὸ the ἔργον, work, μὴ not συνπαραλαμβάνειν to be taking along with τοῦτον. this (one). 39 ἐγένετο Occurred δὲ but παροξυσμὸς paroxysm ὥστε as-and ἀποχωρισθῆναι to be separated αὐτοὺς them ἀπ’ from ἀλλήλων, one another, τόν the τε and Βαρνάβαν Barnabas παραλαβόντα having taken along τὸν the Μάρκον Mark ἐκπλεῦσαι to sail out εἰς into Κύπρον. Cyprus. 40 Παῦλος Paul δὲ but ἐπιλεξάμενος having selected Σίλαν Silas ἐξῆλθεν he went out παραδοθεὶς having been given beside τῇ to the χάριτι undeserved kindness τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord ὑπὸ by τῶν the ἀδελφῶν, brothers, 41 διήρχετο he was going through δὲ but τὴν the Συρίαν Syria καὶ and τὴν the Κιλικίαν Cilicia ἐπιστηρίζων confirming τὰς the ἐκκλησίας. congregations.

16 Κατήντησεν He attained δὲ but καὶ also εἰς into Δέρβην Derbe καὶ and εἰς into Λύστραν. Lystra. καὶ And ἰδοὺ look! μαθητής disciple τις some ἦν was ἐκεῖ there ὀνόματι to name Τιμόθεος, Timothy, υἱὸς son γυναικὸς of woman Ἰουδαίας Jewish πιστῆς faithful πατρὸς of father δὲ but Ἕλληνος, Greek, 2 ὃς who ἐμαρτυρεῖτο was witnessed about ὑπὸ by τῶν the ἐν in Λύστροις Lystra καὶ and Ἰκονίῳ Iconium ἀδελφῶν· brothers; 3 τοῦτον this (one) ἠθέλησεν willed ὁ the Παῦλος Paul σὺν together with αὐτῷ him ἐξελθεῖν, to go out, καὶ and λαβὼν having taken περιέτεμεν he circumcised αὐτὸν him διὰ through τοὺς the Ἰουδαίους Jews τοὺς the (ones) ὄντας being ἐν in τοῖς the τόποις places ἐκείνοις, those, ᾔδεισαν they had known γὰρ for ἅπαντες all ὅτι that Ἕλλην Greek ὁ the πατὴρ father αὐτοῦ of him ὑπῆρχεν. was. 4 Ὡς As δὲ but διεπορεύοντο they were going through τὰς the πόλεις, cities, παρεδίδοσαν they were giving beside αὐτοῖς to them φυλάσσειν to be guarding τὰ the δόγματα decrees τὰ the κεκριμένα having been judged ὑπὸ by τῶν the ἀποστόλων apostles καὶ and πρεσβυτέρων older men τῶν the (ones) ἐν in Ἰεροσολύμοις. Jerusalem. 5 Αἱ The μὲν indeed οὖν therefore ἐκκλησίαι ecclesias ἐστερεοῦντο were being made solid τῇ to the πίστει faith καὶ and ἐπερίσσευον they were abounding τῷ to the ἀριθμῷ number καθ’ according to ἡμέραν. day.

6 Διῆλθον They went through δὲ but τὴν the Φρυγίαν Phrygia καὶ and Γαλατικὴν Galatian χώραν, country, κωλυθέντες having been forbidden ὑπὸ by τοῦ the ἁγίου holy πνεύματος spirit λαλῆσαι to speak τὸν the λόγον word ἐν in τῇ the ᾿Ασίᾳ, Asia, 7 ἐλθόντες having come δὲ but κατὰ down τὴν the Μυσίαν Mysia ἐπείραζον they were attempting εἰς into τὴν the Βιθυνίαν Bithynia πορευθῆναι to go καὶ and οὐκ not εἴασεν permitted αὐτοὺς them τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit Ἰησοῦ· of Jesus; 8 παρελθόντες having gone alongside δὲ but τὴν the Μυσίαν Mysia κατέβησαν they stepped down εἰς into Τρῳάδα. Troas. 9 καὶ And ὅραμα vision διὰ through νυκτὸς night τῷ to the Παύλῳ Paul ὤφθη, was seen, ἀνὴρ male person Μακεδών Macedonian τις some ἦν was ἑστὼς having stood καὶ and παρακαλῶν entreating αὐτὸν him καὶ and λέγων saying Διαβὰς Having stepped through εἰς into Μακεδονίαν Macedonia βοήθησον give you help ἡμῖν. to us. 10 ὡς As δὲ but τὸ the ὅραμα vision εἶδεν, he saw, εὐθέως immediately ἐζητήσαμεν we sought ἐξελθεῖν to go out εἰς into Μακεδονίαν, Macedonia, συνβιβάζοντες making go with ὅτι that προσκέκληται has called toward ἡμᾶς us ὁ the θεὸς God εὐαγγελίσασθαι to declare good news to αὐτούς. them.

11 ᾿Αναχθέντες Having been led up οὖν therefore ἀπὸ from Τρῳάδος Troas εὐθυδρομήσαμεν we ran straight course εἰς into Σαμοθρᾴκην, Samothrace, τῇ to the δὲ but ἐπιούσῃ succeeding [day] εἰς into Νέαν Nea Πόλιν, Polis, 12 κἀκεῖθεν and from there εἰς into Φιλίππους, Philippi, ἥτις which ἐστὶν is πρώτη first τῆς of the μερίδος part Μακεδονίας of Macedonia πόλις, city, κολωνία. colony. ῏Ημεν We were δὲ but ἐν in ταύτῃ this τῇ the πόλει city διατρίβοντες spending ἡμέρας days τινάς. some. 13 τῇ To the τε and ἡμέρᾳ day τῶν of the σαββάτων sabbaths ἐξήλθομεν we went out ἔξω outside τῆς the πύλης gate παρὰ beside ποταμὸν river οὗ where ἐνομίζομεν we were opining προσευχὴν prayer εἶναι, to be, καὶ and καθίσαντες having seated selves ἐλαλοῦμεν we were speaking ταῖς to the συνελθούσαις having come together γυναιξίν. women. 14 καί And τις some γυνὴ woman ὀνόματι to name Λυδία, Lydia, πορφυρόπωλις seller of purple πόλεως of city Θυατείρων Thyatira σεβομένη venerating τὸν the θεόν, God, ἤκουεν, was hearing, ἧς of whom ὁ the κύριος Lord διήνοιξεν opened wide τὴν the καρδίαν heart προσέχειν to be paying attention τοῖς to the (things) λαλουμένοις being spoken ὑπὸ by Παύλου. Paul. 15 ὡς As δὲ but ἐβαπτίσθη she was baptized καὶ and ὁ the οἶκος household αὐτῆς, of her, παρεκάλεσεν she entreated λέγουσα saying Εἰ If κεκρίκατέ YOU have judged με me πιστὴν faithful τῷ to the κυρίῳ Lord εἶναι, to be, εἰσελθόντες having entered εἰς into τὸν the οἶκόν house μου of me μένετε· be YOU remaining; καὶ and παρεβιάσατο she constrained ἡμᾶς. us.

16 ᾿Εγένετο It occurred δὲ but πορευομένων going ἡμῶν of us εἰς into τὴν the προσευχὴν prayer παιδίσκην servant girl τινὰ some ἔχουσαν having πνεῦμα spirit πύθωνα of python ὑπαντῆσαι to meet ἡμῖν, to us, ἥτις who ἐργασίαν working [profit] πολλὴν much παρεῖχεν was furnishing τοῖς to the κυρίοις lords αὐτῆς of her μαντευομένη· divining; 17 αὕτη this [girl] κατακολουθοῦσα following after τῷ to the Παύλῳ Paul καὶ and ἡμῖν to us ἔκραζεν she was crying out λέγουσα saying Οὗτοι These οἱ the ἄνθρωποι men δοῦλοι slaves τοῦ of the θεοῦ God τοῦ the ὑψίστου Most High εἰσίν, they are, οἵτινες who καταγγέλλουσιν are announcing down ὑμῖν to YOU ὁδὸν way σωτηρίας. of salvation. 18 τοῦτο This δὲ but ἐποίει she was doing ἐπὶ upon πολλὰς many ἡμέρας. days. διαπονηθεὶς Having been wearied δὲ but Παῦλος Paul καὶ and ἐπιστρέψας having turned upon τῷ to the πνεύματι spirit εἶπεν he said Παραγγέλλω I am charging σοι to you ἐν in ὀνόματι name Ἰησοῦ of Jesus Χριστοῦ Christ ἐξελθεῖν to come out ἀπ’ from αὐτῆς· her; καὶ and ἐξῆλθεν it came out αὐτῇ to very τῇ the ὥρᾳ. hour.

19 Ἰδόντες Having seen δὲ but οἱ the κύριοι lords αὐτῆς of her ὅτι that ἐξῆλθεν came out ἡ the ἐλπὶς hope τῆς of the ἐργασίας working [profit] αὐτῶν of them ἐπιλαβόμενοι having taken hold of τὸν the Παῦλον Paul καὶ and τὸν the Σίλαν Silas εἵλκυσαν they dragged εἰς into τὴν the ἀγορὰν marketplace ἐπὶ upon τοὺς the ἄρχοντας, rulers, 20 καὶ and προσαγαγόντες having led toward αὐτοὺς them τοῖς to the στρατηγοῖς praetors εἶπαν they said Οὗτοι These οἱ the ἄνθρωποι men ἐκταράσσουσιν are agitating out ἡμῶν of us τὴν the πόλιν city Ἰουδαῖοι Jews ὑπάρχοντες, existing, 21 καὶ and καταγγέλλουσιν they announce down ἔθη customs ἃ which οὐκ not ἔξεστιν it is lawful ἡμῖν to us παραδέχεσθαι to be accepting alongside οὐδὲ nor ποιεῖν to be doing Ῥωμαίοις Romans οὖσιν. being. 22 καὶ And συνεπέστη stood up together ὁ the ὄχλος crowd κατ’ down on αὐτῶν, them, καὶ and οἱ the στρατηγοὶ praetors περιρήξαντες having torn off αὐτῶν of them τὰ the ἱμάτια outer garments ἐκέλευον they were commanding ῥαβδίζειν, to be beating with rods, 23 πολλὰς many δὲ but ἐπιθέντες having imposed αὐτοῖς to them πληγὰς blows ἔβαλον they threw εἰς into φυλακήν, prison, παραγγείλαντες having charged τῷ to the δεσμοφύλακι guard of bound ones ἀσφαλῶς securely τηρεῖν to be keeping αὐτούς· them; 24 ὃς who παραγγελίαν charge τοιαύτην such λαβὼν having received ἔβαλεν he threw αὐτοὺς them εἰς into τὴν the ἐσωτέραν inner φυλακὴν prison καὶ and τοὺς the πόδας feet ἠσφαλίσατο he made secure αὐτῶν of them εἰς into τὸ the ξύλον. wood.

25 Κατὰ Down δὲ but τὸ the μεσονύκτιον midnight Παῦλος Paul καὶ and Σίλας Silas προσευχόμενοι praying ὕμνουν were praising with hymns τὸν the θεόν, God, ἐπηκροῶντο were hearing upon δὲ but αὐτῶν of them οἱ the δέσμιοι· bound (ones); 26 ἄφνω suddenly δὲ but σεισμὸς [earth] quake ἐγένετο occurred μέγας great ὥστε as-and σαλευθῆναι to be shaken τὰ the θεμέλια foundations τοῦ of the δεσμωτηρίου, place of bound ones, ἠνεῴχθησαν were opened up δὲ but παραχρῆμα instantly αἱ the θύραι doors πᾶσαι, all, καὶ and πάντων of all τὰ the δεσμὰ bonds ἀνέθη. was let go up. 27 ἔξυπνος Awakened out of sleep δὲ but γενόμενος having become ὁ the δεσμοφύλαξ guard of bound ones καὶ and ἰδὼν having seen ἀνεῳγμένας having been opened τὰς the θύρας doors τῆς of the φυλακῆς prison σπασάμενος having drawn τὴν the μάχαιραν sword ἤμελλεν he was about ἑαυτὸν himself to ἀναιρεῖν, be taking up, νομίζων opining ἐκπεφευγέναι to have fled out τοὺς the δεσμίους. bound ones. 28 ἐφώνησεν Sounded out δὲ but Παῦλος Paul μεγάλῃ to great φωνῇ voice λέγων saying Μηδὲν Nothing πράξῃς you should do σεαυτῷ to yourself κακόν, bad (thing), ἅπαντες all γάρ for ἐσμεν we are ἐνθάδε. in here. 29 αἰτήσας Having asked for δὲ but φῶτα lights εἰσεπήδησεν, he leaped in, καὶ and ἔντρομος atremble γενόμενος having become προσέπεσεν he fell toward τῷ the Παύλῳ Paul καὶ and Σίλᾳ, Silas, 30 καὶ and προαγαγὼν having led forward αὐτοὺς them ἔξω outside ἔφη he said Κύριοι, Lords, τί what με me δεῖ it is necessary ποιεῖν to be doing ἵνα in order that σωθῶ; I should be saved? 31 οἱ The (ones) δὲ but εἶπαν said Πίστευσον Believe ἐπὶ upon τὸν the κύριον Lord Ἰησοῦν, Jesus, καὶ and σωθήσῃ you will be saved σὺ you καὶ and ὁ the οἶκός household σου. of you. 32 καὶ And ἐλάλησαν they spoke αὐτῷ to him τὸν the λόγον word τοῦ of the θεοῦ God σὺν together with πᾶσι all τοῖς the (ones) ἐν in τῇ the οἰκίᾳ house αὐτοῦ. of him. 33 καὶ And παραλαβὼν having taken along αὐτοὺς them ἐν in ἐκείνῃ that τῇ the ὥρᾳ hour τῆς of the νυκτὸς night ἔλουσεν he bathed ἀπὸ from τῶν the πληγῶν, blows, καὶ and ἐβαπτίσθη he was baptized αὐτὸς he καὶ and οἱ the (ones) αὐτοῦ of him ἅπαντες all παραχρῆμα, instantly, 34 ἀναγαγών having led up τε and αὐτοὺς them εἰς into τὸν the οἶκον house παρέθηκεν he put alongside τράπεζαν, table, καὶ and ἠγαλλιάσατο he exulted πανοικεὶ with all house πεπιστευκὼς having believed τῷ to the θεῷ. God.

35 Ἡμέρας Of day δὲ but γενομένης having occurred ἀπέστειλαν sent off οἱ the στρατηγοὶ praetors τοὺς the ῥαβδούχους rod bearers λέγοντες saying ᾿Απόλυσον Release τοὺς the ἀνθρώπους men ἐκείνους. those. 36 ἀπήγγειλεν Reported back δὲ but ὁ the δεσμοφύλαξ guard of bound ones τοὺς the λόγους words πρὸς toward τὸν the Παῦλον, Paul, ὅτι that ᾿Απέσταλκαν Have sent off οἱ the στρατηγοὶ praetors ἵνα in order that ἀπολυθῆτε· YOU should be released; νῦν now οὖν therefore ἐξελθόντες having come out πορεύεσθε be going ἐν in εἰρήνῃ. peace. 37 ὁ The δὲ but Παῦλος Paul ἔφη said πρὸς toward αὐτούς them Δείραντες Having flayed ἡμᾶς us δημοσίᾳ to public [place] ἀκατακρίτους, uncondemned, ἀνθρώπους men Ῥωμαίους Romans ὑπάρχοντας, existing, ἔβαλαν they threw εἰς into φυλακήν· prison; καὶ and νῦν now λάθρᾳ secretly ἡμᾶς us ἐκβάλλουσιν; they are throwing out? οὐ Not γάρ, for, ἀλλὰ but ἐλθόντες having come αὐτοὶ they ἡμᾶς us ἐξαγαγέτωσαν. let them lead out. 38 ἀπήγγειλαν Reported back δὲ but τοῖς to the στρατηγοῖς praetors οἱ the ῥαβδοῦχοι rod bearers τὰ the ῥήματα sayings ταῦτα· these; ἐφοβήθησαν they grew fearful δὲ but ἀκούσαντες having heard ὅτι that Ῥωμαῖοί Romans εἰσιν, they are, 39 καὶ and ἐλθόντες having come παρεκάλεσαν they entreated αὐτούς, them, καὶ and ἐξαγαγόντες having led out ἠρώτων they were requesting ἀπελθεῖν to go off ἀπὸ from τῆς the πόλεως. city. 40 ἐξελθόντες Having come out δὲ but ἀπὸ from τῆς the φυλακῆς prison εἰσῆλθον they went in πρὸς toward τὴν the Λυδίαν, Lydia, καὶ and ἰδόντες having seen παρεκάλεσαν they encouraged τοὺς the ἀδελφοὺς brothers καὶ and ἐξῆλθαν. they went out.

17 Διοδεύσαντες Having made their way through δὲ but τὴν the ᾿Αμφίπολιν Amphipolis καὶ and τὴν the ᾿Απολλωνίαν Apollonia ἦλθον they came εἰς into Θεσσαλονίκην, Thessalonica, ὅπου where ἦν was συναγωγὴ synagogue τῶν of the Ἰουδαίων. Jews. 2 κατὰ According to δὲ but τὸ the (thing) εἰωθὸς accustomed τῷ to the Παύλῳ Paul εἰσῆλθεν he came in πρὸς toward αὐτοὺς them καὶ and ἐπὶ upon σάββατα sabbaths τρία three διελέξατο he reasoned αὐτοῖς to them ἀπὸ from τῶν the γραφῶν, Scriptures, 3 διανοίγων opening up thoroughly καὶ and παρατιθέμενος putting alongside ὅτι that τὸν the χριστὸν Christ ἔδει it was necessary παθεῖν to suffer καὶ and ἀναστῆναι to stand up ἐκ out of νεκρῶν, dead (ones), καὶ and ὅτι that οὗτός this ἐστιν is ὁ the χριστός, Christ, ὁ the Ἰησοῦς Jesus ὃν whom ἐγὼ I καταγγέλλω announce down ὑμῖν. to YOU. 4 καί And τινες some ἐξ out of αὐτῶν them ἐπείσθησαν were persuaded καὶ and προσεκληρώθησαν they were assigned by lot τῷ to the Παύλῳ Paul καὶ and τῷ to the Σίλᾳ, Silas, τῶν of the τε and σεβομένων reverencing Ἑλλήνων Greeks πλῆθος multitude πολὺ much γυναικῶν of women τε and τῶν of the πρώτων first (ones) οὐκ not ὀλίγαι. few.

5 Ζηλώσαντες Having become jealous δὲ but οἱ the Ἰουδαῖοι Jews καὶ and προσλαβόμενοι having taken toward themselves τῶν of the ἀγοραίων market idlers ἄνδρας male persons τινὰς some πονηροὺς wicked καὶ and ὀχλοποιήσαντες having made crowd ἐθορύβουν they were throwing into uproar τὴν the πόλιν, city, καὶ and ἐπιστάντες having stood upon τῇ the οἰκίᾳ house Ἰάσονος of Jason ἐζήτουν they were seeking αὐτοὺς them προαγαγεῖν to lead forth εἰς into τὸν the δῆμον· public; 6 μὴ not εὑρόντες having found δὲ but αὐτοὺς them ἔσυρον they were dragging Ἰάσονα Jason καί and τινας some ἀδελφοὺς brothers ἐπὶ upon τοὺς the πολιτάρχας, politarchs, βοῶντες crying aloud ὅτι that Οἱ The (ones) τὴν the οἰκουμένην inhabited (earth) ἀναστατώσαντες having upset οὗτοι these καὶ also ἐνθάδε in here πάρεισιν, are alongside, 7 οὓς whom ὑποδέδεκται has received under [roof] Ἰάσων· Jason; καὶ and οὗτοι these πάντες all ἀπέναντι in opposition to τῶν the δογμάτων decrees Καίσαρος of Caesar πράσσουσι, are doing, βασιλέα king ἕτερον different λέγοντες saying εἶναι to be Ἰησοῦν. Jesus. 8 ἐτάραξαν They agitated δὲ but τὸν the ὄχλον crowd καὶ and τοὺς the πολιτάρχας politarchs ἀκούοντας hearing ταῦτα, these (things), 9 καὶ and λαβόντες having taken τὸ the ἱκανὸν sufficient (thing) παρὰ beside τοῦ of the Ἰάσονος Jason καὶ and τῶν of the λοιπῶν leftover (ones) ἀπέλυσαν they released αὐτούς. them.

10 Οἱ The δὲ but ἀδελφοὶ brothers εὐθέως immediately διὰ through νυκτὸς night ἐξέπεμψαν they sent out τόν the τε and Παῦλον Paul καὶ and τὸν the Σίλαν Silas εἰς into Βέροιαν, Beroea, οἵτινες who παραγενόμενοι having come to be alongside εἰς into τὴν the συναγωγὴν synagogue τῶν of the Ἰουδαίων Jews ἀπῄεσαν· they went off; 11 οὗτοι these δὲ but ἦσαν were εὐγενέστεροι of better race τῶν of the (ones) ἐν in Θεσσαλονίκῃ, Thessalonica, οἵτινες who ἐδέξαντο received τὸν the λόγον word μετὰ with πάσης all προθυμίας, mental readiness, τὸ the καθ’ down ἡμέραν day ἀνακρίνοντες examining τὰς the γραφὰς Scriptures εἰ if ἔχοι it would have ταῦτα these (things) οὕτως. thus. 12 πολλοὶ Many μὲν indeed οὖν therefore ἐξ out of αὐτῶν them ἐπίστευσαν, believed, καὶ and τῶν of the Ἑλληνίδων Grecian γυναικῶν women τῶν of the εὐσχημόνων reputable καὶ also ἀνδρῶν of male persons οὐκ not ὀλίγοι. few. 13 Ὡς As δὲ but ἔγνωσαν knew οἱ the ἀπὸ from τῆς the Θεσσαλονίκης Thessalonica Ἰουδαῖοι Jews ὅτι that καὶ also ἐν in τῇ the Βεροίᾳ Beroea κατηγγέλη was published ὑπὸ by τοῦ the Παύλου Paul ὁ the λόγος word τοῦ of the θεοῦ, God, ἦλθον they came κἀκεῖ and there σαλεύοντες shaking up καὶ and ταράσσοντες agitating τοὺς the ὄχλους. crowds. 14 εὐθέως Immediately δὲ but τότε then τὸν the Παῦλον Paul ἐξαπέστειλαν sent off out οἱ the ἀδελφοὶ brothers πορεύεσθαι to be going ἕως until ἐπὶ upon τὴν the θάλασσαν· sea; ὑπέμεινάν remained behind τε and ὅ the τε and Σίλας Silas καὶ and ὁ the Τιμόθεος Timothy ἐκεῖ. there. 15 οἱ The (ones) δὲ but καθιστάνοντες conducting τὸν the Παῦλον Paul ἤγαγον they led ἕως until ᾿Αθηνῶν, Athens, καὶ and λαβόντες having received ἐντολὴν commandment πρὸς toward τὸν the Σίλαν Silas καὶ and τὸν the Τιμόθεον Timothy ἵνα in order that ὡς as τάχιστα most quickly ἔλθωσιν they should come πρὸς toward αὐτὸν him ἐξῄεσαν. they went out.

16 ᾿Εν In δὲ but ταῖς the ᾿Αθήναις Athens ἐκδεχομένου waiting for αὐτοὺς them τοῦ of the Παύλου, Paul, παρωξύνετο was being irritated τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit αὐτοῦ of him ἐν in αὐτῷ him θεωροῦντος beholding κατείδωλον full of idols οὖσαν being τὴν the πόλιν. city. 17 διελέγετο He was reasoning μὲν indeed οὖν therefore ἐν in τῇ the συναγωγῇ synagogue τοῖς to the Ἰουδαίοις Jews καὶ and τοῖς the (ones) σεβομένοις reverencing καὶ and ἐν in τῇ the ἀγορᾷ marketplace κατὰ down πᾶσαν every ἡμέραν day πρὸς toward τοὺς the (ones) παρατυγχάνοντας. happening (to be) alongside. 18 τινὲς Some δὲ but καὶ also τῶν of the ᾿Επικουρίων Epicurean καὶ and Στωικῶν Stoic φιλοσόφων philosophers συνέβαλλον were throwing together αὐτῷ, to him, καί and τινες some ἔλεγον were saying Τί What ἂν likely θέλοι would will ὁ the σπερμολόγος seed picker οὗτος this λέγειν; to be saying? οἱ The (ones) δέ, but, Ξένων Of foreign δαιμονίων demons δοκεῖ he is seeming καταγγελεὺς publisher εἶναι· to be; ὅτι because τὸν the Ἰησοῦν Jesus καὶ and τὴν the ἀνάστασιν resurrection εὐηγγελίζετο. he was declaring as good news. 19 ἐπιλαβόμενοι Having taken hold δὲ but αὐτοῦ of him ἐπὶ upon τὸν the Ἄρειον Arean Πάγον Pagos ἤγαγον, they led, λέγοντες saying Δυνάμεθα Are we able γνῶναι to know τίς what ἡ the καινὴ new αὕτη this ἡ the ὑπὸ by σοῦ you λαλουμένη being spoken διδαχή; teaching? 20 ξενίζοντα Being strange (things) γάρ for τινα some εἰσφέρεις you are importing εἰς into τὰς the ἀκοὰς hearings ἡμῶν· of us; βουλόμεθα we are wishing οὖν therefore γνῶναι to know τίνα what (things) θέλει is willing ταῦτα these (things) εἶναι. to be. 21 ᾿Αθηναῖοι Athenians δὲ but πάντες all καὶ and οἱ the ἐπιδημοῦντες sojourning ξένοι foreigners εἰς into οὐδὲν nothing ἕτερον different ηὐκαίρουν they had leisure time ἢ than λέγειν to be saying τι something ἢ or ἀκούειν to be hearing τι something καινότερον. newer. 22 σταθεὶς Having stood δὲ but Παῦλος Paul ἐν in μέσῳ middle τοῦ of the ᾿Αρείου Arean Πάγου Pagos ἔφη he said

Ἄνδρες Male persons ᾿Αθηναῖοι, Athenians, κατὰ down πάντα all (things) ὡς as δεισιδαιμονεστέρους more demon-dreading ὑμᾶς YOU θεωρῶ· I am beholding; 23 διερχόμενος going through γὰρ for καὶ and ἀναθεωρῶν beholding up τὰ the σεβάσματα objects of veneration ὑμῶν of YOU εὗρον I found καὶ also βωμὸν altar ἐν in ᾧ which ἐπεγέγραπτο it had been written upon ᾿Αγνώστῳ To Unknown Θεῷ. God. ὃ Which οὖν therefore ἀγνοοῦντες being ignorant εὐσεβεῖτε, YOU are venerating, τοῦτο this (thing) ἐγὼ I καταγγέλλω am announcing down ὑμῖν. to YOU. 24 Ὁ The θεὸς God ὁ the (one) ποιήσας having made τὸν the κόσμον world καὶ and πάντα all τὰ the (things) ἐν in αὐτῷ, it, οὗτος this (One) οὐρανοῦ of heaven καὶ and γῆς of earth ὑπάρχων existing κύριος Lord οὐκ not ἐν in χειροποιήτοις handmade ναοῖς divine habitations κατοικεῖ is inhabiting 25 οὐδὲ nor ὑπὸ by χειρῶν hands ἀνθρωπίνων human θεραπεύεται is being attended to προσδεόμενός having further need τινος, of anything, αὐτὸς he διδοὺς giving πᾶσι to all ζωὴν life καὶ and πνοὴν breath καὶ and τὰ the (things) πάντα· all; 26 ἐποίησέν he made τε and ἐξ out of ἑνὸς one πᾶν every ἔθνος nation ἀνθρώπων of men κατοικεῖν to be dwelling ἐπὶ upon παντὸς all προσώπου face τῆς of the γῆς, earth, ὁρίσας having defined προστεταγμένους having been set toward καιροὺς appointed times καὶ and τὰς the ὁροθεσίας limits τῆς of the κατοικίας dwelling αὐτῶν, of them, 27 ζητεῖν to be seeking τὸν the θεὸν God εἰ if ἄρα really γε in fact ψηλαφήσειαν they might grope for αὐτὸν him καὶ and εὕροιεν, they might find, καί and γε in fact οὐ not μακρὰν long [way] ἀπὸ from ἑνὸς one ἑκάστου each ἡμῶν of us ὑπάρχοντα. existing. 28 ἐν In αὐτῷ him γὰρ for ζῶμεν we are living καὶ and κινούμεθα we are moving καὶ and ἐσμέν, we are, ὡς as καί also τινες some τῶν of the καθ’ down ὑμᾶς YOU ποιητῶν poets εἰρήκασιν have said Τοῦ Of the (one) γὰρ for καὶ also γένος race ἐσμέν. we are.

29 γένος Race οὖν therefore ὑπάρχοντες existing τοῦ of the θεοῦ God οὐκ not ὀφείλομεν we are owing νομίζειν to be opining χρυσῷ to gold ἢ or ἀργύρῳ to silver ἢ or λίθῳ, to stone, χαράγματι to sculptured (thing) τέχνης of art καὶ and ἐνθυμήσεως of contrivance ἀνθρώπου, of man, τὸ the θεῖον divine [being] εἶναι to be ὅμοιον. like. 30 τοὺς The μὲν indeed οὖν therefore χρόνους times τῆς of the ἀγνοίας ignorance ὑπεριδὼν having overlooked ὁ the θεὸς God τὰ the (things) νῦν now ἀπαγγέλλει he is reporting τοῖς to the ἀνθρώποις men πάντας all (them) πανταχοῦ everywhere μετανοεῖν, to be repenting, 31 καθότι according to which ἔστησεν he made stand ἡμέραν day ἐν in ᾗ which μέλλει he is about κρίνειν to be judging τὴν the οἰκουμένην inhabited [earth] ἐν in δικαιοσύνῃ righteousness ἐν in ἀνδρὶ male person ᾧ to whom ὥρισεν, he defined, πίστιν faith παρασχὼν having furnished πᾶσιν to all ἀναστήσας having made stand up αὐτὸν him ἐκ out of νεκρῶν. dead (ones).

32 ἀκούσαντες Having heard δὲ but ἀνάστασιν resurrection νεκρῶν of dead (ones) οἱ the (ones) μὲν indeed ἐχλεύαζον were mocking οἱ the (ones) δὲ but εἶπαν said ᾿Ακουσόμεθά We shall hear σου of you περὶ about τούτου this καὶ also πάλιν. again. 33 οὕτως Thus ὁ the Παῦλος Paul ἐξῆλθεν made exit ἐκ out of μέσου middle αὐτῶν· of them; 34 τινὲς some δὲ but ἄνδρες male persons κολληθέντες having been glued αὐτῷ to him ἐπίστευσαν, they believed, ἐν in οἷς whom καὶ also Διονύσιος Dionysius ὁ the ᾿Αρεοπαγίτης Areopagite καὶ and γυνὴ woman ὀνόματι to name Δάμαρις Damaris καὶ and ἕτεροι different (ones) σὺν together with αὐτοῖς. them.

18 Μετὰ After ταῦτα these (things) χωρισθεὶς having been separated ἐκ out of τῶν the ᾿Αθηνῶν Athens ἦλθεν he came εἰς into Κόρινθον. Corinth. 2 καὶ And εὑρών having found τινα some Ἰουδαῖον Jew ὀνόματι to name ᾿Ακύλαν, Aquila, Ποντικὸν Pontian τῷ to the γένει, race, προσφάτως recently ἐληλυθότα having come ἀπὸ from τῆς the Ἰταλίας Italy καὶ and Πρίσκιλλαν Priscilla γυναῖκα woman αὐτοῦ of him διὰ through τὸ the διατεταχέναι to have ordered Κλαύδιον Claudius χωρίζεσθαι to be separating themselves πάντας all τοὺς the Ἰουδαίους Jews ἀπὸ from τῆς the Ῥώμης, Rome, προσῆλθεν he came toward αὐτοῖς, them, 3 καὶ and διὰ through τὸ the ὁμότεχνον similar trade εἶναι to be ἔμενεν he was remaining παρ’ beside αὐτοῖς them καὶ and ἠργάζοντο, they were working, ἦσαν they were γὰρ for σκηνοποιοὶ tentmakers τῇ to the τέχνῃ. trade. 4 διελέγετο He was reasoning δὲ but ἐν in τῇ the συναγωγῇ synagogue κατὰ down πᾶν every σάββατον, sabbath, ἔπειθέν he was persuading τε and Ἰουδαίους Jews καὶ and Ἕλληνας. Greeks.

5 Ὡς As δὲ but κατῆλθον they went down ἀπὸ from τῆς the Μακεδονίας Macedonia ὅ the τε and Σίλας Silas καὶ and ὁ the Τιμόθεος, Timothy, συνείχετο was holding himself together τῷ to the λόγῳ word ὁ the Παῦλος, Paul, διαμαρτυρόμενος thoroughly witnessing τοῖς to the Ἰουδαίοις Jews εἶναι to be τὸν the χριστὸν Christ Ἰησοῦν. Jesus, 6 ἀντιτασσομένων Of (ones) opposing δὲ but αὐτῶν of them καὶ and βλασφημούντων blaspheming ἐκτιναξάμενος having shaken out τὰ the ἱμάτια outer garments εἶπεν he said πρὸς toward αὐτούς them Τὸ The αἷμα blood ὑμῶν of YOU ἐπὶ upon τὴν the κεφαλὴν head ὑμῶν· of YOU; καθαρὸς clean ἐγώ· I; ἀπὸ from τοῦ the νῦν now εἰς into τὰ the ἔθνη nations πορεύσομαι. I shall go. 7 καὶ And μεταβὰς having stepped across ἐκεῖθεν from there ἦλθεν he came εἰς into οἰκίαν house τινὸς of someone ὀνόματι to name Τιτίου Titius Ἰούστου Justus σεβομένου venerating τὸν the θεόν, God, οὗ whose ἡ the οἰκία house ἦν was συνομοροῦσα having joint boundary τῇ to the συναγωγῇ. synagogue. 8 Κρίσπος Crispus δὲ but ὁ the ἀρχισυνάγωγος synagogue ruler ἐπίστευσεν believed τῷ to the κυρίῳ Lord σὺν together with ὅλῳ whole τῷ the οἴκῳ house (hold) αὐτοῦ, of him, καὶ and πολλοὶ many τῶν of the Κορινθίων Corinthians ἀκούοντες hearing ἐπίστευον were believing καὶ and ἐβαπτίζοντο. they were being baptized. 9 Εἶπεν Said δὲ but ὁ the κύριος Lord ἐν in νυκτὶ night δι’ through ὁράματος vision τῷ to the Παύλῳ Paul Μὴ Not φοβοῦ, be fearing, ἀλλὰ but λάλει be speaking καὶ and μὴ not σιωπήσῃς, you should be silent, 10 διότι through which ἐγώ I εἰμι am μετὰ with σοῦ you καὶ and οὐδεὶς no one ἐπιθήσεταί will set upon σοι you τοῦ of the κακῶσαί to treat badly σε, you, διότι through which λαός people ἐστί is μοι to me πολὺς much ἐν in τῇ the πόλει city ταύτῃ. this. 11 ᾿Εκάθισεν He sat down δὲ but ἐνιαυτὸν year καὶ and μῆνας months ἓξ six διδάσκων teaching ἐν in αὐτοῖς them τὸν the λόγον word τοῦ of the θεοῦ. God.

12 Γαλλίωνος Of Gallio δὲ but ἀνθυπάτου proconsul ὄντος being τῆς of the ᾿Αχαίας Achaia κατεπέστησαν stood down upon οἱ the Ἰουδαῖοι Jews ὁμοθυμαδὸν like-mindedly τῷ to the Παύλῳ Paul καὶ and ἤγαγον they led αὐτὸν him ἐπὶ upon τὸ the βῆμα, step, 13 λέγοντες saying ὅτι that Παρὰ Alongside τὸν the νόμον law ἀναπείθει is persuading up οὗτος this (one) τοὺς the ἀνθρώπους men σέβεσθαι to be venerating τὸν the θεόν. God. 14 μέλλοντος Being about δὲ but τοῦ of the Παύλου Paul ἀνοίγειν to be opening up τὸ the στόμα mouth εἶπεν said ὁ the Γαλλίων Gallio πρὸς toward τοὺς the Ἰουδαίους Jews Εἰ If μὲν indeed ἦν it was ἀδίκημά unrighteous thing τι some ἢ or ῥᾳδιούργημα readily done work πονηρόν, wicked, ὦ O Ἰουδαῖοι, Jews, κατὰ according to λόγον word ἂν likely ἀνεσχόμην I was putting up with ὑμῶν· YOU; 15 εἰ if δὲ but ζητήματά things sought ἐστιν it is περὶ about λόγου word καὶ and ὀνομάτων names καὶ and νόμου law τοῦ of the καθ’ according to ὑμᾶς, YOU, ὄψεσθε YOU will see αὐτοί· very (ones); κριτὴς judge ἐγὼ I τούτων of these (things) οὐ not βούλομαι I am wishing εἶναι. to be. 16 καὶ And ἀπήλασεν he drove off αὐτοὺς them ἀπὸ from τοῦ the βήματος. step. 17 ἐπιλαβόμενοι Having taken hold of δὲ but πάντες all (they) Σωσθένην Sosthenes τὸν the ἀρχισυνάγωγον synagogue ruler ἔτυπτον they were beating ἔμπροσθεν in front τοῦ of the βήματος· step; καὶ and οὐδὲν nothing τούτων of these (things) τῷ to the Γαλλίωνι Gallio ἔμελεν. was of concern.

18 Ὁ The δὲ but Παῦλος Paul ἔτι yet προσμείνας having further remained ἡμέρας days ἱκανὰς sufficient τοῖς to the ἀδελφοῖς brothers ἀποταξάμενος having set himself off ἐξέπλει he was sailing out εἰς into τὴν the Συρίαν, Syria, καὶ and σὺν together with αὐτῷ him Πρίσκιλλα Priscilla καὶ and ᾿Ακύλας, Aquila, κειράμενος having shorn ἐν in Κενχρεαῖς Cenchreae τὴν the κεφαλήν, head, εἶχεν he was having γὰρ for εὐχήν. vow. 19 κατήντησαν They attained down δὲ but εἰς into Ἔφεσον, Ephesus, κἀκείνους and those κατέλιπεν he left down αὐτοῦ, in that place, αὐτὸς he δὲ but εἰσελθὼν having entered εἰς into τὴν the συναγωγὴν synagogue διελέξατο he reasoned τοῖς to the Ἰουδαίοις. Jews. 20 ἐρωτώντων Requesting δὲ but αὐτῶν of them ἐπὶ upon πλείονα more χρόνον time μεῖναι to remain οὐκ not ἐπένευσεν, he gave nod upon, 21 ἀλλὰ but ἀποταξάμενος having set himself off καὶ and εἰπών having said Πάλιν Again ἀνακάμψω I shall bend back πρὸς toward ὑμᾶς YOU τοῦ of the θεοῦ God θέλοντος willing ἀνήχθη he was led up ἀπὸ from τῆς the ᾿Εφέσου, Ephesus, 22 καὶ and κατελθὼν having come down εἰς into Καισαρίαν, Caesarea, ἀναβὰς having stepped up καὶ and ἀσπασάμενος having greeted τὴν the ἐκκλησίαν, ecclesia, κατέβη he stepped down εἰς into ᾿Αντιόχειαν, Antioch,

23 καὶ and ποιήσας having made χρόνον time τινὰ some ἐξῆλθεν, he went out, διερχόμενος passing through καθεξῆς according to subsequence τὴν the Γαλατικὴν Galatian χώραν country καὶ and Φρυγίαν, Phrygia, στηρίζων confirming πάντας all τοὺς the μαθητάς. disciples.

24 Ἰουδαῖος Jew δέ but τις some ᾿Απολλὼς Apollos ὀνόματι, to name, ᾿Αλεξανδρεὺς Alexandrian τῷ to the γένει, race, ἀνὴρ male person λόγιος, eloquent, κατήντησεν he attained down εἰς into Ἔφεσον, Ephesus, δυνατὸς powerful ὢν being ἐν in ταῖς the γραφαῖς. Scriptures. 25 οὗτος This (one) ἦν was κατηχημένος having been taught by echo down τὴν the ὁδὸν way τοῦ of the κυρίου, Lord, καὶ and ζέων boiling τῷ to the πνεύματι spirit ἐλάλει he was speaking καὶ and ἐδίδασκεν he was teaching ἀκριβῶς accurately τὰ the (things) περὶ about τοῦ the Ἰησοῦ, Jesus, ἐπιστάμενος being acquainted with μόνον alone τὸ the βάπτισμα baptism Ἰωάνου. of John. 26 οὗτός This (one) τε and ἤρξατο started παρρησιάζεσθαι to be speaking boldly ἐν in τῇ the συναγωγῇ· synagogue; ἀκούσαντες having heard δὲ but αὐτοῦ of him Πρίσκιλλα Priscilla καὶ and ᾿Ακύλας Aquila προσελάβοντο took along αὐτὸν him καὶ and ἀκριβέστερον more accurately αὐτῷ to him ἐξέθεντο they expounded τὴν the ὁδὸν way τοῦ of the θεοῦ. God. 27 βουλομένου Wishing δὲ but αὐτοῦ of him διελθεῖν to go through εἰς into τὴν the ᾿Αχαίαν Achaia προτρεψάμενοι having turned forward οἱ the ἀδελφοὶ brothers ἔγραψαν wrote τοῖς to the μαθηταῖς disciples ἀποδέξασθαι to receive off αὐτόν· him; ὃς who παραγενόμενος having come to be alongside συνεβάλετο he helped πολὺ much τοῖς to the (ones) πεπιστευκόσιν having believed διὰ through τῆς the χάριτος· undeserved kindness; 28 εὐτόνως intensely γὰρ for τοῖς to the Ἰουδαίοις Jews διακατηλέγχετο he was thoroughly proving δημοσίᾳ to public [place] ἐπιδεικνὺς showing forth διὰ through τῶν the γραφῶν Scriptures εἶναι to be τὸν the χριστὸν Christ Ἰησοῦν. Jesus.

19 ᾿Εγένετο It occurred δὲ but ἐν in τῷ the τὸν the ᾿Απολλὼ Apollos εἶναι to be ἐν in Κορίνθῳ Corinth Παῦλον Paul διελθόντα having gone through τὰ the ἀνωτερικὰ upper μέρη parts ἐλθεῖν to come εἰς into Ἔφεσον Ephesus καὶ and εὑρεῖν to find τινὰς some μαθητάς, disciples, 2 εἶπέν he said τε and πρὸς toward αὐτούς them Εἰ If πνεῦμα spirit ἅγιον holy ἐλάβετε YOU received πιστεύσαντες; having believed? οἱ The (ones) δὲ but πρὸς toward αὐτόν him ᾿Αλλ’ But οὐδ’ not εἰ if πνεῦμα spirit ἅγιον holy ἔστιν is ἠκούσαμεν. we heard. 3 εἶπέν He said τε and Εἰς Into τί what οὖν therefore ἐβαπτίσθητε; were YOU baptized? οἱ The (ones) δὲ but εἶπαν said Εἰς Into τὸ the Ἰωάνου of John βάπτισμα. baptism. 4 εἶπεν Said δὲ but Παῦλος Paul Ἰωάνης John ἐβάπτισεν baptized βάπτισμα baptism μετανοίας, of repentance, τῷ to the λαῷ people λέγων saying εἰς into τὸν the (one) ἐρχόμενον coming μετ’ after αὐτὸν him ἵνα in order that πιστεύσωσιν, they should believe, τοῦτ’ this ἔστιν is εἰς into τὸν the Ἰησοῦν. Jesus. 5 ἀκούσαντες Having heard δὲ but ἐβαπτίσθησαν they were baptized εἰς into τὸ the ὄνομα name τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord Ἰησοῦ· Jesus; 6 καὶ and ἐπιθέντος having imposed αὐτοῖς to them τοῦ of the Παύλου Paul χεῖρας hands ἦλθε came τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit τὸ the ἅγιον holy ἐπ’ upon αὐτούς, them, ἐλάλουν they were speaking τε and γλώσσαις to tongues καὶ and ἐπροφήτευον. they were prophesying. 7 ἦσαν Were δὲ but οἱ the πάντες all ἄνδρες male persons ὡσεὶ as if δώδεκα. twelve.

8 Εἰσελθὼν Having entered δὲ but εἰς into τὴν the συναγωγὴν synagogue ἐπαρρησιάζετο he was speaking boldly ἐπὶ upon μῆνας months τρεῖς three διαλεγόμενος reasoning καὶ and πείθων persuading περὶ about τῆς the βασιλείας kingdom τοῦ of the θεοῦ. God. 9 ὡς As δέ but τινες some ἐσκληρύνοντο were hardening themselves καὶ and ἠπείθουν they were disobeying κακολογοῦντες saying bad τὴν the ὁδὸν way ἐνώπιον in sight τοῦ of the πλήθους, multitude, ἀποστὰς having stood off ἀπ’ from αὐτῶν them ἀφώρισεν he limited off τοὺς the μαθητάς, disciples, καθ’ down ἡμέραν day διαλεγόμενος reasoning ἐν in τῇ the σχολῇ school Τυράννου. of Tyrannus. 10 τοῦτο This δὲ but ἐγένετο occurred ἐπὶ upon ἔτη years δύο, two, ὥστε as-and πάντας all τοὺς the κατοικοῦντας inhabiting τὴν the ᾿Ασίαν Asia ἀκοῦσαι to hear τὸν the λόγον word τοῦ of the κυρίου, Lord, Ἰουδαίους Jews τε and καὶ and Ἕλληνας. Greeks.

11 Δυνάμεις Powers τε and οὐ not τὰς the τυχούσας having happened ὁ the θεὸς God ἐποίει was doing διὰ through τῶν the χειρῶν hands Παύλου, of Paul, 12 ὥστε as-and καὶ also ἐπὶ upon τοὺς the (ones) ἀσθενοῦντας being sick ἀποφέρεσθαι to be borne off ἀπὸ from τοῦ the χρωτὸς skin αὐτοῦ of him σουδάρια sweat cloths ἤ or σιμικίνθια aprons καὶ and ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι to be changing place ἀπ’ from αὐτῶν them τὰς the νόσους, diseases, τά the τε and πνεύματα spirits τὰ the πονηρὰ wicked ἐκπορεύεσθαι. to be coming out. 13 ᾿Επεχείρησαν Took in hand δέ but τινες some καὶ also τῶν of the (ones) περιερχομένων going about Ἰουδαίων Jews ἐξορκιστῶν exorcists ὀνομάζειν to be naming ἐπὶ upon τοὺς the (ones) ἔχοντας having τὰ the πνεύματα spirits τὰ the πονηρὰ wicked τὸ the ὄνομα name τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord Ἰησοῦ Jesus λέγοντες saying Ὁρκίζω I am putting under oath ὑμᾶς YOU τὸν the Ἰησοῦν Jesus ὃν whom Παῦλος Paul κηρύσσει. is preaching. 14 ἦσαν Were δέ but τινος of some Σκευᾶ Sceva Ἰουδαίου Jewish ἀρχιερέως high priest ἑπτὰ seven υἱοὶ sons τοῦτο this ποιοῦντες. doing. 15 ἀποκριθὲν Having answered δὲ but τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit τὸ the πονηρὸν wicked εἶπεν said αὐτοῖς to them Τὸν The μὲν indeed Ἰησοῦν Jesus γινώσκω I am knowing καὶ and τὸν the Παῦλον Paul ἐπίσταμαι, I am acquainted with, ὑμεῖς YOU δὲ but τίνες who ἐστέ; are YOU? 16 καὶ And ἐφαλόμενος having leaped upon ὁ the ἄνθρωπος man ἐπ’ upon αὐτοὺς them ἐν in ᾧ whom ἦν was τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit τὸ the πονηρὸν wicked κατακυριεύσας having got the mastery ἀμφοτέρων of both ἴσχυσεν exerted strength κατ’ down on αὐτῶν, them, ὥστε as-and γυμνοὺς naked καὶ and τετραυματισμένους having been wounded ἐκφυγεῖν to flee ἐκ out of τοῦ the οἴκου house ἐκείνου. that. 17 τοῦτο This δὲ but ἐγένετο became γνωστὸν known πᾶσιν to all Ἰουδαίοις Jews τε and καὶ and Ἕλλησιν Greeks τοῖς the (ones) κατοικοῦσιν inhabiting τὴν the Ἔφεσον, Ephesus, καὶ and ἐπέπεσεν fell upon φόβος fear ἐπὶ upon πάντας all αὐτούς, them, καὶ and ἐμεγαλύνετο was being magnified τὸ the ὄνομα name τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord Ἰησοῦ. Jesus. 18 πολλοί Many τε and τῶν of the (ones) πεπιστευκότων having believed ἤρχοντο were coming ἐξομολογούμενοι confessing out καὶ and ἀναγγέλλοντες announcing up τὰς the πράξεις acts αὐτῶν. of them. 19 ἱκανοὶ Sufficient δὲ but of τῶν the (ones) τὰ the περίεργα curiosities πραξάντων having practiced συνενέγκαντες having brought together τὰς the βίβλους books κατέκαιον they were burning down ἐνώπιον in sight πάντων· of all; καὶ and συνεψήφισαν computed τὰς the τιμὰς prices αὐτῶν of them καὶ and εὗρον they found ἀργυρίου of silver μυριάδας myriads πέντε. five. 20 Οὕτως Thus κατὰ down κράτος might τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord ὁ the λόγος word ηὔξανεν was growing καὶ and ἴσχυεν. it was exerting strength.

21 Ὡς As δὲ but ἐπληρώθη was fulfilled ταῦτα, these (things), ἔθετο put ὁ the Παῦλος Paul ἐν in τῷ the πνεύματι spirit διελθὼν having gone through τὴν the Μακεδονίαν Macedonia καὶ and ᾿Αχαίαν Achaia πορεύεσθαι to be going εἰς into Ἰεροσόλυμα, Jerusalem, εἰπὼν having said ὅτι that Μετὰ After τὸ the γενέσθαι to come to be με me ἐκεῖ there δεῖ it is necessary με me καὶ also Ῥώμην Rome ἰδεῖν. to see. 22 ἀποστείλας Having sent off δὲ but εἰς into τὴν the Μακεδονίαν Macedonia δύο two τῶν of the (ones) διακονούντων serving αὐτῷ, to him, Τιμόθεον Timothy καὶ and Ἔραστον, Erastus, αὐτὸς he ἐπέσχεν delayed χρόνον time εἰς into τὴν the ᾿Ασίαν. Asia.

23 ᾿Εγένετο It occurred δὲ but κατὰ down τὸν the καιρὸν appointed time ἐκεῖνον that τάραχος agitation οὐκ not ὀλίγος little περὶ about τῆς the ὁδοῦ. way. 24 Δημήτριος Demetrius γάρ for τις some ὀνόματι, to name, ἀργυροκόπος, silversmith, ποιῶν making ναοὺς divine habitations ἀργυροῦς of silver ᾿Αρτέμιδος of Artemis παρείχετο was furnishing τοῖς to the τεχνίταις artisans οὐκ not ὀλίγην little ἐργασίαν, working profit, 25 οὓς whom συναθροίσας having crowed together καὶ also τοὺς the περὶ about τὰ the τοιαῦτα such things ἐργάτας workers εἶπεν he said Ἄνδρες, Male persons, ἐπίστασθε YOU are well knowing ὅτι that ἐκ out of ταύτης this τῆς the ἐργασίας working ἡ the εὐπορία prosperity ἡμῖν to us ἐστίν, is, 26 καὶ and θεωρεῖτε YOU are beholding καὶ and ἀκούετε YOU are hearing ὅτι that οὐ not μόνον only ᾿Εφέσου of Ephesus ἀλλὰ but σχεδὸν nearly πάσης of all τῆς the ᾿Ασίας Asia ὁ the Παῦλος Paul οὗτος this πείσας having persuaded μετέστησεν made to change stand ἱκανὸν sufficient ὄχλον, crowd, λέγων saying ὅτι that οὐκ not εἰσὶν are θεοὶ gods οἱ the (ones) διὰ through χειρῶν hands γινόμενοι. coming to be. 27 οὐ Not μόνον only δὲ but τοῦτο this κινδυνεύει is in danger ἡμῖν to us τὸ the μέρος part εἰς into ἀπελεγμὸν disrepute ἐλθεῖν, to come, ἀλλὰ but καὶ also τὸ the τῆς of the μεγάλης great θεᾶς goddess ᾿Αρτέμιδος Artemis ἱερὸν temple εἰς into οὐθὲν nothing λογισθῆναι, to be rated, μέλλειν to be about τε and καὶ also καθαιρεῖσθαι to be taken down τῆς of the μεγαλειότητος magnificence αὐτῆς, of her, ἣν whom ὅλη whole ἡ the ᾿Ασία Asia καὶ and ἡ the οἰκουμένη being inhabited [earth] σέβεται. is venerating. 28 ἀκούσαντες Having heard δὲ but καὶ and γενόμενοι having become πλήρεις full θυμοῦ of anger ἔκραζον they were crying out λέγοντες saying Μεγάλη Great ἡ the Ἄρτεμις Artemis ᾿Εφεσίων. of Ephesians.

29 καὶ And ἐπλήσθη became filled ἡ the πόλις city τῆς of the συγχύσεως, confusion, ὥρμησάν they rushed τε and ὁμοθυμαδὸν like-mindedly εἰς into τὸ the θέατρον theater συναρπάσαντες having snatched up together Γαῖον Gaius καὶ and ᾿Αρίσταρχον Aristarchus Μακεδόνας, Macedonians, συνεκδήμους travelers together Παύλου. of Paul. 30 Παύλου Of Paul δὲ but βουλομένου wishing εἰσελθεῖν to enter εἰς into τὸν the δῆμον public οὐκ not εἴων were permitting αὐτὸν him οἱ the μαθηταί· disciples; 31 τινὲς some δὲ but καὶ also τῶν of the ᾿Ασιαρχῶν, Asiarchs, ὄντες being αὐτῷ to him φίλοι, friends, πέμψαντες having sent πρὸς toward αὐτὸν him παρεκάλουν they were entreating μὴ not δοῦναι to give ἑαυτὸν himself εἰς into τὸ the θέατρον. theater. 32 ἄλλοι Others μὲν indeed οὖν therefore ἄλλο other τι something ἔκραζον, were crying out, ἦν was γὰρ for ἡ the ἐκκλησία ecclesia συνκεχυμένη, having been confused, καὶ and οἱ the πλείους more (ones) οὐκ not ᾔδεισαν had known τίνος of what ἕνεκα on account of συνεληλύθεισαν. they had come together. 33 ἐκ Out of δὲ but τοῦ of the ὄχλου crowd συνεβίβασαν they together made go ᾿Αλέξανδρον Alexander προβαλόντων having thrust forward αὐτὸν him τῶν of the Ἰουδαίων, Jews, ὁ the δὲ but ᾿Αλέξανδρος Alexander κατασείσας having shaken down τὴν the χεῖρα hand ἤθελεν he was willing ἀπολογεῖσθαι to be defending himself τῷ to the δήμῳ. public. 34 ἐπιγνόντες Having recognized δὲ but ὅτι that Ἰουδαῖός Jew ἐστιν he is φωνὴ voice ἐγένετο occurred μία one ἐκ out of πάντων all ὡσεὶ as if ἐπὶ upon ὥρας hours δύο two κραζόντων crying out Μεγάλη Great ἡ the Ἄρτεμις Artemis ᾿Εφεσίων. of Ephesians.

35 Καταστείλας Having sent down δὲ but τὸν the ὄχλον crowd ὁ the γραμματεύς scribe φησιν is saying Ἄνδρες Male persons ᾿Εφέσιοι, Ephesians, τίς who γάρ for ἐστιν is ἀνθρώπων of men ὃς who οὐ not γινώσκει is knowing τὴν the ᾿Εφεσίων of Ephesians πόλιν city νεωκόρον temple keeper οὖσαν being τῆς of the μεγάλης great ᾿Αρτέμιδος Artemis καὶ and τοῦ of the (one) διοπετοῦς; fallen from Zeus? 36 ἀναντιρήτων Uncontradictable οὖν therefore ὄντων being τούτων of these (things) δέον binding ἐστὶν it is ὑμᾶς YOU κατεσταλμένους having been sent down ὑπάρχειν to be καὶ and μηδὲν nothing προπετὲς rash πράσσειν. to be performing. 37 ἠγάγετε YOU led γὰρ for τοὺς the ἄνδρας male persons τούτους these (ones) οὔτε neither ἱεροσύλους temple plunderers οὔτε nor βλασφημοῦντας blaspheming τὴν the θεὸν goddess ἡμῶν. of us. 38 εἰ If μὲν indeed οὖν therefore Δημήτριος Demetrius καὶ and οἱ the (ones) σὺν together with αὐτῷ him τεχνῖται artisans ἔχουσιν are having πρός toward τινα anyone λόγον, word, ἀγοραῖοι forum [days] ἄγονται are being led καὶ and ἀνθύπατοί proconsuls εἰσιν, are, ἐγκαλείτωσαν let them bring charges against ἀλλήλοις. one another. 39 εἰ If δέ but τι anything περαιτέρω more beyond ἐπιζητεῖτε, YOU are seeking upon, ἐν in τῇ the ἐννόμῳ lawful ἐκκλησίᾳ ecclesia ἐπιλυθήσεται. it will be loosened upon. 40 καὶ And γὰρ for κινδυνεύομεν we are in danger ἐγκαλεῖσθαι to be being charged with στάσεως of standing περὶ about τῆς the (one) σήμερον today μηδενὸς of not one αἰτίου cause ὑπάρχοντος, existing, περὶ about οὗ which οὐ not δυνησόμεθα we will be able ἀποδοῦναι to give off λόγον word περὶ about τῆς the συστροφῆς turning together ταύτης. this. 41 καὶ And ταῦτα these (things) εἰπὼν having said ἀπέλυσεν he loosed off τὴν the ἐκκλησίαν. ecclesia.

20 Μετὰ After δὲ but τὸ the παύσασθαι to cease τὸν the θόρυβον uproar μεταπεμψάμενος having sent after (to him) ὁ the Παῦλος Paul τοὺς the μαθητὰς disciples καὶ and παρακαλέσας having encouraged ἀσπασάμενος having greeted ἐξῆλθεν he went out πορεύεσθαι to be going εἰς into Μακεδονίαν. Macedonia. 2 διελθὼν Having gone through δὲ but τὰ the μέρη parts ἐκεῖνα those καὶ and παρακαλέσας having encouraged αὐτοὺς them λόγῳ to word πολλῷ much ἦλθεν he came εἰς into τὴν the Ἑλλάδα, Greece, 3 ποιήσας having done τε and μῆνας months τρεῖς three γενομένης having occurred ἐπιβουλῆς of plot αὐτῷ to him ὑπὸ by τῶν the Ἰουδαίων Jews μέλλοντι being about ἀνάγεσθαι to be being led up εἰς into τὴν the Συρίαν Syria ἐγένετο he became γνώμης of mental view τοῦ of the ὑποστρέφειν to be returning διὰ through Μακεδονίας. Macedonia. 4 συνείπετο Was following with δὲ but αὐτῷ to him Σώπατρος Sopater Πύρρου of Pyrrhus Βεροιαῖος, Berean, Θεσσαλονικέων of Thessalonians δὲ but ᾿Αρίσταρχος Aristarchus καὶ and Σέκουνδος, Secundus, καὶ and Γαῖος Gaius Δερβαῖος Derbaean καὶ and Τιμόθεος, Timothy, ᾿Ασιανοὶ Asians δὲ but Τύχικος Tychicus καὶ and Τρόφιμος· Trophimus; 5 οὗτοι these δὲ but προσελθόντες having come toward ἔμενον were remaining for ἡμᾶς us ἐν in Τρῳάδι· Troas; 6 ἡμεῖς we δὲ but ἐξεπλεύσαμεν sailed out μετὰ after τὰς the ἡμέρας days τῶν of the ἀζύμων unfermented [cakes] ἀπὸ from Φιλίππων, Philippi, καὶ and ἤλθομεν we came πρὸς toward αὐτοὺς them εἰς into τὴν the Τρῳάδα Troas ἄχρι until ἡμερῶν days πέντε, five, οὗ where διετρίψαμεν we spent through ἡμέρας days ἑπτά. seven.

7 ᾿Εν In δὲ but τῇ the μιᾷ one τῶν of the σαββάτων sabbaths συνηγμένων having been led together ἡμῶν of us κλάσαι to break ἄρτον bread ὁ the Παῦλος Paul διελέγετο was discoursing αὐτοῖς, to them, μέλλων being about ἐξιέναι to be going out τῇ to the ἐπαύριον, morrow, παρέτεινέν he extended alongside τε and τὸν the λόγον word μέχρι until μεσονυκτίου. midnight. 8 ἦσαν Were δὲ but λαμπάδες lamps ἱκαναὶ sufficient ἐν in τῷ the ὑπερῴῳ upper chamber οὗ where ἦμεν we were συνηγμένοι· having been led together; 9 καθεζόμενος sitting δέ but τις some νεανίας young man ὀνόματι to name Εὔτυχος Eutychus ἐπὶ upon τῆς the θυρίδος, window, καταφερόμενος being borne down ὕπνῳ to sleep βαθεῖ deep διαλεγομένου discoursing τοῦ of the Παύλου Paul ἐπὶ upon πλεῖον, more [time], κατενεχθεὶς having been borne down ἀπὸ from τοῦ the ὕπνου sleep ἔπεσεν he fell ἀπὸ from τοῦ the τριστέγου third story κάτω downward καὶ and ἤρθη he was lifted up νεκρός. dead. 10 καταβὰς Having stepped down δὲ but ὁ the Παῦλος Paul ἐπέπεσεν fell upon αὐτῷ him καὶ and συνπεριλαβὼν having embraced εἶπεν he said Μὴ Not θορυβεῖσθε, be YOU being troubled, ἡ the γὰρ for ψυχὴ soul αὐτοῦ of him ἐν in αὐτῷ him ἐστίν. is. 11 ἀναβὰς Having stepped up δὲ but καὶ and κλάσας having broken τὸν the ἄρτον bread καὶ and γευσάμενος having tasted ἐφ’ upon ἱκανόν sufficient [time] τε and ὁμιλήσας having conversed ἄχρι until αὐγῆς daybreak οὕτως thus ἐξῆλθεν. he went out. 12 ἤγαγον They led δὲ but τὸν the παῖδα boy ζῶντα, living, καὶ and παρεκλήθησαν they were comforted οὐ not μετρίως. measurably.

13 Ἡμεῖς We δὲ but προελθόντες having gone before ἐπὶ upon τὸ the πλοῖον boat ἀνήχθημεν we were led up ἐπὶ upon τὴν the Ἄσσον, Assos, ἐκεῖθεν from there μέλλοντες being about ἀναλαμβάνειν to be taking up τὸν the Παῦλον, Paul, οὕτως thus γὰρ for διατεταγμένος having been ordered ἦν he was μέλλων being about αὐτὸς he πεζεύειν. to be going on foot. 14 ὡς As δὲ but συνέβαλλεν he threw together ἡμῖν to us εἰς into τὴν the Ἄσσον, Assos, ἀναλαβόντες having taken up αὐτὸν him ἤλθομεν we came εἰς into Μιτυλήνην, Mitylene, 15 κἀκεῖθεν and from there ἀποπλεύσαντες having sailed off τῇ to the ἐπιούσῃ succeeding [day] κατηντήσαμεν we met down ἄντικρυς opposite Χίου, of Chios, τῇ to the δὲ but ἑτέρᾳ different (day) παρεβάλομεν we threw alongside εἰς into Σάμον, Samos, τῇ to the δὲ but ἐχομένῃ being next [day] ἤλθομεν we came εἰς into Μίλητον· Miletus; 16 κεκρίκει had judged γὰρ for ὁ the Παῦλος Paul παραπλεῦσαι to sail past τὴν the Ἔφεσον, Ephesus, ὅπως so that μὴ not γένηται it might occur αὐτῷ to him χρονοτριβῆσαι to spend time ἐν in τῇ the ᾿Ασίᾳ, Asia, ἔσπευδεν he was hastening γὰρ for εἰ if δυνατὸν possible εἴη it might be αὐτῷ to him τὴν the ἡμέραν day τῆς of the πεντηκοστῆς Pentecost γενέσθαι to come to be εἰς into Ἰεροσόλυμα. Jerusalem.

17 ᾿Απὸ From δὲ but τῆς the Μιλήτου Miletus πέμψας having sent εἰς into Ἔφεσον Ephesus μετεκαλέσατο he called after (to him) τοὺς the πρεσβυτέρους older men τῆς of the ἐκκλησίας. ecclesia. 18 ὡς As δὲ but παρεγένοντο they came to be alongside πρὸς toward αὐτὸν him εἶπεν he said αὐτοῖς to them Ὑμεῖς YOU ἐπίστασθε well know ἀπὸ from πρώτης first ἡμέρας day ἀφ’ from ἧς which ἐπέβην I stepped upon εἰς into τὴν the ᾿Ασίαν Asia πῶς how μεθ’ with ὑμῶν YOU τὸν the πάντα all χρόνον time ἐγενόμην I came to be 19 δουλεύων slaving τῷ to the κυρίῳ Lord μετὰ with πάσης all ταπεινοφροσύνης lowliness of mind καὶ and δακρύων tears καὶ and πειρασμῶν trials τῶν the (ones) συμβάντων having stepped together μοι to me ἐν in ταῖς the ἐπιβουλαῖς plots τῶν of the Ἰουδαίων· Jews; 20 ὡς as οὐδὲν nothing ὑπεστειλάμην I drew back τῶν of the συμφερόντων (things) bearing together τοῦ of the μὴ not ἀναγγεῖλαι to recount ὑμῖν to YOU καὶ and διδάξαι to teach ὑμᾶς YOU δημοσίᾳ to public [place] καὶ and κατ’ according to οἴκους, houses, 21 διαμαρτυρόμενος witnessing through about Ἰουδαίοις to Jews τε and καὶ and Ἕλλησιν to Greeks τὴν the εἰς into θεὸν God μετάνοιαν repentance καὶ and πίστιν faith εἰς into τὸν the κύριον Lord ἡμῶν of us Ἰησοῦν. Jesus. 22 καὶ And νῦν now ἰδοὺ look! δεδεμένος having been bound ἐγὼ I τῷ to the πνεύματι spirit πορεύομαι I am going εἰς into Ἰερουσαλήμ, Jerusalem, τὰ the (things) ἐν in αὐτῇ it συναντήσοντα about to meet together ἐμοὶ to me μὴ not εἰδώς, having known, 23 πλὴν besides ὅτι that τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit τὸ the ἅγιον holy κατὰ down πόλιν city διαμαρτύρεταί witnesses through μοι to me λέγον saying ὅτι that δεσμὰ bonds καὶ and θλίψεις tribulations με me μένουσιν· are remaining for; 24 ἀλλ’ but οὐδενὸς of not one λόγου word ποιοῦμαι I am making τὴν the ψυχὴν soul τιμίαν valuable ἐμαυτῷ to myself ὡς as τελειώσω I should perfect τὸν the δρόμον course μου of me καὶ and τὴν the διακονίαν service ἣν which ἔλαβον I received παρὰ beside τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord Ἰησοῦ, Jesus, διαμαρτύρασθαι to witness thoroughly to τὸ the εὐαγγέλιον good news τῆς of the χάριτος undeserved kindness τοῦ of the θεοῦ. God.

25 καὶ And νῦν now ἰδοὺ look! ἐγὼ I οἶδα have known ὅτι that οὐκέτι not yet ὄψεσθε YOU will see τὸ the πρόσωπόν face μου of me ὑμεῖς YOU πάντες all ἐν in οἷς whom διῆλθον I went through κηρύσσων preaching τὴν the βασιλείαν· kingdom; 26 διότι through which μαρτύρομαι I am witnessing ὑμῖν to YOU ἐν in τῇ the σήμερον today’s ἡμέρᾳ day ὅτι that καθαρός clean εἰμι I am ἀπὸ from τοῦ the αἵματος blood πάντων, of all (ones), 27 οὐ not γὰρ for ὑπεστειλάμην I drew back τοῦ of the μὴ not ἀναγγεῖλαι to recount πᾶσαν all τὴν the βουλὴν counsel τοῦ of the θεοῦ God ὑμῖν. to YOU. 28 προσέχετε Be YOU paying attention ἑαυτοῖς to selves καὶ and παντὶ to all τῷ the ποιμνίῳ, flock, ἐν in ᾧ which ὑμᾶς YOU τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit τὸ the ἅγιον holy ἔθετο put ἐπισκόπους, overseers, ποιμαίνειν to be shepherding τὴν the ἐκκλησίαν ecclesia τοῦ of the θεοῦ, God, ἣν which περιεποιήσατο he reserved for self διὰ through τοῦ the αἵματος blood τοῦ of the ἰδίου. own (one). 29 ἐγὼ I οἶδα have known ὅτι that εἰσελεύσονται will enter μετὰ after τὴν the ἄφιξίν going off μου of me λύκοι wolves βαρεῖς heavy εἰς into ὑμᾶς YOU μὴ not φειδόμενοι sparing τοῦ of the ποιμνίου, flock, 30 καὶ and ἐξ out of ὑμῶν YOU αὐτῶν very ones ἀναστήσονται will stand up ἄνδρες male persons λαλοῦντες speaking διεστραμμένα having been twisted (things) τοῦ of the ἀποσπᾷν to be drawing off τοὺς the μαθητὰς disciples ὀπίσω behind ἑαυτῶν· themselves;

31 διὸ through which γρηγορεῖτε, be YOU keeping awake, μνημονεύοντες remembering ὅτι that τριετίαν three-year period νύκτα night καὶ and ἡμέραν day οὐκ not ἐπαυσάμην I ceased μετὰ with δακρύων tears νουθετῶν admonishing ἕνα one ἕκαστον. each. 32 καὶ And τὰ the (things) νῦν now παρατίθεμαι I am putting alongside ὑμᾶς YOU τῷ to the κυρίῳ Lord καὶ and τῷ to the λόγῳ word τῆς of the χάριτος undeserved kindness αὐτοῦ of him τῷ to the (one) δυναμένῳ being able οἰκοδομῆσαι to build καὶ and δοῦναι to give τὴν the κληρονομίαν inheritance ἐν in τοῖς the (ones) ἡγιασμένοις having been sanctified πᾶσιν. all. 33 ἀργυρίου Of silver ἢ or χρυσίου of gold ἢ or ἱματισμοῦ of apparel οὐδενὸς of no one ἐπεθύμησα· I coveted; 34 αὐτοὶ very ones γινώσκετε YOU are knowing ὅτι that ταῖς to the χρείαις needs μου of me καὶ and τοῖς to the (ones) οὖσι being μετ’ with ἐμοῦ me ὑπηρέτησαν ministered αἱ the χεῖρες hands αὗται. very. 35 πάντα All (things) ὑπέδειξα I exhibited ὑμῖν to YOU ὅτι that οὕτως thus κοπιῶντας laboring δεῖ it is necessary ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι to be assisting τῶν of the (ones) ἀσθενούντων, being weak, μνημονεύειν to be remembering τε and τῶν of the λόγων words τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord Ἰησοῦ Jesus ὅτι that αὐτὸς he εἶπεν said Μακάριόν Happy ἐστιν it is μᾶλλον rather διδόναι to be giving ἢ than λαμβάνειν. to be receiving.

36 καὶ And ταῦτα these (things) εἰπὼν having said θεὶς having put τὰ the γόνατα knees αὐτοῦ of him σὺν together with πᾶσιν all αὐτοῖς them προσηύξατο. he prayed. 37 ἱκανὸς Sufficient δὲ but κλαυθμὸς weeping ἐγένετο occurred πάντων, of all, καὶ and ἐπιπεσόντες having fallen ἐπὶ upon τὸν the τράχηλον neck τοῦ of the Παύλου Paul κατεφίλουν they were kissing down αὐτόν, him, 38 ὀδυνώμενοι being pained μάλιστα the rather ἐπὶ upon τῷ the λόγῳ word ᾧ to which εἰρήκει he had spoken ὅτι that οὐκέτι not yet μέλλουσιν they are about τὸ the πρόσωπον face αὐτοῦ of him θεωρεῖν. to be beholding. προέπεμπον They were sending before δὲ but αὐτὸν him εἰς into τὸ the πλοῖον. boat.

21 Ὡς As δὲ but ἐγένετο it occurred ἀναχθῆναι to be led up ἡμᾶς us ἀποσπασθέντας having been drawn away ἀπ’ from αὐτῶν, them, εὐθυδρομήσαντες having run straight course ἤλθομεν we came εἰς into τὴν the Κῶ, Cos, τῇ to the [day] δὲ but ἑξῆς of succession εἰς into τὴν the Ῥόδον, Rhodes, κακεῖθεν and from there εἰς into Πάταρα· Patara; 2 καὶ and εὑρόντες having found πλοῖον boat διαπερῶν passing through εἰς into Φοινίκην Phoenicia ἐπιβάντες having stepped upon ἀνήχθημεν. we were led up. 3 ἀναφάναντες Having made appear up δὲ but τὴν the Κύπρον Cyprus καὶ and καταλιπόντες having left down αὐτὴν it εὐώνυμον left [hand] ἐπλέομεν we were sailing εἰς into Συρίαν, Syria, καὶ and κατήλθομεν we came down εἰς into Τύρον, Tyre, ἐκεῖσε thither γὰρ for τὸ the πλοῖον boat ἦν was ἀποφορτιζόμενον unloading itself τὸν the γόμον. cargo. 4 ἀνευρόντες Having found up δὲ but τοὺς the μαθητὰς disciples ἐπεμείναμεν we remained upon αὐτοῦ in that place ἡμέρας days ἑπτά, seven, οἵτινες who τῷ to the Παύλῳ Paul ἔλεγον they were saying διὰ through τοῦ the πνεύματος spirit μὴ not ἐπιβαίνειν to be stepping upon εἰς into Ἰεροσόλυμα. Jerusalem. 5 ὅτε When δὲ but ἐγένετο it occurred ἐξαρτίσαι to complete ἡμᾶς us τὰς the ἡμέρας, days, ἐξελθόντες having gone out ἐπορευόμεθα we were going προπεμπόντων sending before ἡμᾶς us πάντων of all σὺν together with γυναιξὶ women καὶ and τέκνοις children ἕως until ἔξω outside τῆς of the πόλεως, city, καὶ and θέντες having put τὰ the γόνατα knees ἐπὶ upon τὸν the αἰγιαλὸν beach προσευξάμενοι having prayed 6 ἀπησπασάμεθα we exchange parting greetings to ἀλλήλους, one another καὶ and ἐνέβημεν we stepped in εἰς into τὸ the πλοῖον, boat, ἐκεῖνοι those δὲ but ὑπέστρεψαν returned εἰς into τὰ their ἴδια. own (things).

7 Ἡμεῖς We δὲ but τὸν the πλοῦν sailing διανύσαντες having entirely performed ἀπὸ from Τύρου Tyre κατηντήσαμεν we attained down εἰς into Πτολεμαΐδα, Ptolemais, καὶ and ἀσπασάμενοι having greeted τοὺς the ἀδελφοὺς brothers ἐμείναμεν we remained ἡμέραν day μίαν one παρ’ beside αὐτοῖς. them. 8 τῇ To the δὲ but ἐπαύριον morrow ἐξελθόντες having gone out ἤλθαμεν we came εἰς into Καισαρίαν, Caesarea, καὶ and εἰσελθόντες having entered εἰς into τὸν the οἶκον house Φιλίππου of Philip τοῦ the εὐαγγελιστοῦ evangelist ὄντος being ἐκ out of τῶν the ἑπτὰ seven ἐμείναμεν we remained παρ’ beside αὐτῷ. him. 9 τούτῳ To this (one) δὲ but ἦσαν were θυγατέρες daughters τέσσαρες four παρθένοι virgins προφητεύουσαι. prophesying. 10 ᾿Επιμενόντων Of (ones) remaining upon δὲ but ἡμέρας days πλείους more κατῆλθέν came down τις some ἀπὸ from τῆς the Ἰουδαίας Judea προφήτης prophet ὀνόματι to name Ἄγαβος, Agabus, 11 καὶ and ἐλθὼν having come πρὸς toward ἡμᾶς us καὶ and ἄρας having lifted τὴν the ζώνην girdle τοῦ of the Παύλου Paul δήσας having bound ἑαυτοῦ of himself τοὺς the πόδας feet καὶ and τὰς the χεῖρας hands εἶπεν he said Τάδε These λέγει is saying τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit τὸ the ἅγιον holy Τὸν The ἄνδρα male person οὗ of whom ἐστὶν is ἡ the ζώνη girdle αὕτη this οὕτως thus δήσουσιν will bind ἐν in Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem οἱ the Ἰουδαῖοι Jews καὶ and παραδώσουσιν will give beside εἰς into χεῖρας hands ἐθνῶν. of nations. 12 ὡς As δὲ but ἠκούσαμεν we heard ταῦτα, these (things), παρεκαλοῦμεν we entreated ἡμεῖς we τε and καὶ and οἱ the ἐντόπιοι (ones) in the place τοῦ of the μὴ not ἀναβαίνειν to be stepping up αὐτὸν him εἰς into Ἰερουσαλήμ. Jerusalem. 13 τότε Then ἀπεκρίθη answered ὁ the Παῦλος Paul Τί What ποιεῖτε are YOU doing κλαίοντες weeping καὶ and συνθρύπτοντές crushing together μου of me τὴν the καρδίαν; heart? ἐγὼ I γὰρ for οὐ not μόνον only δεθῆναι to be bound ἀλλὰ but καὶ also ἀποθανεῖν to die εἰς into Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem ἑτοίμως readily ἔχω I am having ὑπὲρ over τοῦ the ὀνόματος name τοῦ of the κυρίου Lord Ἰησοῦ. Jesus. 14 μὴ Not πειθομένου being persuaded δὲ but αὐτοῦ of him ἡσυχάσαμεν we became silent εἰπόντες having said Τοῦ Of the κυρίου Lord τὸ the θέλημα will γινέσθω. let be occurring.

15 Μετὰ After δὲ but τὰς the ἡμέρας days ταύτας these ἐπισκευασάμενοι having put baggage on selves ἀνεβαίνομεν we were going up εἰς into Ἰεροσόλυμα· Jerusalem; 16 συνῆλθον they came with δὲ but καὶ also τῶν of the μαθητῶν disciples ἀπὸ from Καισαρίας Caesarea σὺν together with ἡμῖν, us, ἄγοντες leading παρ’ beside ᾧ whom ξενισθῶμεν we might be received as strangers Μνάσωνί to Mnason τινι some Κυπρίῳ, Cyprian, ἀρχαίῳ original μαθητῇ. disciple. 17 Γενομένων Having come to be δὲ but ἡμῶν of us εἰς into Ἰεροσόλυμα Jerusalem ἀσμένως gladly ἀπεδέξαντο received from ἡμᾶς us οἱ the ἀδελφοί. brothers. 18 τῇ To the δὲ but ἐπιούσῃ succeeding [day] εἰσῄει had gone in ὁ the Παῦλος Paul σὺν together with ἡμῖν us πρὸς toward Ἰάκωβον, James, πάντες all τε and παρεγένοντο came to be alongside οἱ the πρεσβύτεροι. older men. 19 καὶ And ἀσπασάμενος having greeted αὐτοὺς them ἐξηγεῖτο he was thoroughly relating καθ’ according to ἓν one (thing) ἕκαστον each ὧν of which ἐποίησεν did ὁ the θεὸς God ἐν in τοῖς the ἔθνεσιν nations διὰ through τῆς the διακονίας service αὐτοῦ. of him.

20 οἱ The (ones) δὲ but ἀκούσαντες having heard ἐδόξαζον were glorifying τὸν the θεόν, God, εἶπάν they said τε and αὐτῷ to him Θεωρεῖς, YOU are beholding, ἀδελφέ, brother, πόσαι how many μυριάδες myriads εἰσὶν are ἐν in τοῖς the Ἰουδαίοις Jews τῶν of the (ones) πεπιστευκότων, having believed, καὶ and πάντες all ζηλωταὶ zealots τοῦ of the νόμου Law ὑπάρχουσιν· they are; 21 κατηχήθησαν they were taught by echo down δὲ but περὶ about σοῦ you ὅτι that ἀποστασίαν apostasy διδάσκεις you are teaching ἀπὸ from Μωυσέως Moses τοὺς the (ones) κατὰ down τὰ the ἔθνη nations πάντας all Ἰουδαίους, Jews, λέγων saying μὴ not περιτέμνειν to be circumcising αὐτοὺς them τὰ the τέκνα children μηδὲ not-but τοῖς to the ἔθεσιν customs περιπατεῖν. to be walking about. 22 τί What οὖν therefore ἐστίν; is it? πάντως By all means ἀκούσονται they will hear ὅτι that ἐλήλυθας. you have come. 23 τοῦτο This οὖν therefore ποίησον do ὅ which (thing) σοι to you λέγομεν· we are saying; εἰσὶν are ἡμῖν to us ἄνδρες male persons τέσσαρες four εὐχὴν vow ἔχοντες having ἀφ’ from ἑαυτῶν. themselves. 24 τούτους These παραλαβὼν having taken along ἁγνίσθητι be purified σὺν together with αὐτοῖς them καὶ and δαπάνησον spend ἐπ’ upon αὐτοῖς them ἵνα in order that ξυρήσονται they will shave τὴν the κεφαλήν, head, καὶ and γνώσονται will know πάντες all ὅτι that ὧν of which (things) κατήχηνται they have been taught by echo down περὶ about σοῦ you οὐδὲν nothing ἔστιν, it is, ἀλλὰ but στοιχεῖς you are walking orderly καὶ also αὐτὸς very one φυλάσσων guarding τὸν the νόμον. Law. 25 περὶ About δὲ but τῶν of the πεπιστευκότων having believed ἐθνῶν nations ἡμεῖς we ἀπεστείλαμεν sent off κρίναντες having judged φυλάσσεσθαι to be guarding selves αὐτοὺς them τό the τε and εἰδωλόθυτον idol sacrifice καὶ and αἷμα blood καὶ and πνικτὸν (thing) strangled καὶ and πορνείαν. fornication.

26 τότε Then ὁ the Παῦλος Paul παραλαβὼν having taken along τοὺς the ἄνδρας male persons τῇ to the ἐχομένῃ being next ἡμέρᾳ day σὺν together with αὐτοῖς them ἁγνισθεὶς having been purified εἰσῄει he had entered εἰς into τὸ the ἱερόν, temple, διαγγέλλων publishing τὴν the ἐκπλήρωσιν fulfillment τῶν of the ἡμερῶν days τοῦ of the ἁγνισμοῦ purification ἕως until οὗ which προσηνέχθη was offered ὑπὲρ over ἑνὸς one ἑκάστου each αὐτῶν of them ἡ the προσφορά. offering.

27 Ὡς As δὲ but ἔμελλον were being about αἱ the ἑπτὰ seven ἡμέραι days συντελεῖσθαι, to be concluded, οἱ the ἀπὸ from τῆς the ᾿Ασίας Asia Ἰουδαῖοι Jews θεασάμενοι having viewed αὐτὸν him ἐν in τῷ the ἱερῷ temple συνέχεον they were confusing πάντα all τὸν the ὄχλον crowd καὶ and ἐπέβαλαν they imposed ἐπ’ upon αὐτὸν him τὰς the χεῖρας, hands, 28 κράζοντες crying out Ἄνδρες Male persons Ἰσραηλεῖται, Israelites, βοηθεῖτε· be YOU helping; οὗτός this ἐστιν is ὁ the ἄνθρωπος man ὁ the (one) κατὰ down on τοῦ the λαοῦ people καὶ and τοῦ the νόμου Law καὶ and τοῦ the τόπου place τούτου this πάντας all (ones) πανταχῇ everywhere διδάσκων, teaching, ἔτι yet τε and καὶ also Ἕλληνας Greeks εἰσήγαγεν he led in εἰς into τὸ the ἱερὸν temple καὶ and κεκοίνωκεν he has made common τὸν the ἅγιον holy τόπον place τοῦτον. this. 29 ἦσαν They were γὰρ for προεωρακότες having previously seen Τρόφιμον Trophimus τὸν the ᾿Εφέσιον Ephesian ἐν in τῇ the πόλει city σὺν together with αὐτῷ, him, ὃν whom ἐνόμιζον they opined ὅτι that εἰς into τὸ the ἱερὸν temple εἰσήγαγεν led in ὁ the Παῦλος. Paul. 30 ἐκινήθη Was set in motion τε and ἡ the πόλις city ὅλη whole καὶ and ἐγένετο occurred συνδρομὴ running together τοῦ of the λαοῦ, people, καὶ and ἐπιλαβόμενοι having laid hold τοῦ of the Παύλου Paul εἷλκον they were dragging αὐτὸν him ἔξω outside τοῦ of the ἱεροῦ, temple, καὶ and εὐθέως immediately ἐκλείσθησαν were closed αἱ the θύραι. doors. 31 Ζητούντων Of (ones) seeking τε and αὐτὸν him ἀποκτεῖναι to kill ἀνέβη stepped up φάσις showing τῷ to the χιλιάρχῳ chiliarch τῆς of the σπείρης band ὅτι that ὅλη whole συνχύννεται is being confused Ἰερουσαλήμ, Jerusalem, 32 ὃς who ἐξαυτῆς out of very [hour] παραλαβὼν having taken along στρατιώτας soldiers καὶ and ἑκατοντάρχας centurions κατέδραμεν he ran down ἐπ’ upon αὐτούς, them, οἱ the (ones) δὲ but ἰδόντες having seen τὸν the χιλίαρχον chiliarch καὶ and τοὺς the στρατιώτας soldiers ἐπαύσαντο they ceased τύπτοντες beating τὸν the Παῦλον. Paul.

33 τότε Then ἐγγίσας having come near ὁ the χιλίαρχος chiliarch ἐπελάβετο laid hold αὐτοῦ of him καὶ and ἐκέλευσε he commanded δεθῆναι to be bound ἁλύσεσι to chains δυσί, two, καὶ and ἐπυνθάνετο he was inquiring τίς who εἴη he may be καὶ and τί what ἐστιν he is πεποιηκώς· having done; 34 ἄλλοι others δὲ but ἄλλο another τι something ἐπεφώνουν were sounding upon ἐν in τῷ the ὄχλῳ· crowd; μὴ not δυναμένου being able δὲ but αὐτοῦ of him γνῶναι to know τὸ the ἀσφαλὲς steady (thing) διὰ through τὸν the θόρυβον tumult ἐκέλευσεν he commanded ἄγεσθαι to be led αὐτὸν him εἰς into τὴν the παρεμβολήν. encampment. 35 ὅτε When δὲ but ἐγένετο he came to be ἐπὶ upon τοὺς the ἀναβαθμούς, steps up, συνέβη it stepped together βαστάζεσθαι to be being carried αὐτὸν him ὑπὸ by τῶν the στρατιωτῶν soldiers διὰ through τὴν the βίαν violence τοῦ of the ὄχλου, crowd, 36 ἠκολούθει was following γὰρ for τὸ the πλῆθος multitude τοῦ of the λαοῦ people κράζοντες crying out Αἶρε Lift up αὐτόν. him.

37 Μέλλων Being about τε and εἰσάγεσθαι to be led in εἰς into τὴν the παρεμβολὴν encampment ὁ the Παῦλος Paul λέγει is saying τῷ to the χιλιάρχῳ chiliarch Εἰ If ἔξεστίν it is lawful μοι to me εἰπεῖν to say τι something πρὸς toward σέ; you? ὁ The (one) δὲ but ἔφη said Ἑλληνιστὶ In Greek γινώσκεις; you are knowing? 38 οὐκ Not ἄρα really σὺ you εἶ are ὁ the Αἰγύπτιος Egyptian ὁ the (one) πρὸ before τούτων these τῶν the ἡμερῶν days ἀναστατώσας having stirred up sedition καὶ and ἐξαγαγὼν having led out εἰς into τὴν the ἔρημον desolate [place] τοὺς the τετρακισχιλίους four thousand ἄνδρας male persons τῶν of the σικαρίων; Sicarii? 39 εἶπεν Said δὲ but ὁ the Παῦλος Paul ᾿Εγὼ I ἄνθρωπος man μέν indeed εἰμι I am Ἰουδαῖος, Jew, Ταρσεὺς Tarsian τῆς of the Κιλικίας, Cilicia, οὐκ not ἀσήμου of insignificant πόλεως city πολίτης· citizen; δέομαι I supplicate δέ but σου, of you, ἐπίτρεψόν permit μοι to me λαλῆσαι to speak πρὸς toward τὸν the λαόν. people. 40 ἐπιτρέψαντος Having permitted δὲ but αὐτοῦ of him ὁ the Παῦλος Paul ἑστὼς having stood ἐπὶ upon τῶν the ἀναβαθμῶν steps up κατέσεισε shook down τῇ to the χειρὶ hand τῷ to the λαῷ, people, πολλῆς of much δὲ but σιγῆς silence γενομένης having occurred προσεφώνησεν he sounded toward τῇ to the ᾿Εβραΐδι Hebrew διαλέκτῳ language λέγων saying

22 Ἄνδρες Male persons ἀδελφοὶ brothers καὶ and πατέρες, fathers, ἀκούσατέ hear YOU μου of me τῆς of the πρὸς toward ὑμᾶς YOU νυνὶ now ἀπολογίας.— defense.— 2 ἀκούσαντες Having heard δὲ but ὅτι that τῇ to the ᾿Εβραΐδι Hebrew διαλέκτῳ language προσεφώνει he was sounding toward αὐτοῖς them μᾶλλον rather παρέσχον they furnished ἡσυχίαν. quietness. καί And φησιν— he is saying— 3 ᾿Εγώ I εἰμι am ἀνὴρ male person Ἰουδαῖος, Jew γεγεννημένος having been generated ἐν in Ταρσῷ Tarsus τῆς of the Κιλικίας, Cilicia, ἀνατεθραμμένος having been nourished up δὲ but ἐν in τῇ the πόλει city ταύτῃ this παρὰ beside τοὺς the πόδας feet Γαμαλιήλ, of Gamaliel, πεπαιδευμένος having been instructed κατὰ according to ἀκρίβειαν strictness τοῦ of the πατρῴου paternal νόμου, Law, ζηλωτὴς zealot ὑπάρχων being τοῦ of the θεοῦ God καθὼς according as πάντες all ὑμεῖς YOU ἐστὲ are σήμερον, today, 4 ὃς who ταύτην this τὴν the ὁδὸν way ἐδίωξα I persecuted ἄχρι until θανάτου, death, δεσμεύων binding καὶ and παραδιδοὺς giving beside εἰς into φυλακὰς prisons ἄνδρας male persons τε and καὶ also γυναῖκας, women, 5 ὡς as καὶ also ὁ the ἀρχιερεὺς chief priest μαρτυρεῖ is bearing witness μοι to me καὶ and πᾶν all τὸ the πρεσβυτέριον· body of older men; παρ’ beside ὧν of whom καὶ also ἐπιστολὰς letters δεξάμενος having received πρὸς toward τοὺς the ἀδελφοὺς brothers εἰς into Δαμασκὸν Damascus ἐπορευόμην I was going my way ἄξων being about to lead καὶ also τοὺς the (ones) ἐκεῖσε thither ὄντας being δεδεμένους having been bound εἰς into Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem ἵνα in order that τιμωρηθῶσιν. they might be punished.

6 ᾿Εγένετο It occurred δέ but μοι to me πορευομένῳ going my way καὶ and ἐγγίζοντι coming near τῇ to the Δαμασκῷ Damascus περὶ about μεσημβρίαν midday ἐξαίφνης suddenly ἐκ out of τοῦ the οὐρανοῦ heaven περιαστράψαι to flash around φῶς light ἱκανὸν sufficient περὶ around ἐμέ, me, 7 ἔπεσά I fell τε and εἰς into τὸ the ἔδαφος ground καὶ and ἤκουσα I heard φωνῆς of voice λεγούσης saying μοι to me Σαούλ Saul Σαούλ, Saul, τί why με me διώκεις; are you persecuting? 8 ἐγὼ I δὲ but ἀπεκρίθην I answered Τίς Who εἶ, are you, κύριε; Lord? εἶπέν He said τε and πρὸς toward ἐμέ me ᾿Εγώ I εἰμι am Ἰησοῦς Jesus ὁ the Ναζωραῖος Nazarene ὃν whom σὺ you διώκεις. are persecuting. 9 οἱ The (ones) δὲ but σὺν together with ἐμοὶ me ὄντες being τὸ the μὲν indeed φῶς light ἐθεάσαντο they viewed τὴν the δὲ but φωνὴν voice οὐκ not ἤκουσαν they heard τοῦ of the (one) λαλοῦντός speaking μοι. to me. 10 εἶπον I said δέ but Τί What ποιήσω, shall I do, κύριε; Lord? ὁ The δὲ but κύριος Lord εἶπεν said πρός toward με me ᾿Αναστὰς Having stood up πορεύου be going εἰς into Δαμασκόν, Damascus, κἀκεῖ and there σοι to you λαληθήσεται it will be spoken περὶ about πάντων all (things) ὧν which τέτακταί it has been arranged σοι to you ποιῆσαι. to do. 11 ὡς As δὲ but οὐκ not ἐνέβλεπον I was looking on ἀπὸ from τῆς the δόξης glory τοῦ of the φωτὸς light ἐκείνου, that, χειραγωγούμενος being led by the hand ὑπὸ by τῶν the (ones) συνόντων being with μοι me ἦλθον I came εἰς into Δαμασκόν. Damascus.

12 Ἁνανίας Ananias δέ but τις some ἀνὴρ male person εὐλαβὴς holding well κατὰ according to τὸν the νόμον, law, μαρτυρούμενος being witnessed about ὑπὸ by πάντων all τῶν the κατοικούντων inhabiting Ἰουδαίων, Jews, 13 ἐλθὼν having come πρὸς toward ἐμὲ me καὶ and ἐπιστὰς having stood upon εἶπέν he said μοι to me Σαοὺλ Saul ἀδελφέ, brother, ἀνάβλεψον· look again; κἀγὼ and I αὐτῇ to very τῇ the ὥρᾳ hour ἀνέβλεψα looked again εἰς into αὐτόν. him. 14 ὁ The (one) δὲ but εἶπεν said Ὁ The θεὸς God τῶν of the πατέρων fathers ἡμῶν of us προεχειρίσατό he took in advance into his hand σε you γνῶναι to know τὸ the θέλημα will αὐτοῦ of him καὶ and ἰδεῖν to see τὸν the δίκαιον righteous (one) καὶ and ἀκοῦσαι to hear φωνὴν voice ἐκ out of τοῦ the στόματος mouth αὐτοῦ, of him, 15 ὅτι because ἔσῃ you will be μάρτυς witness αὐτῷ to him πρὸς toward πάντας all ἀνθρώπους men ὧν of which (things) ἑώρακας you have seen καὶ and ἤκουσας. you heard. 16 καὶ And νῦν now τί why μέλλεις; are you being about? ἀναστὰς Having stood up βάπτισαι be baptized καὶ and ἀπόλουσαι wash away τὰς the ἁμαρτίας sins σου of you ἐπικαλεσάμενος having called upon τὸ the ὄνομα name αὐτοῦ. of him.

17 ᾿Εγένετο It occurred δέ but μοι to me ὑποστρέψαντι having returned εἰς into Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem καὶ and προσευχομένου praying μου of me ἐν in τῷ the ἱερῷ temple γενέσθαι to come to be με me ἐν in ἐκστάσει ecstasy 18 καὶ and ἰδεῖν to see αὐτὸν him λέγοντά saying μοι to me Σπεῦσον Speed up καὶ and ἔξελθε come you out ἐν in τάχει quickness ἐξ out of Ἰερουσαλήμ, Jerusalem, διότι through which οὐ not παραδέξονταί they will receive alongside σου of you μαρτυρίαν witness περὶ about ἐμοῦ. me. 19 κἀγὼ And I εἶπον said Κύριε, Lord, αὐτοὶ they ἐπίστανται are well knowing ὅτι that ἐγὼ I ἤμην was φυλακίζων imprisoning καὶ and δέρων flaying κατὰ down τὰς the συναγωγὰς synagogues τοὺς the (ones) πιστεύοντας believing ἐπὶ upon σέ· you; 20 καὶ and ὅτε when ἐξεχύννετο was being poured out τὸ the αἷμα blood Στεφάνου of Stephen τοῦ the μάρτυρός witness σου, of you, καὶ also αὐτὸς very ἤμην I was ἐφεστὼς having stood upon καὶ and συνευδοκῶν thinking well along with καὶ and φυλάσσων guarding τὰ the ἱμάτια outer garments τῶν of the (ones) ἀναιρούντων taking up αὐτόν. him. 21 καὶ And εἶπεν he said πρός toward με me Πορεύου, Be going your way, ὅτι because ἐγὼ I εἰς into ἔθνη nations μακρὰν long [way] ἐξαποστελῶ I shall send off out σε. you.

22 Ἤκουον They were hearing δὲ but αὐτοῦ of him ἄχρι until τούτου this τοῦ the λόγου word καὶ and ἐπῆραν they lifted upon τὴν the φωνὴν voice αὐτῶν of them λέγοντες saying Αἶρε Lift up ἀπὸ from τῆς the γῆς earth τὸν the τοιοῦτον, such one, οὐ not γὰρ for καθῆκεν it was fitting αὐτὸν him ζῇν. to be living. 23 κραυγαζόντων Crying aloud τε and αὐτῶν of them καὶ and ῥιπτούντων throwing about τὰ the ἱμάτια outer garments καὶ and κονιορτὸν dust βαλλόντων flinging εἰς into τὸν the ἀέρα air 24 ἐκέλευσεν commanded ὁ the χιλίαρχος chiliarch εἰσάγεσθαι to be being led in αὐτὸν him εἰς into τὴν the παρεμβολήν, encampment, εἴπας having said μάστιξιν to scourges ἀνετάζεσθαι to be being closely examined αὐτὸν him ἵνα in order that ἐπιγνῷ he might know fully δι’ through ἣν which αἰτίαν cause οὕτως thus ἐπεφώνουν they were sounding upon αὐτῷ. to him. 25 ὡς As δὲ but προέτειναν they stretched forth αὐτὸν him τοῖς to the ἱμᾶσιν straps εἶπεν he said πρὸς toward τὸν the ἑστῶτα having stood ἑκατόνταρχον centurion ὁ the Παῦλος Paul Εἰ If ἄνθρωπον man Ῥωμαῖον Roman καὶ and ἀκατάκριτον uncondemned ἔξεστιν it is lawful ὑμῖν to YOU μαστίζειν; to be scourging? 26 ἀκούσας Having heard δὲ but ὁ the ἑκατοντάρχης centurion προσελθὼν having come toward τῷ the χιλιάρχῳ chiliarch ἀπήγγειλεν he reported back λέγων saying Τί What μέλλεις are you about ποιεῖν; to be doing? ὁ The γὰρ for ἄνθρωπος man οὗτος this Ῥωμαῖός Roman ἐστιν. is. 27 προσελθὼν Having come toward δὲ but ὁ the χιλίαρχος chiliarch εἶπεν said αὐτῷ to him Λέγε Be saying μοι, to me, σὺ you Ῥωμαῖος Roman εἶ; are you? ὁ the (one) δὲ but ἔφη said Ναί. Yes. 28 ἀπεκρίθη Answered δὲ but ὁ the χιλίαρχος chiliarch ᾿Εγὼ I πολλοῦ of much κεφαλαίου sum [of money] τὴν the πολιτείαν citizenship ταύτην this ἐκτησάμην. acquired. ὁ The δὲ but Παῦλος Paul ἔφη said ᾿Εγὼ I δὲ but καὶ also γεγέννημαι. I have been generated.

29 εὐθέως Immediately οὖν therefore ἀπέστησαν stood off ἀπ’ from αὐτοῦ him οἱ the (ones) μέλλοντες being about αὐτὸν him ἀνετάζειν· to be closely examining; καὶ and ὁ the χιλίαρχος chiliarch δὲ but ἐφοβήθη became afraid ἐπιγνοὺς having known fully ὅτι that Ῥωμαῖός Roman ἐστιν he is καὶ and ὅτι that αὐτὸν him ἦν he was δεδεκώς. having bound.

30 Τῇ To the δὲ but ἐπαύριον morrow βουλόμενος wishing γνῶναι to know τὸ the ἀσφαλὲς steady (thing) τὸ the τί why κατηγορεῖται he is being accused ὑπὸ by τῶν the Ἰουδαίων Jews ἔλυσεν he loosed αὐτόν, him, καὶ and ἐκέλευσεν he commanded συνελθεῖν to come together τοὺς the ἀρχιερεῖς chief priests καὶ and πᾶν all τὸ the συνέδριον, Sanhedrin, καὶ and καταγαγὼν having led down τὸν the Παῦλον Paul ἔστησεν he made stand εἰς into αὐτούς. them.

23 ἀτενίσας Having looked intently δὲ but Παῦλος Paul τῷ to the συνεδρίῳ Sanhedrin εἶπεν said Ἄνδρες Male persons ἀδελφοί, brothers, ἐγὼ I πάσῃ to all συνειδήσει conscience ἀγαθῇ good πεπολίτευμαι I have behaved as citizen τῷ to the θεῷ God ἄχρι until ταύτης this τῆς the ἡμέρας. day. 2 ὁ The δὲ but ἀρχιερεὺς chief priest Ἁνανίας Ananias ἐπέταξεν ordered τοῖς to the (ones) παρεστῶσιν having stood beside αὐτῷ him τύπτειν to be striking αὐτοῦ of him τὸ the στόμα. mouth. 3 τότε Then ὁ the Παῦλος Paul πρὸς toward αὐτὸν him εἶπεν said Τύπτειν To be striking σε you μέλλει is about ὁ the θεός, God, τοῖχε wall κεκονιαμένε· having been whitened; καὶ and σὺ you κάθῃ are sitting κρίνων judging με me κατὰ according to τὸν the νόμον, Law, καὶ and παρανομῶν acting contrary to Law κελεύεις you are commanding με me τύπτεσθαι; to be being struck? 4 οἱ The (ones) δὲ but παρεστῶτες having stood beside εἶπαν said Τὸν The ἀρχιερέα chief priest τοῦ of the θεοῦ God λοιδορεῖς; you are reviling? 5 ἔφη Said τε and ὁ the Παῦλος Paul Οὐκ Not ᾔδειν, I had known, ἀδελφοί, brothers, ὅτι that ἐστὶν he is ἀρχιερεύς· chief priest; γέγραπται it has been written γὰρ for ὅτι that ἄρχοντα ruler τοῦ of the λαοῦ people σου of you οὐκ not ἐρεῖς you will say κακῶς. badly.

6 Γνοὺς Having known δὲ but ὁ the Παῦλος Paul ὅτι that τὸ the ἓν one μέρος part ἐστὶν is Σαδδουκαίων of Sadducees τὸ the δὲ but ἕτερον different Φαρισαίων of Pharisees ἔκραζεν he was crying out ἐν in τῷ the συνεδρίῳ Sanhedrin Ἄνδρες Male persons ἀδελφοί, brothers, ἐγὼ I Φαρισαῖός Pharisee εἰμι, I am, υἱὸς son Φαρισαίων· of Pharisees; περὶ about ἐλπίδος hope καὶ and ἀναστάσεως resurrection νεκρῶν of dead (ones) κρίνομαι. I am being judged. 7 τοῦτο This δὲ but αὐτοῦ of him λαλοῦντος speaking ἐγένετο there occurred στάσις standing τῶν of the Φαρισαίων Pharisees καὶ and Σαδδουκαίων, Sadducees, καὶ and ἐσχίσθη was split τὸ the πλῆθος. multitude. 8 Σαδδουκαῖοι Sadducees γὰρ for λέγουσιν are saying μὴ not εἶναι to be ἀνάστασιν resurrection μήτε nor ἄγγελον angel μήτε nor πνεῦμα, spirit, Φαρισαῖοι Pharisees δὲ but ὁμολογοῦσιν are confessing τὰ the ἀμφότερα. both (things). 9 ἐγένετο Occurred δὲ but κραυγὴ outcry μεγάλη, great, καὶ and ἀναστάντες having stood up τινὲς some τῶν of the γραμματέων scribes τοῦ of the μέρους part τῶν of the Φαρισαίων Pharisees διεμάχοντο were fighting through λέγοντες saying Οὐδὲν Nothing κακὸν bad εὑρίσκομεν we are finding ἐν in τῷ the ἀνθρώπῳ man τούτῳ· this; εἰ if δὲ but πνεῦμα spirit ἐλάλησεν spoke αὐτῷ to him ἢ or ἄγγελος—. angel—. 10 Πολλῆς Of much δὲ but γινομένης occurring στάσεως of standing φοβηθεὶς having feared ὁ the χιλίαρχος chiliarch μὴ not διασπασθῇ should be drawn in two ὁ the Παῦλος Paul ὑπ’ by αὐτῶν them ἐκέλευσεν he commanded τὸ the στράτευμα soldier band καταβὰν having come down ἁρπάσαι to snatch αὐτὸν him ἐκ out of μέσου middle αὐτῶν, of them, ἄγειν to be leading εἰς into τὴν the παρεμβολήν. encampment.

11 Τῇ To the δὲ but ἐπιούσῃ succeeding νυκτὶ night ἐπιστὰς having stood upon αὐτῷ him ὁ the κύριος Lord εἶπεν said Θάρσει, Take courage, ὡς as γὰρ for διεμαρτύρω you gave thorough witness to τὰ the (things) περὶ about ἐμοῦ me εἰς into Ἰερουσαλὴμ Jerusalem οὕτω thus σε you δεῖ it is necessary καὶ also εἰς into Ῥώμην Rome μαρτυρῆσαι. to bear witness.

12 Γενομένης Having occurred δὲ but ἡμέρας of day ποιήσαντες having made συστροφὴν turning together οἱ the Ἰουδαῖοι Jews ἀνεθεμάτισαν bound under curse ἑαυτοὺς themselves λέγοντες saying μήτε neither φαγεῖν to eat μήτε nor πεῖν to drink ἕως until οὗ which ἀποκτείνωσιν they should kill τὸν the Παῦλον. Paul. 13 ἦσαν Were δὲ but πλείους more (ones) τεσσεράκοντα forty οἱ the (ones) ταύτην this τὴν the συνωμοσίαν swearing together ποιησάμενοι· having made; 14 οἵτινες who προσελθόντες having come toward τοῖς the ἀρχιερεῦσιν chief priests καὶ and τοῖς to the πρεσβυτέροις older men εἶπαν they said ᾿Αναθέματι To curse ἀνεθεματίσαμεν we cursed ἑαυτοὺς selves μηδενὸς of nothing γεύσασθαι to taste ἕως until οὗ which ἀποκτείνωμεν we may kill τὸν the Παῦλον. Paul. 15 νῦν Now οὖν therefore ὑμεῖς YOU ἐμφανίσατε make YOU apparent τῷ to the χιλιάρχῳ chiliarch σὺν together with τῷ the συνεδρίῳ Sanhedrin ὅπως so that καταγάγῃ he should lead down αὐτὸν him εἰς into ὑμᾶς YOU ὡς as μέλλοντας being about διαγινώσκειν to be knowing thoroughly ἀκριβέστερον more accurately τὰ the (things) περὶ about αὐτοῦ· him; ἡμεῖς we δὲ but πρὸ before τοῦ of the ἐγγίσαι to have come near αὐτὸν him ἕτοιμοί ready ἐσμεν we are τοῦ of the ἀνελεῖν to take up αὐτόν. him.

16 ᾿Ακούσας Having heard δὲ but ὁ the υἱὸς son τῆς of the ἀδελφῆς sister Παύλου of Paul τὴν the ἐνέδραν sitting in παραγενόμενος having come to be alongside καὶ and εἰσελθὼν having entered εἰς into τὴν the παρεμβολὴν encampment ἀπήγγειλεν he reported back τῷ to the Παύλῳ. Paul. 17 προσκαλεσάμενος Having called toward self δὲ but ὁ the Παῦλος Paul ἕνα one τῶν of the ἑκατονταρχῶν centurions ἔφη he said Τὸν The νεανίαν young man τοῦτον this ἄπαγε be leading off πρὸς toward τὸν the χιλίαρχον, chiliarch, ἔχει he is having γὰρ for ἀπαγγεῖλαί to report back τι something αὐτῷ. to him. 18 ὁ The (one) μὲν indeed οὖν therefore παραλαβὼν having taken along αὐτὸν him ἤγαγεν he led πρὸς toward τὸν the χιλίαρχον chiliarch καί and φησιν he is saying Ὁ The δέσμιος bound one Παῦλος Paul προσκαλεσάμενός having called toward self με me ἠρώτησεν he requested τοῦτον this τὸν the νεανίαν young man ἀγαγεῖν to lead πρὸς toward σέ, you, ἔχοντά having τι something λαλῆσαί to speak σοι. to you. 19 ἐπιλαβόμενος Having taken upon δὲ but τῆς of the χειρὸς hand αὐτοῦ of him ὁ the χιλίαρχος chiliarch καὶ and ἀναχωρήσας having withdrawn κατ’ according to ἰδίαν own [place] ἐπυνθάνετο he was inquiring Τί What ἐστιν is it ὃ which ἔχεις you are having ἀπαγγεῖλαί to report back μοι; to me? 20 εἶπεν He said δὲ but ὅτι that Οἱ The Ἰουδαῖοι Jews συνέθεντο put selves together τοῦ of the ἐρωτῆσαί to request σε you ὅπως so that αὔριον tomorrow τὸν the Παῦλον Paul καταγάγῃς you should lead down εἰς into τὸ the συνέδριον Sanhedrin ὡς as μέλλων being about τι something ἀκριβέστερον more accurately πυνθάνεσθαι to be inquiring περὶ about αὐτοῦ· him; 21 σὺ you οὖν therefore μὴ not πεισθῇς you should be persuaded αὐτοῖς, to them, ἐνεδρεύουσιν they are sitting in (wait) for γὰρ for αὐτὸν him ἐξ out of αὐτῶν them ἄνδρες male persons πλείους more (ones) τεσσεράκοντα, forty, οἵτινες who ἀνεθεμάτισαν bound under curse ἑαυτοὺς themselves μήτε neither φαγεῖν to eat μήτε nor πεῖν to drink ἕως until οὗ which ἀνέλωσιν they should take up αὐτόν, him, καὶ and νῦν now εἰσὶν they are ἕτοιμοι ready προσδεχόμενοι waiting for τὴν the ἀπὸ from σοῦ you ἐπαγγελίαν. promise. 22 ὁ The μὲν indeed οὖν therefore χιλίαρχος chiliarch ἀπέλυσε released τὸν the νεανίσκον young man παραγγείλας having charged μηδενὶ to no one ἐκλαλῆσαι to speak out ὅτι that ταῦτα these (things) ἐνεφάνισας you made apparent πρὸς toward ἐμέ. me.

23 Καὶ And προσκαλεσάμενός having called toward self τινας some δύο two τῶν of the ἑκατονταρχῶν centurions εἶπεν he said Ἑτοιμάσατε Make YOU ready στρατιώτας soldiers διακοσίους two hundred ὅπως so that πορευθῶσιν they should go ἕως until Καισαρίας, Caesarea, καὶ also ἱππεῖς horsemen ἑβδομήκοντα seventy καὶ and δεξιολάβους spearmen διακοσίους, two hundred, ἀπὸ from τρίτης third ὥρας hour τῆς of the νυκτός, night, 24 κτήνη acquired animals τε and παραστῆσαι to make stand alongside ἵνα in order that ἐπιβιβάσαντες having mounted τὸν the Παῦλον Paul διασώσωσι they might save clear through πρὸς toward Φήλικα Felix τὸν the ἡγεμόνα, governor, 25 γράψας having written ἐπιστολὴν letter ἔχουσαν having τὸν the τύπον type τοῦτον· this;

26 Κλαύδιος Claudius Λυσίας Lysias τῷ to the κρατίστῳ most mighty ἡγεμόνι governor Φήλικι Felix χαίρειν. To be rejoicing. 27 Τὸν The ἄνδρα male person τοῦτον this συλλημφθέντα having been seized ὑπὸ by τῶν the Ἰουδαίων Jews καὶ and μέλλοντα being about ἀναιρεῖσθαι to be taken up ὑπ’ by αὐτῶν them ἐπιστὰς having stood upon σὺν together with τῷ the στρατεύματι soldier band ἐξειλάμην, I took out, μαθὼν having learned ὅτι that Ῥωμαῖός Roman ἐστιν, he is, 28 βουλόμενός wishing τε and ἐπιγνῶναι to know fully τὴν the αἰτίαν cause δι’ through ἣν which ἐνεκάλουν they were bringing charges αὐτῷ to him κατήγαγον I led down εἰς into τὸ the συνέδριον Sanhedrin αὐτῶν· of them; 29 ὃν whom εὗρον I found ἐγκαλούμενον being charged περὶ about ζητημάτων things sought τοῦ of the νόμου Law αὐτῶν, of them, μηδὲν nothing δὲ but ἄξιον worthy θανάτου of death ἢ or δεσμῶν of bonds ἔχοντα having ἔγκλημα. charge. 30 μηνυθείσης Having been disclosed δέ but μοι to me ἐπιβουλῆς of plot εἰς into τὸν the ἄνδρα male person ἔσεσθαι to be in future ἐξαυτῆς out of very [hour] ἔπεμψα I sent πρὸς toward σέ, you, παραγγείλας having charged καὶ also τοῖς to the κατηγόροις accusers λέγειν to be saying πρὸς toward αὐτὸν him ἐπὶ upon σοῦ. you.

31 Οἱ The μὲν indeed οὖν therefore στρατιῶται soldiers κατὰ according to τὸ the (thing) διατεταγμένον having been ordered αὐτοῖς to them ἀναλαβόντες having taken up τὸν the Παῦλον Paul ἤγαγον they led διὰ through νυκτὸς night εἰς into τὴν the ᾿Αντιπατρίδα· Antipatris; 32 τῇ to the δὲ but ἐπαύριον morrow ἐάσαντες having permitted τοὺς the ἱππεῖς horsemen ἀπέρχεσθαι to be going away σὺν together with αὐτῷ him ὑπέστρεψαν they returned εἰς into τὴν the παρεμβολήν· encampment; 33 οἵτινες who εἰσελθόντες having entered εἰς into τὴν the Καισαρίαν Caesarea καὶ and ἀναδόντες having given up τὴν the ἐπιστολὴν letter τῷ to the ἡγεμόνι governor παρέστησαν they stood beside καὶ also τὸν the Παῦλον Paul αὐτῷ. to him. 34 ἀναγνοὺς Having read δὲ but καὶ and ἐπερωτήσας having inquired upon ἐκ out of ποίας what sort of ἐπαρχείας province ἐστὶν he is καὶ and πυθόμενος having inquired ὅτι that ἀπὸ from Κιλικίας Cilicia 35 Διακούσομαί I shall hear thoroughly σου, of you, ἔφη, he said, ὅταν whenever καὶ also οἱ the κατήγοροί accusers σου of you παραγένωνται· should come to be alongside; κελεύσας having commanded ἐν in τῷ the πραιτωρίῳ praetorium τοῦ of the Ἡρῴδου Herod φυλάσσεσθαι to be being guarded αὐτόν. him.

24 Μετὰ After δὲ but πέντε five ἡμέρας days κατέβη stepped down ὁ the ἀρχιερεὺς chief priest Ἁνανίας Ananias μετὰ with πρεσβυτέρων older men τινῶν some καὶ and ῥήτορος orator Τερτύλλου Tertullus τινός, some, οἵτινες who ἐνεφάνισαν made (things) apparent τῷ to the ἡγεμόνι governor κατὰ down on τοῦ the Παύλου. Paul. 2 κληθέντος Having been called δὲ but αὐτοῦ of him ἤρξατο started κατηγορεῖν to be accusing ὁ the Τέρτυλλος Tertullus λέγων saying

Πολλῆς Of much εἰρήνης peace τυγχάνοντες obtaining διὰ through σοῦ you καὶ and διορθωμάτων of reforms γινομένων occurring τῷ to the ἔθνει nation τούτῳ this διὰ through τῆς the σῆς your προνοίας forethought 3 πάντῃ to every [way] τε and καὶ also πανταχοῦ everywhere ἀποδεχόμεθα, we are accepting, κράτιστε mightiest Φῆλιξ, Felix, μετὰ with πάσης all εὐχαριστίας. thankfulness. 4 ἵνα In order that δὲ but μὴ not ἐπὶ upon πλεῖόν more σε you ἐνκόπτω, I may cut in, παρακαλῶ I entreat ἀκοῦσαί to hear σε you ἡμῶν of us συντόμως briefly τῇ to the σῇ your ἐπιεικίᾳ. yieldingness. 5 εὑρόντες Having found γὰρ for τὸν the ἄνδρα male person τοῦτον this λοιμὸν pestilence καὶ and κινοῦντα moving στάσεις standings πᾶσι to all τοῖς the Ἰουδαίοις Jews τοῖς the (ones) κατὰ down τὴν the οἰκουμένην being inhabited (earth) πρωτοστάτην one standing first τε and τῆς of the τῶν of the Ναζωραίων Nazarenes αἱρέσεως, of sect, 6 ὃς who καὶ also τὸ the ἱερὸν temple ἐπείρασεν tried βεβηλῶσαι, to profane, ὃν whom καὶ also ἐκρατήσαμεν, we took hold of, 7 —— —— 8 παρ’ beside οὗ of whom δυνήσῃ you will be able αὐτὸς very ἀνακρίνας having examined περὶ about πάντων all τούτων these (things) ἐπιγνῶναι to know fully ὧν of which (things) ἡμεῖς we κατηγοροῦμεν are accusing αὐτοῦ. of him.

9 συνεπέθεντο Joined in attack δὲ but καὶ also οἱ the Ἰουδαῖοι Jews φάσκοντες asserting ταῦτα these (things) οὕτως thus ἔχειν. to be having. 10 ᾿Απεκρίθη Answered τε and ὁ the Παῦλος Paul νεύσαντος having nodded αὐτῷ to him τοῦ of the ἡγεμόνος governor λέγειν to be speaking

᾿Εκ Out of πολλῶν many ἐτῶν years ὄντα being σε you κριτὴν judge τῷ to the ἔθνει nation τούτῳ this ἐπιστάμενος knowing well εὐθύμως readily τὰ the (things) περὶ about ἐμαυτοῦ myself ἀπολογοῦμαι, I am speaking in defense, 11 δυναμένου being able σου of you ἐπιγνῶναι, to know fully, ὅτι that οὐ not πλείους more (ones) εἰσίν are μοι to me ἡμέραι days δώδεκα twelve ἀφ’ from ἧς which [day] ἀνέβην I went up προσκυνήσων intending to worship εἰς into Ἰερουσαλήμ, Jerusalem, 12 καὶ and οὔτε neither ἐν in τῷ the ἱερῷ temple εὗρόν they found με me πρός toward τινα anyone διαλεγόμενον arguing ἢ or ἐπίστασιν standing upon ποιοῦντα making ὄχλου of crowd οὔτε neither ἐν in ταῖς the συναγωγαῖς synagogues οὔτε nor κατὰ down τὴν the πόλιν, city, 13 οὐδὲ nor παραστῆσαι to set beside δύνανταί they are able σοι to you περὶ about ὧν which (things) νυνὶ now κατηγοροῦσίν they are accusing μου. of me. 14 ὁμολογῶ I am confessing δὲ but τοῦτό this σοι to you ὅτι that κατὰ according to τὴν the ὁδὸν way ἣν which λέγουσιν they are saying αἵρεσιν sect οὕτως thus λατρεύω I am rendering sacred service τῷ to the πατρῴῳ paternal θεῷ, God, πιστεύων believing πᾶσι to all τοῖς the (things) κατὰ according to τὸν the νόμον Law καὶ and τοῖς to the (things) ἐν in τοῖς the προφήταις Prophets γεγραμμένοις, having been written, 15 ἐλπίδα hope ἔχων having εἰς into τὸν the θεόν, God, ἣν which καὶ also αὐτοὶ they οὗτοι these προσδέχονται, are receiving toward, ἀνάστασιν resurrection μέλλειν to be about ἔσεσθαι to be in future δικαίων of just (ones) τε and καὶ also ἀδίκων· unjust (ones); 16 ἐν in τούτῳ this καὶ also αὐτὸς very ἀσκῶ I am taking exercise ἀπρόσκοπον inoffensive συνείδησιν conscience ἔχειν to be having πρὸς toward τὸν the θεὸν God καὶ and τοὺς the ἀνθρώπους men διὰ through παντός. all [time]. 17 δι’ Through ἐτῶν years δὲ but πλειόνων more ἐλεημοσύνας gifts of mercy ποιήσων intending to make εἰς into τὸ the ἔθνος nation μου of me παρεγενόμην I came to be alongside καὶ and προσφοράς, offerings, 18 ἐν in αἷς which εὗρόν they found με me ἡγνισμένον having been cleansed ἐν in τῷ the ἱερῷ, temple, οὐ not μετὰ with ὄχλου crowd οὐδὲ nor μετὰ with θορύβου, tumult, τινὲς some ones δὲ but ἀπὸ from τῆς the ᾿Ασίας Asia Ἰουδαῖοι, Jews, 19 οὓς whom ἔδει it was necessary ἐπὶ upon σοῦ you παρεῖναι to be alongside καὶ and κατηγορεῖν to be accusing εἴ if τι anything ἔχοιεν they may be having πρὸς toward ἐμέ,— me,— 20 ἢ or αὐτοὶ they οὗτοι these εἰπάτωσαν let them say τί what εὗρον they found ἀδίκημα unrighteous thing στάντος having stood μου of me ἐπὶ upon τοῦ the συνεδρίου Sanhedrin 21 ἢ than περὶ about μιᾶς one ταύτης this φωνῆς voice ἧς of which ἐκέκραξα I cried out ἐν in αὐτοῖς them ἑστὼς having stood ὅτι that Περὶ About ἀναστάσεως resurrection νεκρῶν of dead (ones) ἐγὼ I κρίνομαι am being judged σήμερον today ἐφ’ upon ὑμῶν. YOU.

22 ᾿Ανεβάλετο Thrust up δὲ but αὐτοὺς them ὁ the Φῆλιξ, Felix, ἀκριβέστερον more accurately εἰδὼς having known τὰ the (things) περὶ about τῆς the ὁδοῦ, way, εἴπας having said Ὅταν Whenever Λυσίας Lysias ὁ the χιλίαρχος chiliarch καταβῇ should step down διαγνώσομαι I shall know thoroughly τὰ the (things) καθ’ down ὑμᾶς· YOU; 23 διαταξάμενος having ordered τῷ to the ἑκατοντάρχῃ centurion τηρεῖσθαι to be being observed αὐτὸν him ἔχειν to be having τε and ἄνεσιν relaxation καὶ and μηδένα no one κωλύειν to be forbidding τῶν of the ἰδίων own (ones) αὐτοῦ of his ὑπηρετεῖν to be ministering αὐτῷ. to him.

24 Μετὰ After δὲ but ἡμέρας days τινὰς some παραγενόμενος having come to be alongside ὁ the Φῆλιξ Felix σὺν together with Δρουσίλλῃ Drusilla τῇ the ἰδίᾳ own γυναικὶ woman οὔσῃ being Ἰουδαίᾳ Jewess μετεπέμψατο he sent after τὸν the Παῦλον Paul καὶ and ἤκουσεν he heard αὐτοῦ of him περὶ about τῆς the εἰς into Χριστὸν Christ Ἰησοῦν Jesus πίστεως. faith. 25 διαλεγομένου Reasoning δὲ but αὐτοῦ of him περὶ about δικαιοσύνης righteousness καὶ and ἐγκρατείας self-control καὶ and τοῦ the κρίματος judgment τοῦ the μέλλοντος being about ἔμφοβος in fear γενόμενος having become ὁ the Φῆλιξ Felix ἀπεκρίθη answered Τὸ The νῦν now ἔχον having πορεύου, be going you, καιρὸν appointed time δὲ but μεταλαβὼν having taken share in μετακαλέσομαί I shall call after σε· you; 26 ἅμα at the same time καὶ also ἐλπίζων hoping ὅτι that χρήματα monies δοθήσεται will be given αὐτῷ him ὑπὸ by τοῦ the Παύλου· Paul; διὸ through which καὶ also πυκνότερον more often αὐτὸν him μεταπεμπόμενος sending after ὡμίλει he was conversing αὐτῷ. to him. 27 Διετίας Of two-year period δὲ but πληρωθείσης having been fulfilled ἔλαβεν received διάδοχον successor ὁ the Φῆλιξ Felix Πόρκιον Porcius Φῆστον· Festus; θέλων willing τε but χάριτα favor καταθέσθαι to put down τοῖς to the Ἰουδαίοις Jews ὁ the Φῆλιξ Felix κατέλιπε left down τὸν the Παῦλον Paul δεδεμένον. having been bound.

25 Φῆστος Festus οὖν therefore ἐπιβὰς having stepped upon τῇ the ἐπαρχείᾳ province μετὰ after τρεῖς three ἡμέρας days ἀνέβη stepped up εἰς into Ἰεροσόλυμα Jerusalem ἀπὸ from Καισαρίας, Caesarea, 2 ἐνεφάνισάν made (things) apparent τε and αὐτῷ to him οἱ the ἀρχιερεῖς chief priests καὶ and οἱ the πρῶτοι first (ones) τῶν of the Ἰουδαίων Jews κατὰ down on τοῦ the Παύλου, Paul, καὶ and παρεκάλουν were entreating αὐτὸν him 3 αἰτούμενοι requesting χάριν favor κατ’ down on αὐτοῦ him ὅπως so that μεταπέμψηται he should send after αὐτὸν him εἰς into Ἰερουσαλήμ, Jerusalem, ἐνέδραν sitting in ποιοῦντες making ἀνελεῖν to take up αὐτὸν him κατὰ down τὴν the ὁδόν. way. 4 ὁ The μὲν indeed οὖν therefore Φῆστος Festus ἀπεκρίθη answered τηρεῖσθαι to be being observed τὸν the Παῦλον Paul εἰς into Καισαρίαν, Caesarea, ἑαυτὸν himself δὲ but μέλλειν to be about ἐν in τάχει haste ἐκπορεύεσθαι· to be going out; 5 Οἱ the (ones) οὖν therefore ἐν in ὑμῖν, YOU, φησίν, he says, δυνατοὶ powerful (ones) συνκαταβάντες having stepped down together εἴ if τί anything ἐστιν is ἐν in τῷ the ἀνδρὶ male person ἄτοπον out of place κατηγορείτωσαν let them accuse αὐτοῦ. him.

6 Διατρίψας Having spent through δὲ but ἐν in αὐτοῖς them ἡμέρας days οὐ not πλείους more ὀκτὼ eight ἢ or δέκα, ten, καταβὰς having stepped down εἰς into Καισαρίαν, Caesarea, τῇ to the ἑπαύριον morrow καθίσας having sat down ἐπὶ upon τοῦ the βήματος step ἐκέλευσεν he commanded τὸν the Παῦλον Paul ἀχθῆναι. to be led. 7 παραγενομένου Having come to be alongside δὲ but αὐτοῦ of him περιέστησαν stood around αὐτὸν him οἱ the ἀπὸ from Ἰεροσολύμων Jerusalem καταβεβηκότες having stepped down Ἰουδαῖοι, Jews, πολλὰ many καὶ and βαρέα heavy αἰτιώματα causes of blame καταφέροντες bringing against ἃ which οὐκ not ἴσχυον they were strong enough ἀποδεῖξαι, to show forth,

8 τοῦ of the Παύλου Paul ἀπολογουμένου saying in defense ὅτι that Οὔτε Neither εἰς into τὸν the νόμον Law τῶν of the Ἰουδαίων Jews οὔτε nor εἰς into τὸ the ἱερὸν temple οὔτε nor εἰς into Καίσαρά Caesar τι anything ἥμαρτον. I sinned. 9 ὁ The Φῆστος Festus δὲ but θέλων willing τοῖς to the Ἰουδαίοις Jews χάριν favor καταθέσθαι to lay down ἀποκριθεὶς having answered τῷ to the Παύλῳ Paul εἶπεν he said Θέλεις Are you willing εἰς into Ἰεροσόλυμα Jerusalem ἀναβὰς having stepped up ἐκεῖ there περὶ about τούτων these (things) κριθῆναι to be judged ἐπ’ upon ἐμοῦ; me? 10 εἶπεν Said δὲ but ὁ the Παῦλος Paul Ἑστὼς Having stood ἐπὶ upon τοῦ the βήματος step Καίσαρός of Caesar εἰμι, I am, οὗ where με me δεῖ it is necessary κρίνεσθαι. to be being judged. Ἰουδαίους Jews οὐδὲν nothing ἠδίκηκα, I have treated unrighteously, ὡς as καὶ also σὺ you κάλλιον finer ἐπιγινώσκεις. are knowing fully. 11 εἰ If μὲν indeed οὖν therefore ἀδικῶ I am doing unrighteously καὶ and ἄξιον worthy θανάτου of death πέπραχά I have done τι, anything, οὐ not παραιτοῦμαι I am begging off τὸ the ἀποθανεῖν· to die; εἰ if δὲ but οὐδὲν nothing ἔστιν is ὧν of which (things) οὗτοι these κατηγοροῦσίν are accusing μου, me, οὐδείς no one με me δύναται is able αὐτοῖς to them χαρίσασθαι· to hand over as favor; Καίσαρα Caesar ἐπικαλοῦμαι. I am calling upon. 12 τότε Then ὁ the Φῆστος Festus συνλαλήσας having spoken together μετὰ with τοῦ the συμβουλίου council ἀπεκρίθη he answered Καίσαρα Caesar ἐπικέκλησαι, you have called upon, ἐπὶ upon Καίσαρα Caesar πορεύσῃ. you will go.

13 Ἡμερῶν Of days δὲ but διαγενομένων having occurred through τινῶν of some ᾿Αγρίππας Agrippa ὁ the βασιλεὺς king καὶ and Βερνίκη Bernice κατήντησαν attained down εἰς into Καισαρίαν Caesarea ἀσπασάμενοι having greeted τὸν the Φῆστον. Festus. 14 ὡς As δὲ but πλείους more ἡμέρας days διέτριβον they were spending through ἐκεῖ, there, ὁ the Φῆστος Festus τῷ to the βασιλεῖ king ἀνέθετο put up τὰ the (things) κατὰ according to τὸν the Παῦλον Paul λέγων saying

᾿Ανήρ Male person τίς some ἐστιν is καταλελιμμένος having been left down ὑπὸ by Φήλικος Felix δέσμιος, bound one, 15 περὶ about οὗ whom γενομένου having come to be μου of me εἰς into Ἰεροσόλυμα Jerusalem ἐνεφάνισαν made (things) apparent οἱ the ἀρχιερεῖς chief priests καὶ and οἱ the πρεσβύτεροι older men τῶν of the Ἰουδαίων, Jews, αἰτούμενοι asking κατ’ down on αὐτοῦ him καταδίκην· adverse judgment; 16 πρὸς toward οὓς whom ἀπεκρίθην I answered ὅτι that οὐκ not ἔστιν is ἔθος custom Ῥωμαίοις to Romans χαρίζεσθαί to hand over as favor τινα any ἄνθρωπον man πρὶν prior ἢ than ὁ the (one) κατηγορούμενος being accused κατὰ according to πρόσωπον face ἔχοι may be having τοὺς the κατηγόρους accusers τόπον place τε and ἀπολογίας of defense λάβοι he might receive περὶ about τοῦ the ἐγκλήματος. charge. 17 συνελθόντων Of (ones) having come together οὖν therefore ἐνθάδε in here ἀναβολὴν delay μηδεμίαν none ποιησάμενος having made τῇ to the [day] ἑξῆς of succession καθίσας having sat ἐπὶ upon τοῦ the βήματος step ἐκέλευσα I commanded ἀχθῆναι to be led τὸν the ἄνδρα· male person; 18 περὶ about οὗ whom σταθέντες having stood οἱ the κατήγοροι accusers οὐδεμίαν not any αἰτίαν cause ἔφερον were bringing ὧν of which (things) ἐγὼ I ὑπενόουν was supposing πονηρῶν, wicked (things), 19 ζητήματα things sought δέ but τινα some περὶ about τῆς the ἰδίας own δεισιδαιμονίας dread of demon (s) εἶχον they were having πρὸς toward αὐτὸν him καὶ and περί about τινος some Ἰησοῦ Jesus τεθνηκότος, having died, ὃν whom ἔφασκεν was asserting ὁ the Παῦλος Paul ζῇν. to be living. 20 ἀπορούμενος Being perplexed δὲ but ἐγὼ I τὴν the περὶ about τούτων these (things) ζήτησιν seeking ἔλεγον I was saying εἰ if βούλοιτο he would be wishing πορεύεσθαι to be going εἰς into Ἰεροσόλυμα Jerusalem κἀκεῖ and there κρίνεσθαι to be being judged περὶ about τούτων. these (things). 21 τοῦ Of the δὲ but Παύλου Paul ἐπικαλεσαμένου having called upon τηρηθῆναι to be observed αὐτὸν him εἰς into τὴν the τοῦ of the Σεβαστοῦ August One διάγνωσιν, thorough knowledge, ἐκέλευσα I commanded τηρεῖσθαι to be observed αὐτὸν him ἕως until οὗ which ἀναπέμψω I may send up αὐτὸν him πρὸς toward Καίσαρα. Caesar.

22 ᾿Αγρίππας Agrippa δὲ but πρὸς toward τὸν the Φῆστον Festus ᾿Εβουλόμην I was wishing καὶ also αὐτὸς very τοῦ of the ἀνθρώπου man ἀκοῦσαι. to hear. Αὔριον, Tomorrow, φησίν, he says, ἀκούσῃ you will hear αὐτοῦ. of him. 23 Τῇ To the οὖν therefore ἐπαύριον morrow ἐλθόντος having come τοῦ of the ᾿Αγρίππα Agrippa καὶ and τῆς of the Βερνίκης Bernice μετὰ with πολλῆς much φαντασίας appearance καὶ and εἰσελθόντων of (ones) having entered εἰς into τὸ the ἀκροατήριον audience chamber σύν together with τε and χιλιάρχοις chiliarchs καὶ and ἀνδράσιν male persons τοῖς the κατ’ down ἐξοχὴν eminence τῆς of the πόλεως city καὶ and κελεύσαντος having commanded τοῦ of the Φήστου Festus ἤχθη was led ὁ the Παῦλος. Paul. 24 καί And φησιν says ὁ the Φῆστος Festus ᾿Αγρίππα Agrippa βασιλεῦ king καὶ and πάντες all οἱ the συνπαρόντες being alongside with ἡμῖν us ἄνδρες, male persons, θεωρεῖτε YOU are beholding τοῦτον this (one) περὶ about οὗ whom ἅπαν all τὸ the πλῆθος multitude τῶν of the Ἰουδαίων Jews ἐνέτυχέν happened on μοι to me ἔν in τε and Ἰεροσολύμοις Jerusalem καὶ and ἐνθάδε, in here, βοῶντες shouting μὴ not δεῖν to be necessary αὐτὸν him ζῇν to be living μηκέτι. not yet. 25 ἐγὼ I δὲ but κατελαβόμην took down μηδὲν nothing ἄξιον worthy αὐτὸν him θανάτου of death πεπραχέναι, to have done, αὐτοῦ of him δὲ but τούτου of this (one) ἐπικαλεσαμένου having called upon τὸν the Σεβαστὸν August One ἔκρινα I judged πέμπειν. to be sending. 26 περὶ About οὗ whom ἀσφαλές steady τι anything γράψαι to write τῷ to the κυρίῳ lord οὐκ not ἔχω· I am having; διὸ through which προήγαγον I led forth αὐτὸν him ἐφ’ upon ὑμῶν YOU καὶ and μάλιστα most of all ἐπὶ upon σοῦ, you, βασιλεῦ King ᾿Αγρίππα, Agrippa, ὅπως so that τῆς of the ἀνακρίσεως examination γενομένης having occurred σχῶ I should have τί what γράψω· I shall write; 27 ἄλογον unreasonable γάρ for μοι to me δοκεῖ it seems πέμποντα sending δέσμιον bound one μὴ not καὶ also τὰς the κατ’ down on αὐτοῦ him αἰτίας causes σημᾶναι. to signify.

26 ᾿Αγρίππας Agrippa δὲ but πρὸς toward τὸν the Παῦλον Paul ἔφη said ᾿Επιτρέπεταί It is being permitted σοι to you ὑπὲρ over σεαυτοῦ yourself λέγειν. to be saying. τότε Then ὁ the Παῦλος Paul ἐκτείνας having stretched out τὴν the χεῖρα hand ἀπελογεῖτο he was making defense

2 Περὶ About πάντων all (things) ὧν of which ἐγκαλοῦμαι I am being charged ὑπὸ by Ἰουδαίων, Jews, βασιλεῦ King ᾿Αγρίππα, Agrippa, ἥγημαι I have considered ἐμαυτὸν myself μακάριον happy ἐπὶ upon σοῦ you μέλλων being about σήμερον today ἀπολογεῖσθαι, to be making defense, 3 μάλιστα most of all γνώστην knower ὄντα being σε you πάντων of all τῶν the κατὰ according to Ἰουδαίους Jews ἐθῶν customs τε and καὶ and ζητημάτων· things sought; διὸ through which δέομαι I am supplicating μακροθύμως long-spiritedly ἀκοῦσαί to hear μου. of me.

4 Τὴν The μὲν indeed οὖν therefore βίωσίν manner of life μου of me ἐκ out of νεότητος youth τὴν the ἀπ’ from ἀρχῆς beginning γενομένην having occurred ἐν in τῷ the ἔθνει nation μου of me ἔν in τε and Ἰεροσολύμοις Jerusalem ἴσασι have known πάντες all Ἰουδαῖοι, Jews, 5 προγινώσκοντές previously knowing με me ἄνωθεν, from above, ἐὰν if ever θέλωσι they may will μαρτυρεῖν, to be bearing witness, ὅτι that κατὰ according to τὴν the ἀκριβεστάτην strictest αἵρεσιν sect τῆς of the ἡμετέρας our θρησκείας form of worship ἔζησα I lived Φαρισαῖος. Pharisee. 6 καὶ And νῦν now ἐπ’ upon ἐλπίδι hope τῆς of the εἰς into τοὺς the πατέρας fathers ἡμῶν of us ἐπαγγελίας promise γενομένης having occurred ὑπὸ by τοῦ the θεοῦ God ἕστηκα I have stood κρινόμενος, being judged, 7 εἰς into ἣν which τὸ the δωδεκάφυλον twelve tribeship ἡμῶν of us ἐν in ἐκτενείᾳ earnestness νύκτα night καὶ and ἡμέραν day λατρεῦον rendering sacred service ἐλπίζει is hoping καταντῆσαι· to attain down; περὶ about ἧς which ἐλπίδος hope ἐγκαλοῦμαι I am being charged ὑπὸ by Ἰουδαίων, Jews, βασιλεῦ. king.

8 τί Why ἄπιστον unbelievable κρίνεται is it being judged παρ’ beside ὑμῖν YOU εἰ if ὁ the θεὸς God νεκροὺς dead (ones) ἐγείρει; is raising up? 9 ᾿Εγὼ I μὲν indeed οὖν therefore ἔδοξα thought ἐμαυτῷ to myself πρὸς toward τὸ the ὄνομα name Ἰησοῦ of Jesus τοῦ the Ναζωραίου Nazarene δεῖν to be necessary πολλὰ many (things) ἐναντία contrary πρᾶξαι· to perform; 10 ὃ which (thing) καὶ also ἐποίησα I did ἐν in Ἰεροσολύμοις, Jerusalem, καὶ and πολλούς many τε and τῶν of the ἁγίων holy (ones) ἐγὼ I ἐν in φυλακαῖς prisons κατέκλεισα locked down τὴν the παρὰ beside τῶν of the ἀρχιερέων chief priests ἐξουσίαν authority λαβών, having received, ἀναιρουμένων being taken up τε and αὐτῶν of them κατήνεγκα I brought down ψῆφον, vote, 11 καὶ and κατὰ down πάσας all τὰς the συναγωγὰς synagogues πολλάκις many times τιμωρῶν punishing αὐτοὺς them ἠνάγκαζον I was compelling βλασφημεῖν, to be blaspheming, περισσῶς abundantly τε and ἐμμαινόμενος being mad αὐτοῖς to them ἐδίωκον I was persecuting ἕως until καὶ also εἰς into τὰς the ἔξω outside πόλεις. cities.

12 ᾿Εν In οἷς which (things) πορευόμενος going (my) way εἰς into τὴν the Δαμασκὸν Damascus μετ’ with ἐξουσίας authority καὶ and ἐπιτροπῆς permission τῆς of the τῶν of the ἀρχιερέων chief priests 13 ἡμέρας of day μέσης middle κατὰ down τὴν the ὁδὸν way εἶδον, I saw, βασιλεῦ, king, οὐρανόθεν from heaven ὑπὲρ over τὴν the λαμπρότητα brightness τοῦ of the ἡλίου sun περιλάμψαν having gleamed around με me φῶς light καὶ and τοὺς the (ones) σὺν together with ἐμοὶ me πορευομένους· going their way; 14 πάντων of all (ones) τε and καταπεσόντων having fallen down ἡμῶν of us εἰς into τὴν the γῆν earth ἤκουσα I heard φωνὴν voice λέγουσαν saying πρός toward με me τῇ to the ᾿Εβραΐδι Hebrew διαλέκτῳ language Σαούλ Saul Σαούλ, Saul, τί why με me διώκεις; are you persecuting? σκληρόν Hard σοι to you πρὸς toward κέντρα goads λακτίζειν. to be kicking. 15 ἐγὼ I δὲ but εἶπα said Τίς Who εἶ, are you, κύριε; Lord? ὁ The δὲ but κύριος Lord εἶπεν said ᾿Εγώ I εἰμι am Ἰησοῦς Jesus ὃν whom σὺ you διώκεις· are persecuting; 16 ἀλλὰ but ἀνάστηθι stand up καὶ and στῆθι stand ἐπὶ upon τοὺς the πόδας feet σου· of you; εἰς into τοῦτο this γὰρ for ὤφθην I became seen σοι, to you, προχειρίσασθαί to take in advance into hand σε you ὑπηρέτην subordinate καὶ and μάρτυρα witness ὧν of which (things) τε and εἶδές you saw με me ὧν of which (things) τε and ὀφθήσομαί I shall become seen σοι, to you, 17 ἐξαιρούμενός taking out σε you ἐκ out of τοῦ the λαοῦ people καὶ and ἐκ out of τῶν the ἐθνῶν, nations, εἰς into οὓς whom ἐγὼ I ἀποστέλλω am sending off σε you 18 ἀνοῖξαι to open up ὀφθαλμοὺς eyes αὐτῶν, of them, τοῦ of the ἐπιστρέψαι to turn upon ἀπὸ from σκότους darkness εἰς into φῶς light καὶ and τῆς of the ἐξουσίας authority τοῦ of the Σατανᾶ Satan ἐπὶ upon τὸν the θεόν, God, τοῦ of the λαβεῖν to receive αὐτοὺς them ἄφεσιν letting go off ἁμαρτιῶν of sins καὶ and κλῆρον lot ἐν in τοῖς the (ones) ἡγιασμένοις having been sanctified πίστει to faith τῇ the (one) εἰς into ἐμέ. me.

19 Ὅθεν, From which, βασιλεῦ King ᾿Αγρίππα, Agrippa, οὐκ not ἐγενόμην I became ἀπειθὴς disobedient τῇ to the οὐρανίῳ heavenly ὀπτασίᾳ, sight, 20 ἀλλὰ but τοῖς to the (ones) ἐν in Δαμασκῷ Damascus πρῶτόν first τε and καὶ and Ἰεροσολύμοις, Jerusalem, πᾶσάν all τε and τὴν the χώραν country τῆς of the Ἰουδαίας, Judea, καὶ and τοῖς to the ἔθνεσιν nations ἀπήγγελλον I was reporting back μετανοεῖν to be repenting καὶ and ἐπιστρέφειν to be turning ἐπὶ upon τὸν the θεόν, God, ἄξια worthy τῆς of the μετανοίας repentance ἔργα works πράσσοντας. performing. 21 ἕνεκα On account τούτων of these (things) με me Ἰουδαῖοι Jews συλλαβόμενοι having taken with ἐν in τῷ the ἱερῷ temple ἐπειρῶντο were attempting διαχειρίσασθαι. to manhandle thoroughly. 22 ἐπικουρίας Of help οὖν therefore τυχὼν having obtained τῆς of the ἀπὸ from τοῦ the θεοῦ God ἄχρι until τῆς the ἡμέρας day ταύτης this ἕστηκα I have stood μαρτυρόμενος bearing witness μικρῷ to small (one) τε and καὶ and μεγάλῳ, great (one), οὐδὲν nothing ἐκτὸς outside λέγων saying ὧν of which (things) τε and οἱ the προφῆται Prophets ἐλάλησαν spoke μελλόντων being about γίνεσθαι to be occurring καὶ and Μωυσῆς, Moses, 23 εἰ if παθητὸς subject to suffering ὁ the χριστός, Christ, εἰ if πρῶτος first ἐξ out of ἀναστάσεως resurrection νεκρῶν of dead (ones) φῶς light μέλλει is about καταγγέλλειν to be publishing τῷ to the τε and λαῷ people καὶ and τοῖς to the ἔθνεσιν. nations.

24 Ταῦτα These (things) δὲ but αὐτοῦ of him ἀπολογουμένου saying in defense ὁ the Φῆστος Festus μεγάλῃ to great τῇ the φωνῇ voice φησίν says Μαίνῃ, YOU are mad, Παῦλε· Paul; τὰ the πολλά many σε you γράμματα writings εἰς into μανίαν madness περιτρέπει. is turning about. 25 ὁ The δὲ but Παῦλος Paul Οὐ Not μαίνομαι, I am mad, φησίν, says, κράτιστε mightiest Φῆστε, Festus, ἀλλὰ but ἀληθείας of truth καὶ and σωφροσύνης soundness of mind ῥήματα sayings ἀποφθέγγομαι. I am uttering. 26 ἐπίσταται Is well knowing γὰρ for περὶ about τούτων these (things) ὁ the βασιλεύς, king, πρὸς toward ὃν whom παρρησιαζόμενος being outspoken λαλῶ· I am speaking; λανθάνειν to be escaping notice of γὰρ for αὐτὸν him τούτων of these (things) οὐ not πείθομαι I am being persuaded οὐθέν, nothing, οὐ not γάρ for ἐστιν is ἐν in γωνίᾳ corner πεπραγμένον having been performed τοῦτο. this. 27 πιστεύεις, You are believing, βασιλεῦ King ᾿Αγρίππα, Agrippa, τοῖς to the προφήταις; Prophets? οἶδα I have known ὅτι that πιστεύεις. you are believing. 28 ὁ The δὲ but ᾿Αγρίππας Agrippa πρὸς toward τὸν the Παῦλον Paul ᾿Εν In ὀλίγῳ little με me πείθεις you are persuading Χριστιανὸν Christian ποιῆσαι. to make. 29 ὁ The δὲ but Παῦλος Paul Εὐξαίμην I might long for ἂν likely τῷ to the θεῷ God καὶ and ἐν in ὀλίγῳ little καὶ and ἐν in μεγάλῳ great οὐ not μόνον only σὲ you ἀλλὰ but καὶ also πάντας all τοὺς the (ones) ἀκούοντάς hearing μου of me σήμερον today γενέσθαι to become τοιούτους such (ones) ὁποῖος of what sort καὶ also ἐγώ I εἰμι am παρεκτὸς with exception τῶν of the δεσμῶν bonds τούτων. these.

30 ᾿Ανέστη Stood up τε and ὁ the βασιλεὺς king καὶ and ὁ the ἡγεμὼν governor ἥ the τε and Βερνίκη Bernice καὶ and οἱ the (ones) συνκαθήμενοι sitting together αὐτοῖς, to them, 31 καὶ and ἀναχωρήσαντες having withdrawn ἐλάλουν they were speaking πρὸς toward ἀλλήλους one another λέγοντες saying ὅτι that Οὐδὲν Nothing θανάτου of death ἢ or δεσμῶν of bonds ἄξιον worthy πράσσει is performing ὁ the ἄνθρωπος man οὗτος. this. 32 ᾿Αγρίππας Agrippa δὲ but τῷ to the Φήστῳ Festus ἔφη said ᾿Απολελύσθαι To have been released ἐδύνατο was able ὁ the ἄνθρωπος man οὗτος this εἰ if μὴ not ἐπεκέκλητο he had called upon Καίσαρα. Caesar.

27 Ὡς As δὲ but ἐκρίθη it was judged τοῦ of the ἀποπλεῖν to be sailing away ἡμᾶς us εἰς into τὴν the Ἰταλίαν, Italy, παρεδίδουν they were giving over τόν the τε and Παῦλον Paul καί also τινας some ἑτέρους different δεσμώτας bound ones ἑκατοντάρχῃ to centurion ὀνόματι to name Ἰουλίῳ Julius σπείρης of band Σεβαστῆς. of August One. 2 ἐπιβάντες Having stepped upon δὲ but πλοίῳ to boat Ἁδραμυντηνῷ from Adramyttium μέλλοντι being about πλεῖν to be sailing εἰς into τοὺς the κατὰ down τὴν the ᾿Ασίαν Asia τόπους places ἀνήχθημεν, we were led up, ὄντος being σὺν together with ἡμῖν us ᾿Αριστάρχου of Aristarchus Μακεδόνος Macedonian Θεσσαλονικέως· of Thessalonica; 3 τῇ to the τε and ἑτέρᾳ different [day] κατήχθημεν we were led down εἰς into Σιδῶνα, Sidon, φιλανθρώπως with human affection τε and ὁ the Ἰούλιος Julius τῷ to the Παύλῳ Paul χρησάμενος having used ἐπέτρεψεν he permitted πρὸς toward τοὺς the φίλους friends πορευθέντι having gone ἐπιμελείας of care τυχεῖν. to obtain.

4 κἀκεῖθεν And from there ἀναχθέντες having been led up ὑπεπλεύσαμεν we sailed under τὴν the Κύπρον Cyprus διὰ through τὸ the τοὺς the ἀνέμους winds εἶναι to be ἐναντίους, contrary (ones), 5 τό the τε and πέλαγος open sea τὸ the κατὰ down τὴν the Κιλικίαν Cilicia καὶ and Παμφυλίαν Pamphylia διαπλεύσαντες having sailed through κατήλθαμεν we came down εἰς into Μύρρα Myra τῆς of the Λυκίας. Lycia. 6 Κἀκεῖ And there εὑρὼν having found ὁ the ἑκατοντάρχης centurion πλοῖον boat ᾿Αλεξανδρινὸν Alexandrian πλέον sailing εἰς into τὴν the Ἰταλίαν Italy ἐνεβίβασεν he made go in ἡμᾶς us εἰς into αὐτό. it. 7 ἐν In ἱκαναῖς sufficient δὲ but ἡμέραις days βραδυπλοοῦντες sailing slowly καὶ and μόλις with difficulty γενόμενοι having come to be κατὰ down τὴν the Κνίδον, Cnidus, μὴ not προσεῶντος allowing toward ἡμᾶς us τοῦ of the ἀνέμου, wind, ὑπεπλεύσαμεν we sailed under τὴν the Κρήτην Crete κατὰ down Σαλμώνην, Salmone, 8 μόλις with difficulty τε and παραλεγόμενοι laying themselves beside αὐτὴν it ἤλθομεν we came εἰς into τόπον place τινὰ some καλούμενον being called Καλοὺς Fine Λιμένας, Harbors, ᾧ to which ἐγγὺς near ἦν was πόλις city Λασέα. Lasea.

9 Ἱκανοῦ Of sufficient δὲ but χρόνου time διαγενομένου having come to be through καὶ and ὄντος being ἤδη already ἐπισφαλοῦς hazardous τοῦ of the πλοὸς sailing διὰ through τὸ the καὶ also τὴν the νηστείαν fast ἤδη already παρεληλυθέναι, to have come alongside, παρῄνει was recommending ὁ the Παῦλος Paul 10 λέγων saying αὐτοῖς to them Ἄνδρες, Male persons, θεωρῶ I am beholding ὅτι that μετὰ with ὕβρεως damage καὶ and πολλῆς much ζημίας loss οὐ not μόνον only τοῦ of the φορτίου cargo καὶ and τοῦ of the πλοίου boat ἀλλὰ but καὶ also τῶν of the ψυχῶν souls ἡμῶν of us μέλλειν to be about ἔσεσθαι to be in future τὸν the πλοῦν. sailing. 11 ὁ The δὲ but ἑκατοντάρχης centurion τῷ to the κυβερνήτῃ pilot καὶ and τῷ to the ναυκλήρῳ shipowner μᾶλλον rather ἐπείθετο was persuading himself ἢ than τοῖς to the (things) ὑπὸ by Παύλου Paul λεγομένοις. being said. 12 ἀνευθέτου Of inconvenient δὲ but τοῦ of the λιμένος harbor ὑπάρχοντος being πρὸς toward παραχειμασίαν wintering οἱ the πλείονες more (ones) ἔθεντο put βουλὴν counsel ἀναχθῆναι to be led up ἐκεῖθεν, from there, εἴ if πως somehow δύναιντο they would be able καταντήσαντες having attained down εἰς into Φοίνικα Phoenix παραχειμάσαι, to winter, λιμένα harbor τῆς of the Κρήτης Crete βλέποντα looking κατὰ down λίβα southwest (wind) καὶ and κατὰ down χῶρον. northwest (wind).

13 Ὑποπνεύσαντος Having blown under δὲ but νότου of south wind δόξαντες (ones) having thought τῆς of the προθέσεως purpose κεκρατηκέναι to have laid hold ἄραντες having lifted ἆσσον close by παρελέγοντο they were laying themselves beside τὴν the Κρήτην. Crete. 14 μετ’ After οὐ not πολὺ much δὲ but ἔβαλεν thrust κατ’ down on αὐτῆς it ἄνεμος wind τυφωνικὸς typhonic ὁ the καλούμενος being called Εὐρακύλων· Euroaquilo; 15 συναρπασθέντος having been snatched together δὲ but τοῦ of the πλοίου boat καὶ and μὴ not δυναμένου being able ἀντοφθαλμεῖν to be eyeing against τῷ to the ἀνέμῳ wind ἐπιδόντες having given upon ἐφερόμεθα. we were being borne. 16 νησίον Small island δέ but τι some ὑποδραμόντες having run under καλούμενον being called Καῦδα Cauda ἰσχύσαμεν we had strength enough μόλις with difficulty περικρατεῖς (ones) having full might over γενέσθαι to become τῆς of the σκάφης, skiff, 17 ἣν which ἄραντες having lifted up βοηθείαις helps ἐχρῶντο they were using ὑποζωννύντες undergirding τὸ the πλοῖον· boat; φοβούμενοί fearing τε and μὴ not εἰς into τὴν the Σύρτιν Syrtis ἐκπέσωσιν, they might fall out, χαλάσαντες having lowered τὸ the σκεῦος, gear, οὕτως thus ἐφέροντο. they were being borne. 18 σφοδρῶς Vehemently δὲ but χειμαζομένων being tempest-tossed ἡμῶν of us τῇ to the [day] ἑξῆς of succession ἐκβολὴν throwing out ἐποιοῦντο, they were making, 19 καὶ and τῇ to the τρίτῃ third [day] αὐτόχειρες acting with own hands τὴν the σκευὴν tackling τοῦ of the πλοίου boat ἔριψαν. they threw.

20 μήτε Neither δὲ but ἡλίου of sun μήτε nor ἄστρων of stars ἐπιφαινόντων appearing ἐπὶ upon πλείονας more ἡμέρας, days, χειμῶνός of winter τε and οὐκ not ὀλίγου of little ἐπικειμένου, lying upon, λοιπὸν leftover (thing) περιῃρεῖτο was being lifted around from ἐλπὶς hope πᾶσα all τοῦ of the σώζεσθαι to be being saved ἡμᾶς. us. 21 Πολλῆς Of much τε and ἀσιτίας abstinence from grain ὑπαρχούσης existing τότε then σταθεὶς having stood ὁ the Παῦλος Paul ἐν in μέσῳ midst αὐτῶν of them εἶπεν said Ἔδει It was necessary μέν, indeed, ὦ O ἄνδρες, male persons, πειθαρχήσαντάς having obeyed (as to ruler) μοι to me μὴ not ἀνάγεσθαι to be being led up ἀπὸ from τῆς the Κρήτης Crete κερδῆσαί to gain τε and τὴν the ὕβριν damage ταύτην this καὶ and τὴν the ζημίαν. loss. 22 καὶ And τὰ the (things) νῦν now παραινῶ I recommend ὑμᾶς YOU εὐθυμεῖν, to be being well spirited, ἀποβολὴ throwing off γὰρ for ψυχῆς of soul οὐδεμία not one ἔσται will be ἐξ out of ὑμῶν YOU πλὴν besides τοῦ of the πλοίου· boat; 23 παρέστη stood beside γάρ for μοι to me ταύτῃ to this τῇ the νυκτὶ night τοῦ of the θεοῦ God οὗ of whom εἰμί, I am, ᾧ to whom καὶ also λατρεύω, I am rendering sacred service, ἄγγελος angel 24 λέγων saying Μὴ Not φοβοῦ, fear, Παῦλε· Paul; Καίσαρί to Caesar σε you δεῖ it is necessary παραστῆναι, to stand beside, καὶ and ἰδοὺ look! κεχάρισταί has handed over as favor σοι to you ὁ the θεὸς God πάντας all τοὺς the (ones) πλέοντας sailing μετὰ with σοῦ. you. 25 διὸ Through which εὐθυμεῖτε, be being well spirited, ἄνδρες· male persons; πιστεύω I believe γὰρ for τῷ to the θεῷ God ὅτι that οὕτως thus ἔσται it will be καθ’ according to ὃν which τρόπον manner λελάληταί it had been spoken μοι. to me. 26 εἰς Into νῆσον island δέ but τινα some δεῖ it is necessary ἡμᾶς us ἐκπεσεῖν. to fall out.

27 Ὡς As δὲ but τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη fourteenth νὺξ night ἐγένετο occurred διαφερομένων being borne through ἡμῶν of us ἐν in τῷ the Ἁδρίᾳ, Adria, κατὰ down μέσον middle τῆς of the νυκτὸς night ὑπενόουν were supposing οἱ the ναῦται sailors προσάγειν to be leading toward τινὰ some αὐτοῖς to them χώραν. country. 28 καὶ And βολίσαντες having taken soundings εὗρον they found ὀργυιὰς fathoms εἴκοσι, twenty, βραχὺ briefly δὲ but διαστήσαντες having stood through καὶ and πάλιν again βολίσαντες having taken soundings εὗρον they found ὀργυιὰς fathoms δεκαπέντε· fifteen; 29 φοβούμενοί fearing τε and μή not που somewhere κατὰ down τραχεῖς rough τόπους places ἐκπέσωμεν we might fall out ἐκ out of πρύμνης stern ῥίψαντες having thrown ἀγκύρας anchors τέσσαρας four ηὔχοντο they were longing for ἡμέραν day γενέσθαι. to occur. 30 Τῶν Of the δὲ but ναυτῶν sailors ζητούντων seeking φυγεῖν to flee ἐκ out of τοῦ the πλοίου boat καὶ and χαλασάντων having lowered τὴν the σκάφην skiff εἰς into τὴν the θάλασσαν sea προφάσει to pretense ὡς as ἐκ out of πρῴρης prow ἀγκύρας anchors μελλόντων being about ἐκτείνειν, to be stretching out, 31 εἶπεν said ὁ the Παῦλος Paul τῷ to the ἑκατοντάρχῃ centurion καὶ and τοῖς to the στρατιώταις soldiers ᾿Εὰν If ever μὴ not οὗτοι these μείνωσιν should remain ἐν in τῷ the πλοίῳ, boat, ὑμεῖς YOU σωθῆναι to be saved οὐ not δύνασθε. YOU are able. 32 τότε Then ἀπέκοψαν cut off οἱ the στρατιῶται soldiers τὰ the σχοινία ropes τῆς of the σκάφης skiff καὶ and εἴασαν they permitted αὐτὴν it ἐκπεσεῖν. to fall out.

33 Ἄχρι Until δὲ but οὗ which ἡμέρα day ἤμελλεν was being about γίνεσθαι to be occurring παρεκάλει was encouraging ὁ the Παῦλος Paul ἅπαντας all (ones) μεταλαβεῖν to partake τροφῆς, of nourishment, λέγων saying Τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην Fourteenth σήμερον today ἡμέραν day προσδοκῶντες expecting ἄσιτοι without grain διατελεῖτε, YOU are finishing through, μηθὲν nothing προσλαβόμενοι· having taken toward selves; 34 διὸ through which παρακαλῶ I am encouraging ὑμᾶς YOU μεταλαβεῖν to partake τροφῆς, of nourishment, τοῦτο this γὰρ for πρὸς toward τῆς the ὑμετέρας YOUR σωτηρίας salvation ὑπάρχει· is; οὐδενὸς of no one γὰρ for ὑμῶν of YOU θρὶξ hair ἀπὸ from τῆς the κεφαλῆς head ἀπολεῖται. will destroy self. 35 εἴπας Having said δὲ but ταῦτα these (things) καὶ and λαβὼν having taken ἄρτον bread εὐχαρίστησεν he gave thanks τῷ to the θεῷ God ἐνώπιον in sight πάντων of all (ones) καὶ and κλάσας having broken ἤρξατο he started ἐσθίειν. to be eating. 36 εὔθυμοι Cheerful δὲ but γενόμενοι having become πάντες all καὶ also αὐτοὶ they προσελάβοντο took to selves τροφῆς. of nourishment. 37 ἤμεθα We were δὲ but αἱ the πᾶσαι all ψυχαὶ souls ἐν in τῷ the πλοίῳ boat ὡς about ἑβδομήκοντα seventy- ἕξ. six. 38 κορεσθέντες Having been satisfied δὲ but τροφῆς of nourishment ἐκούφιζον they were lightening τὸ the πλοῖον boat ἐκβαλλόμενοι throwing out τὸν the σῖτον grain εἰς into τὴν the θάλασσαν. sea.

39 Ὅτε When δὲ but ἡμέρα day ἐγένετο, occurred, τὴν the γῆν earth οὐκ not ἐπεγίνωσκον, they were recognizing, κόλπον bay δέ but τινα some κατενόουν they were perceiving ἔχοντα having αἰγιαλὸν beach εἰς into ὃν which ἐβουλεύοντο they were wishing εἰ if δύναιντο they would be able ἐξῶσαι to push out τὸ the πλοῖον. boat. 40 καὶ And τὰς the ἀγκύρας anchors περιελόντες having lifted away around εἴων they were permitting εἰς into τὴν the θάλασσαν, sea, ἅμα at the same time ἀνέντες having loosened up τὰς the ζευκτηρίας lashings τῶν of the πηδαλίων, rudders, καὶ and ἐπάραντες having lifted upon τὸν the ἀρτέμωνα foresail τῇ to the πνεούσῃ blowing κατεῖχον they were having down εἰς into τὸν the αἰγιαλόν. beach. 41 περιπεσόντες Having fallen around δὲ but εἰς into τόπον place διθάλασσον of two seas ἐπέκειλαν they ran shore τὴν the ναῦν, ship, καὶ and ἡ the μὲν indeed πρῷρα prow ἐρείσασα having stuck firmly ἔμεινεν remained ἀσάλευτος, unshakable, ἡ the δὲ but πρύμνα stern ἐλύετο was being loosened ὑπὸ by τῆς the βίας. violence. 42 Τῶν Of the δὲ but στρατιωτῶν soldiers βουλὴ counsel ἐγένετο became ἵνα in order that τοὺς the δεσμώτας ones in bonds ἀποκτείνωσιν, they should kill, μή not τις anyone ἐκκολυμβήσας having swum out διαφύγῃ· should flee through; 43 ὁ the δὲ but ἑκατοντάρχης centurion βουλόμενος wishing διασῶσαι to save through τὸν the Παῦλον Paul ἐκώλυσεν he was preventing αὐτοὺς them τοῦ of the βουλήματος, wish, ἐκέλευσέν he commanded τε and τοὺς the (ones) δυναμένους being able κολυμβᾷν to be swimming ἀπορίψαντας having thrown themselves off πρώτους first ἐπὶ upon τὴν the γῆν earth ἐξιέναι, to be going out, 44 καὶ and τοὺς the λοιποὺς leftover (ones) οὓς whom μὲν indeed ἐπὶ upon σανίσιν planks οὓς whom δὲ but ἐπί upon τινων some τῶν of the (things) ἀπὸ from τοῦ the πλοίου· boat; καὶ and οὕτως thus ἐγένετο it occurred πάντας all διασωθῆναι to be saved through ἐπὶ upon τὴν the γῆν. earth.

28 Καὶ And διασωθέντες having been saved through τότε then ἐπέγνωμεν we recognized ὅτι that Μελιτήνη Melita ἡ the νῆσος island καλεῖται. is being called. 2 οἵ The τε and βάρβαροι barbarians παρεῖχαν were having alongside οὐ not τὴν the τυχοῦσαν having happened φιλανθρωπίαν affection for mankind ἡμῖν, to us, ἅψαντες having touched off γὰρ for πυρὰν fire προσελάβοντο they received alongside πάντας all ἡμᾶς us διὰ through τὸν the ὑετὸν rain τὸν the ἐφεστῶτα having stood upon καὶ and διὰ through τὸ the ψῦχος. cold. 3 συστρέψαντος Having collected δὲ but τοῦ of the Παύλου Paul φρυγάνων of dry sticks τι some πλῆθος multitude καὶ and ἐπιθέντος having imposed ἐπὶ upon τὴν the πυράν, fire, ἔχιδνα viper ἀπὸ from τῆς the θέρμης heat ἐξελθοῦσα having come out καθῆψε fastened self down τῆς of the χειρὸς hand αὐτοῦ. of him. 4 ὡς As δὲ but εἶδαν saw οἱ the βάρβαροι barbarians κρεμάμενον hanging τὸ the θηρίον wild beast ἐκ out of τῆς the χειρὸς hand αὐτοῦ, of him, πρὸς toward ἀλλήλους one another ἔλεγον they were saying Πάντως By all means φονεύς murderer ἐστιν is ὁ the ἄνθρωπος man οὗτος this ὃν whom διασωθέντα having been saved through ἐκ out of τῆς the θαλάσσης sea ἡ the δίκη justice ζῇν to be living οὐκ not εἴασεν. permitted. 5 ὁ The μὲν indeed οὖν therefore ἀποτινάξας having shaken off τὸ the θηρίον wild beast εἰς into τὸ the πῦρ fire ἔπαθεν he suffered οὐδὲν nothing κακόν· bad; 6 οἱ the (ones) δὲ but προσεδόκων were expecting αὐτὸν him μέλλειν to be about πίμπρασθαι to be swelling ἢ or καταπίπτειν to be falling down ἄφνω suddenly νεκρόν. dead. ἐπὶ Upon πολὺ much δὲ but αὐτῶν of them προσδοκώντων expecting καὶ and θεωρούντων beholding μηδὲν nothing ἄτοπον out of place εἰς into αὐτὸν him γινόμενον, occurring, μεταβαλόμενοι having thrust selves around ἔλεγον they were saying αὐτὸν him εἶναι to be θεόν. god.

7 ᾿Εν In δὲ but τοῖς the [parts] περὶ about τὸν the τόπον place ἐκεῖνον that ὑπῆρχεν was χωρία pieces of ground τῷ to the πρώτῳ first [man] τῆς of the νήσου island ὀνόματι to name Ποπλίῳ, Publius, ὃς who ἀναδεξάμενος having received up ἡμᾶς us ἡμέρας days τρεῖς three φιλοφρόνως friendly-mindedly ἐξένισεν. entertained as stranger. 8 ἐγένετο It occurred δὲ but τὸν the πατέρα father τοῦ of the Ποπλίου Publius πυρετοῖς to fevers καὶ and δυσεντερίῳ to dysentery συνεχόμενον being held together κατακεῖσθαι, to be lying down, πρὸς toward ὃν whom ὁ the Παῦλος Paul εἰσελθὼν having gone in καὶ and προσευξάμενος having prayed ἐπιθεὶς having put upon τὰς the χεῖρας hands αὐτῷ to him ἰάσατο he healed αὐτόν. him. 9 τούτου Of this δὲ but γενομένου having occurred καὶ also οἱ the λοιποὶ leftover οἱ the (ones) ἐν in τῇ the νήσῳ island ἔχοντες having ἀσθενείας sicknesses προσήρχοντο they were coming toward καὶ and ἐθεραπεύοντο, they were being healed, 10 οἳ who καὶ also πολλαῖς to many τιμαῖς honors ἐτίμησαν honored ἡμᾶς us καὶ and ἀναγομένοις to (ones) being led up ἐπέθεντο they put upon τὰ the (things) πρὸς toward τὰς the χρείας. needs.

11 Μετὰ After δὲ but τρεῖς three μῆνας months ἀνήχθημεν we were led up ἐν in πλοίῳ boat παρακεχειμακότι (it) having wintered ἐν in τῇ the νήσῳ island ᾿Αλεξανδρινῷ, Alexandrian, παρασήμῳ to ensign Διοσκούροις. Dioscuri. 12 καὶ And καταχθέντες having been led down εἰς into Συρακούσας Syracuse ἐπεμείναμεν we remained upon ἡμέρας days τρεῖς, three, 13 ὅθεν from which περιελόντες having gone around κατηντήσαμεν we attained down εἰς into Ῥήγιον. Rhegium. καὶ And μετὰ after μίαν one ἡμέραν day ἐπιγενομένου having occurred upon νότου of south (wind) δευτεραῖοι second (day) ones ἤλθομεν we came εἰς into Ποτιόλους, Puteoli, 14 οὗ where εὑρόντες having found ἀδελφοὺς brothers παρεκλήθημεν we were called alongside παρ’ beside αὐτοῖς them ἐπιμεῖναι to remain upon ἡμέρας days ἑπτά· seven; καὶ and οὕτως thus εἰς into τὴν the Ῥώμην Rome ἤλθαμεν. we came. 15 κἀκεῖθεν And from there οἱ the ἀδελφοὶ brothers ἀκούσαντες having heard τὰ the (things) περὶ about ἡμῶν us ἦλθαν they came εἰς into ἀπάντησιν meeting ἡμῖν to us ἄχρι until ᾿Αππίου Appii Φόρου Forum καὶ and Τριῶν of Three Ταβερνῶν, Taverns, οὓς whom ἰδὼν having seen ὁ the Παῦλος Paul εὐχαριστήσας having given thanks τῷ to the θεῷ God ἔλαβε he took θάρσος. courage. 16 Ὅτε When δὲ but εἰσήλθαμεν we entered εἰς into Ῥώμην, Rome, ἐπετράπη it was permitted τῷ to the Παύλῳ Paul μένειν to be remaining καθ’ according to ἑαυτὸν himself σὺν together with τῷ the φυλάσσοντι guarding αὐτὸν him στρατιώτῃ. soldier.

17 ᾿Εγένετο It occurred δὲ but μετὰ after ἡμέρας days τρεῖς three συνκαλέσασθαι to be calling together αὐτὸν him τοὺς the (ones) ὄντας being τῶν of the Ἰουδαίων Jews πρώτους· first (ones); συνελθόντων having come together δὲ but αὐτῶν of them ἔλεγεν he was saying πρὸς toward αὐτούς them ᾿Εγώ, I, ἄνδρες male persons ἀδελφοί, brothers, οὐδὲν nothing ἐναντίον contrary ποιήσας having done τῷ to the λαῷ people ἢ or τοῖς to the ἔθεσι customs τοῖς the πατρῴοις paternal δέσμιος bound one ἐξ out of Ἰεροσολύμων Jerusalem παρεδόθην I was given beside εἰς into τὰς the χεῖρας hands τῶν of the Ῥωμαίων, Romans, 18 οἵτινες who ἀνακρίναντές having examined με me ἐβούλοντο were wishing ἀπολῦσαι to release διὰ through τὸ the μηδεμίαν not one αἰτίαν cause θανάτου of death ὑπάρχειν to be existing ἐν in ἐμοί· me; 19 ἀντιλεγόντων saying against δὲ but τῶν of the Ἰουδαίων Jews ἠναγκάσθην I was put under necessity ἐπικαλέσασθαι to call upon Καίσαρα, Caesar, οὐχ not ὡς as τοῦ of the ἔθνους nation μου of me ἔχων having τι anything κατηγορεῖν. to be accusing. 20 διὰ Through ταύτην this οὖν therefore τὴν the αἰτίαν cause παρεκάλεσα I entreated ὑμᾶς YOU ἰδεῖν to see καὶ and προσλαλῆσαι, to speak toward, εἵνεκεν on account γὰρ for τῆς of the ἐλπίδος hope τοῦ of the Ἰσραὴλ Israel τὴν the ἅλυσιν chain ταύτην this περίκειμαι. I am having lie around. 21 οἱ The (ones) δὲ but πρὸς toward αὐτὸν him εἶπαν said Ἡμεῖς We οὔτε neither γράμματα writings περὶ about σοῦ you ἐδεξάμεθα we received ἀπὸ from τῆς the Ἰουδαίας, Judea, οὔτε nor παραγενόμενός having come to be alongside τις anyone τῶν of the ἀδελφῶν brothers ἀπήγγειλεν he reported back ἢ or ἐλάλησέν he spoke τι anything περὶ about σοῦ you πονηρόν. wicked. 22 ἀξιοῦμεν We are considering worthy δὲ but παρὰ beside σοῦ of you ἀκοῦσαι to hear ἃ what (things) φρονεῖς, you are minding, περὶ about μὲν indeed γὰρ for τῆς of the αἱρέσεως sect ταύτης this γνωστὸν known ἡμῖν to us ἐστὶν it is ὅτι that πανταχοῦ everywhere ἀντιλέγεται. it is being said against.

23 Ταξάμενοι Having arranged δὲ but αὐτῷ to him ἡμέραν day ἦλθαν they came πρὸς toward αὐτὸν him εἰς into τὴν the ξενίαν lodging (place) πλείονες, more (ones), οἷς to whom ἐξετίθετο he was setting out διαμαρτυρόμενος thoroughly witnessing to τὴν the βασιλείαν kingdom τοῦ of the θεοῦ God πείθων persuading τε and αὐτοὺς them περὶ about τοῦ the Ἰησοῦ Jesus ἀπό from τε and τοῦ the νόμου law Μωυσέως of Moses καὶ and τῶν of the προφητῶν Prophets ἀπὸ from πρωὶ morning ἕως until ἑσπέρας. evening. 24 Καὶ And οἱ the (ones) μὲν indeed ἐπείθοντο were being persuaded τοῖς to the (things) λεγομένοις being said οἱ the (ones) δὲ but ἠπίστουν, were disbelieving, 25 ἀσύμφωνοι dissonant δὲ but ὄντες being πρὸς toward ἀλλήλους one another ἀπελύοντο, they were loosing selves off, εἰπόντος having said τοῦ of the Παύλου Paul ῥῆμα saying ἓν one ὅτι that

Καλῶς Finely τὸ the πνεῦμα spirit τὸ the ἅγιον holy ἐλάλησεν spoke διὰ through Ἠσαίου Isaiah τοῦ the προφήτου prophet πρὸς toward τοὺς the πατέρας fathers ὑμῶν of YOU 26 λέγων saying Πορεύθητι Go πρὸς toward τὸν the λαὸν people τοῦτον this καὶ and εἰπόν say ᾿Ακοῇ To hearing ἀκούσετε YOU will be hearing καὶ and οὐ not μὴ not συνῆτε, YOU should put together, καὶ and βλέποντες looking βλέψετε YOU will be looking καὶ and οὐ not μὴ not ἴδητε· YOU should see; 27 ἐπαχύνθη was thickened γὰρ for ἡ the καρδία heart τοῦ of the λαοῦ people τούτου, this, καὶ and τοῖς to the ὠσὶν ears βαρέως heavily ἤκουσαν, they heard, καὶ and τοὺς the ὀφθαλμοὺς eyes αὐτῶν of them ἐκάμμυσαν· they shut down; μή not ποτε at sometime ἴδωσιν they should see τοῖς to the ὀφθαλμοῖς eyes καὶ and τοῖς to the ὠσὶν ears ἀκούσωσιν they should hear καὶ and τῇ to the καρδίᾳ heart συνῶσιν they should put together καὶ and ἐπιστρέψωσιν, they should return, καὶ and ἰάσομαι I shall heal αὐτούς. them. 28 γνωστὸν Known οὖν therefore ὑμῖν to YOU ἔστω let it be ὅτι that τοῖς to the ἔθνεσιν nations ἀπεστάλη was sent off τοῦτο this τὸ the σωτήριον means of salvation τοῦ of the θεοῦ· God; αὐτοὶ they καὶ and ἀκούσονται. they will hear. 29 —— ——

30 ᾿Ενέμεινεν He remained in δὲ but διετίαν two-year period ὅλην whole ἐν in ἰδίῳ own μισθώματι, hired house, καὶ and ἀπεδέχετο was receiving from πάντας all τοὺς the (ones) εἰσπορευομένους going in πρὸς toward αὐτόν, him, 31 κηρύσσων preaching τὴν the βασιλείαν kingdom τοῦ of the θεοῦ God καὶ and διδάσκων teaching τὰ the (things) περὶ about τοῦ the κυρίου Lord Ἰησοῦ Jesus Χριστοῦ Christ μετὰ with πάσης all παρρησίας outspokenness ἀκωλύτως. unhinderedly.